俱舍論 義疏通講 · 冊6Abhidharmakośabhāṣya · Exposition Throughout · Vol. 6
道體·四諦二諦·入修加行The Nature of the Path · The Four Truths and the Two Truths · Entering Cultivation and the Preparatory Practices
全文五層 →Full five layers →讀這一卷之前
上一品把煩惱之斷說盡了,於是這一卷劈頭一句就轉身:「然斷必由道力故得,此所由道其相云何?」——斷惑不會自己發生,要靠道。整部賢聖品就從這一問開卷。
三家古德在這裡把科判的刀落在同一處,而且逐字同判三分:光記標「就此品中大文有三:一總明道體性、二明道所證諦、三約聖道辨人」,寶疏標「此品大文有三:一明道體性、二明道所觀、三就道辨人」,頌疏標「就此品中,大文有三:一總明道體性、二明道所證諦、三約道辨人」。三家獨立分卷而所判的三段完全一致,可見這三刀不是後人硬切的。本卷正好走完前兩段,並且踏進第三段的頭一節(明聖道加行)。
讀這一卷有一條線要先握住:它是一份『入道之前的準備清單』。先問道是什麼(體),再問道所照見的是什麼(四諦、二諦),再問怎樣才走得上去(住戒、三慧、身器清淨、入修二門)。中間插進一段全卷最密的爭論——樂受到底是不是真實有——那不是離題,那正是『苦諦能不能站得住』的地基之爭。地基若鬆,四諦第一諦就垮了。
還有一件事要說在前頭。本卷有兩處『論主自己站到有部這一邊』的地方(樂受實有、不喜足與大欲的訓詞),也有一處『論主替諸師出面難毘婆沙』的地方(三慧)。同一位作者,這一段護有部、那一段難毘婆沙——讀的時候不要急著替他歸隊,先看清每一段他所護的究竟是哪一條理。
一、道分兩截:見道唯是無漏,修道通有漏無漏
〔清單一〕為什麼見道不能有有漏的份。 先問:斷惑既然靠道,那道有沒有可能是世間的有漏道?論分兩截答:見道唯無漏,修道通二種。理由不是體例上的規定,是效能上的限制——「見道速能治三界故」,又「頓斷九品見所斷故,非世間道有此堪能」。世間道只能一地一地、一品一品地伏,做不到三界一時齊治、九品一剎那頓斷;做不到,就不能算數。
易誤處:以為「無漏」是一種身分標籤,於是把見道的無漏讀成『因為它高級所以無漏』。順序恰恰相反——是因為它有這種頓斷之能,才判它必是無漏。修道則「修道有異故通二種」,因為修道要一分一分地磨,世間有漏定也能參與伏惑之功,所以放它進來。
落地上:往後凡讀到某一位次被判為「唯無漏」,先問一句『它做了什麼是有漏道做不到的』;答得出來,這個判就不是標籤而是結論。頌疏在此段獨出一個很有用的細節,標明是「十五心位」——見道的頓斷是落在那十五心之內,這是三疏中此段講得最具體的一句。
二、四諦的名與體:舊名重提,不是新立
〔清單二·上〕為什麼要說「先已說」。 先問:賢聖品才要正式講四諦,為什麼開口就說「諦四先已說」?答:因為四諦之名早在界品分別有漏無漏法的地方就出過了——論自己把出處指得清清楚楚:「無漏謂聖道」說的是道諦,「擇滅謂離繫」說的是滅諦,「及苦集世間」說的是苦集二諦。自體呢?也還是原來那個自體,所以頌裡用了「亦然」兩個字。
易誤處:把這一段讀成重複的贅語。它不是重複,是接榫——阿毘達磨的體例是一個法在哪裡立、在哪裡辨、在哪裡用,各有其位;此處只借舊體而換新用(從法體之辨轉為道之所證)。
落地上:讀本論凡遇「先已說」「如前所辯」,不要跳過去,那是作者在告訴你這個概念的戶籍在哪一品;順著回去看一眼,往往整段就通了。這裡另有一條要記牢:名雖有二而物不異——論說苦與集只是果性取蘊與因性取蘊之分,「由此苦集因果性分,名雖有殊非物有異」;滅道二諦則物確有別。
〔清單二·下〕次第為什麼是苦集滅道。 先問:既然集是苦的因,為什麼不先說因?答:因為四諦的次第不是依因果排的,是「隨現觀位先後而說」——現觀之中先被觀到的就先說。而現觀的次第又來自加行位的觀法;加行位為什麼這樣觀?論給了一條判準:凡是「愛著處」而又「能作逼惱」、並且是求脫之因的法,理應最先觀察。苦正是這樣的法,所以先觀苦,然後順著問苦的因(集)、苦的滅(滅)、滅的道(道)。
易誤處:把這條次第當成邏輯排序,於是覺得「先果後因」不合理。它不是邏輯排序,是行門排序——論隨即用兩個譬喻把這一點釘死:一是見病、尋病因、思病愈、求良藥;二是《良醫經》的醫王四德(善知病狀、病因、病愈、良藥)。醫生看診從症狀入手,不從病理教科書的第一頁入手。
落地上:這一條可以直接搬到自己的用功上——先看清當下逼惱之處(苦),再追它的因(集),再確認它可以止(滅),最後才問方法(道)。次序顛倒了,方法就成了空談。論還順手交代一條體例:法的說次有三種來由——隨生(如四念住)、隨便(如四正勝)、隨現觀(如四諦);別把三者混作一談。
三、三苦攝盡有漏:苦諦的骨架
〔清單三〕為什麼連快樂也算在苦諦裡。 先問:世間明明有可意之事,怎麼能說「諸有漏行皆是苦諦」?論答得極有層次:不是把樂硬說成苦,而是分三種苦性去配——可意的有漏行與壞苦合(樂境會壞),非可意的與苦苦合(苦上加苦),其餘的與行苦合(遷流不住本身即逼惱)。三者各就其所應,一個也不落空。
再問:什麼叫「可意非可意,餘」?論自己扣回三受——樂受、苦受、不苦不樂受依次即是;並各引契經為證:樂受「生時樂住時樂壞時苦」,苦受「生時苦、住時苦」,不苦不樂受則「若非常即是苦」。
易誤處:把三苦讀成三種程度的苦(小苦、中苦、大苦)。不是程度,是三種成苦的路數——壞是由變異而苦,苦苦是由自體而苦,行苦是由眾緣造作、遷流不住而苦。三條路互不相代。
落地上:這一節是全品的骨架。往後凡見到「有漏」二字,就可以拿三苦去試:這一法是壞了才苦,還是本身就苦,還是根本在動所以苦?三問過一遍,『有漏即苦』四個字就不再是口號。論並補一句要害:真正遍攝一切的是行苦——「理實一切行苦故苦,此唯聖者所能觀見」;配壞苦苦苦給可意非可意,只是取其不共的一面而已。
四、睫毛與眼珠:行苦為什麼只有聖者看得見
〔清單四〕一根睫毛的譬喻在說什麼。 先問:既然行苦遍在一切有漏,為什麼凡夫感覺不到?論引一頌作答:一根睫毛放在手掌上,人毫無感覺;放到眼珠上,就成損害而且不安。愚夫像手掌,感覺不到行苦這根睫毛;智者像眼珠,一觸就生極深的厭怖。論隨即把這個對比推到極處——愚夫在無間地獄受劇苦時的怕苦之心,還比不上聖者面對有頂之蘊時的厭怖。
易誤處:讀成『聖者比較敏感』的抒情語。它其實是一條判準語:感受的粗細不由苦的大小決定,由觀察者的所依決定。地獄之苦再猛,落在鈍處也只是苦苦;行苦極微,落在利處卻成大怖。
再問:那麼道諦也是有為,是不是也該算行苦?論答得乾脆:不是——行苦之相是「違逆聖心」,而聖道生起不違逆聖心,反而正引出眾苦之盡。所以「有為」二字在此處只用來顯有漏那一分。
落地上:這一段可以拿來校正一個常見的錯覺——以為修行是要把感受變鈍。恰恰相反,是要把那雙『眼珠』養出來;養出來之後,先前不覺得是問題的,才開始成為問題。
五、綠豆與毒瘡:樂少不足以立諦
〔清單五〕為什麼只立苦為聖諦而不立樂。 先問:若承認諸法之中也有樂,何以只說苦是聖諦?論先錄一類師的解釋:因為樂太少了——像把少許綠豆放進烏豆堆裡,以少從多,就總名烏豆聚;接著補一句反問:誰有智慧的人,會因為拿水澆在毒瘡上有那麼一點快感,就把毒瘡當作樂?另有一類師則以頌作解:因為樂「能為苦因故,能集眾苦故,有苦希彼故」,所以說樂也名為苦。
易誤處:把這兩解當成論主的定說。論隨即自出正解——「理實應言,聖者觀察諸有及樂體皆是苦,以就行苦同一味故,由此立苦為諦非樂」。真正的理由不是「樂少」,是『就行苦一味』。 論甚至回頭否掉了『樂受是苦因故聖者觀為苦』這條:能作苦因那是集的行相,與苦行相無干;何況聖者生在色無色界時,那裡的蘊並不是苦受之因,卻仍有苦想可轉。
落地上:讀阿毘達磨要學會分辨『一時之解』與『究竟之判』。論常先列數家便宜之說,再自出一句「理實應言」;那一句才是承重牆。另附一條分辨法:「非常」與「苦」二行相如何不混?論說得清楚——生滅故觀為非常,違聖心故觀之為苦;只是見到非常,就能知道它違聖心,所以非常行相能引出苦行相。
六、定無實樂之諍(上):一方立宗,一方反徵
〔長行專段·繫正3 後〕誰在說話。 這是本卷最密的一段對辯,讀之前先把說話的人排清楚。依光記逐句所標:開頭「有餘部師作如是執:定無實樂,受唯是苦」一段是敘異計,光記明繫其宗為經部與大眾部——「有餘經部、大眾部等作如是執:定無實樂,一切三受皆唯是苦」;接下來「云何知然?由教、理故」是該部自問自答;引三經是該部的教證,「以諸樂因皆不定故」是該部的理證;再往下「又治苦時方起樂覺,及苦易脫樂覺乃生」,光記標為該部「又開二章顯無實樂:一治苦覺樂、二苦易覺樂」。
先問:這一方的理證強在哪裡?強在它抓住了一個真實的觀察——同一件衣食,非時過量就生苦;所以他們推論:衣食本來就是苦因,只是苦增盛時真相才顯。再加二章:樂覺總是在對治苦時才起(飢了才覺得飯香),總是在苦脫換時才生(換肩才覺得輕鬆)。結論便是「故受唯苦,定無實樂」。
易誤處:把這一段讀成論主自己的主張。不是——光記在下一句立刻換了標籤:「論主標顯說一切有宗於苦受外言樂實有,此言應理」。論主在這裡是站到有部這一邊的,而且是明白標顯,不是中立轉述。
落地上:讀對辯段的第一功夫,是把『誰在說』標出來再讀內容。標錯一句,整段的宗旨就會倒過來。
〔續〕三番反徵與一救一破。 論主的第一步不是舉證,是反問:撥掉了樂,你把什麼叫作苦?光記標此為「略作三番徵責經部,顯有實樂」——逼迫既有適悅則有樂應成,損害既有饒益則有樂應成,非愛既有可愛則有樂應成。三番都同一個結構:你用來定義苦的每一個詞,都預設了它的反面。
對方的救,光記標作「此即牒經部等救」:可愛之體並不真實,因為聖者離染時可愛的又成非可愛了。有部之破,光記標作「說一切有部破」:可愛在聖者離染時之所以成非愛,是由另一個門路去觀——觀它是放逸處、要廣大功力才成、變壞無常,所以說非可愛;並不是它的自相本來就是非愛。論還補一記反手:假如它自體本來非可愛,就不該有人對它起愛;既不起愛,聖者離染時也就用不著再拿別的行相去厭患它了。
易誤處:把『離染時成非愛』讀成『可愛是假的』。這裡分的是自相與異門兩層:自相可愛不改,異門觀之可成非愛。兩層不分,這一整段就讀不動。
七、定無實樂之諍(下):通三經、破理證、結成實有
〔清單六·長行專段續〕佛自己怎麼解釋那句話。 先問:世尊明明說過「諸所有受無非是苦」,有部怎麼過得去?論答:佛自己已經釋通了——經中佛告慶喜,說我是依「諸行皆是無常」與「諸有為皆是變壞」而密作是說。光記標此為「此下說一切有部通經部等所引三經。此即通初經也」。論還加一記極巧的旁證:如果真是就自相說一切受皆苦,慶喜就不必問「依何密意此經復言諸所有受無非是苦」,只該問「依何密意說有三受」;經中既然是那樣問答,可見自相上確有三受。
第二經「汝應以苦觀於樂受」,論分兩性解之:樂受依自相門是可愛(有樂性),依異門是無常變壞(有苦性);佛勸觀樂為苦,是因為觀苦能令解脫、觀樂反成繫縛。第三經「於苦謂樂名顛倒」,論說那是就世間「一向計樂」而說——樂受依異門也有苦性、妙欲樂少苦多,世人卻一味只看見樂,所以成顛倒。
易誤處:把「密意說」當成搪塞。它是有規矩的:論每一次判某經為別意說,都要指出是依哪一義而說(此處依無常與變壞),並且要能說明佛何以那樣說(觀苦能令解脫)。指不出來的,就不能叫密意。
落地上:往後遇到兩段經文表面相牴,先別急著判哪一段勝——先問『這一段是就自相說,還是就異門說』。本論在此給了一個完整的示範。
〔續〕理證怎麼破。 論回頭破對方那條「樂因皆不定」:這說法錯在誤認了因的意義。樂因從來不是單憑外境,要觀待所依的分位差別;若此境在此所依的這種分位上能作樂因,它未曾在這種情況下就不作樂因——所以樂因是決定的。論並舉火為喻:火是煮熟之因還是敗壞之因,也得觀待所煮之物的分位;不能因此說火不決定。再補一刀:第三靜慮中的樂因難道不決定?那個因沒有一時能生苦。
至於『治苦才起樂覺』與『苦易脫才生樂覺』二章,論以同一手法回破:受殊勝香味觸所生之樂時,究竟在治什麼苦?若說治粗苦,那粗苦既滅未生,那時反該生極樂之覺。換肩之樂則是身分位本身能生樂——若真如彼說,這位次的後段樂應越來越增(因為苦漸微),事實卻不然;且若先前無苦,最後為何忽生苦覺?是身變易分位有別之故,好比酒後有甘醋之味起。於是結曰:樂受實有之理成立。
易誤處:以為論主破的是『苦受存在』。他破的只有一條——『樂全無實體』。三苦攝一切有漏,這一條論主一步也沒讓。
八、業愛無明:經說愛為集,是偏說不是全說
〔清單七〕苦體也叫集諦,會不會違經。 先問:論說苦行之體亦名集諦,可是契經明明只說愛為集,這不是違經嗎?論答:經是「就勝故說愛為集,理實所餘亦是集諦」。證據呢?別的經裡就說了其餘——薄伽梵伽他中說:「業愛及無明,為因招後行,令諸有相續,名補特伽羅。」
再問:怎麼會有兩種說法?論分得極細:經說愛為集是偏說起因,伽他說業愛無明皆為因是具說生起及彼因因。業是生因、愛是起因;業感界趣生等品類差別之自體出現,叫作「生」;沒有這些差別而後有相續下去,叫作「起」。論並用一個農事之喻定住:種子對各別種類之芽是能生因(決定長什麼),水對一切無差別之芽是能起因(決定長不長)。
易誤處:把「愛為集」與『業愛無明為因』讀成兩家異說。它們是同一事的兩個口徑——經是密意言,阿毘達磨依法相說;論還舉出「五種種子」即有取識、「置地界中」即四識住為例,說明經常以別名說法相。
落地上:愛為起因這一條,論給了三重可驗之證——有愛者與離愛者同樣命終而唯有愛者後有更起;心相續屢屢奔向有愛之處;取執後身無有堅著如貪愛者,好比蓽豆屑和水塗身、乾了難離。三證都可以在自己心上比對,不必等來世。
九、瓶與水:世俗諦與勝義諦怎麼分
〔清單八〕二諦的判準是一個實驗。 先問:世俗與勝義的界線在哪裡?論給的不是定義,是兩道可操作的手續——第一道,把它破壞(瓶碎成片),看對它的認知還在不在;第二道,用慧把其餘成分析出去(水析出色等),看對它的認知還在不在。破了或析了就沒有的,是世俗諦;破了析了仍有的,是勝義諦。
再問:世俗諦是不是就等於假的?論說得很清楚:不是。就在未破未析之前,以世間之想與名施設為那個東西,「依世俗理說有瓶等是實非虛,名世俗諦」——它在世俗理上是真的,所以才叫「諦」。勝義那一邊同理:色碎至極微、以勝慧析除味等,色的認知恆在,「此真實有故名勝義」,受等亦然。
易誤處:把二諦讀成真假二分。二諦是兩種「諦」,不是一諦一妄;否則「世俗諦」三個字裡的那個諦字就沒有著落。另一個易誤處是把「析餘」當成物理粉碎——它是以慧分析同聚之餘法,與破瓶那一道手續並列而不同。
落地上:這兩道手續可以隨手拿來用。看見一個名目,先問『它破了以後這個認知還在嗎』『把它的組成分開之後這個認知還在嗎』;答案就決定了你該把它掛在哪一諦上。光記在世俗諦處引前面界品的假地水說互證,可見這一判準在全論是一貫的,不是此處臨時所立。
十、住戒與三慧:入道的第一段階梯
〔清單九〕為什麼一開口先說戒。 先問:要趣向見諦,第一步是什麼?論答:「應先安住清淨尸羅,然後勤修聞所成等。」次序是硬的——先住戒,再攝受順見諦之聞,聞已勤求法義,聞得法義已無倒思惟,思已方能依定修習。四步一步套一步。
再問:三慧的差別在哪?論錄毘婆沙師的教判:聞所成慧唯緣名境(未能捨文而觀義)、思所成慧緣名義二境(有時由文引義、有時由義引文)、修所成慧唯緣義境(已能捨文唯觀義)。並附一個極好的譬喻:浮渡深急之水,不曾學的人不肯放開浮具,學而未成的人時放時執,善學已成的人不待所依自力浮渡。
易誤處:把三慧讀成三個等級的知識量。它們分的是與文字的關係——抓著文字、文義互引、捨文觀義。知識再多而始終離不開文句,仍在聞位。這裡還有一個要緊的限定,光記說得明白:這是「據加行位辨三慧別」;若據三慧成滿之位,三者皆唯緣義。不加這個限定去讀,下一段的爭論就會看不懂。
落地上:拿這條回頭檢查自己的用功——現在是在背文,還是在文義之間來回,還是已經能捨文而住義?三慧不是履歷,是當下可自驗的位置。
十一、思慧不成之難:一個難,一個釋通
〔長行·三慧段〕難從哪裡來。 先問:既然思慧通緣名又通緣義,那它豈不是被聞慧與修慧瓜分掉了?這正是論文所錄的難——「有言:若爾,思慧不成。謂此既通緣名緣義,如次應是聞修所成」光記於此明標其屬:「論主述諸師破毘婆沙義」——發難的是諸師,論主只是述他們的破,不是論主自立。
再問:論怎麼釋通?論換了一個定名的角度:三慧不必靠所緣的寬窄來分,靠因來分——依聞至教所生的勝慧叫聞所成,依思正理所生的勝慧叫思所成,依修等持所生的勝慧叫修所成。「所成」二字正是要顯示這三種勝慧是聞、思、等持三因所成,好比世間說牛的性命等是「食草所成」。
易誤處:把這一段讀成論主推翻了毘婆沙師。兩邊分的是不同的軸——毘婆沙就所緣立差別(且限於加行位),此處就能生之因立差別。軸不同,未必相排。要記一筆:光記於此段另立了科文標籤——「『今詳三相至食草所成』者,論主述己解」,與前段「論主述諸師破《毘婆沙》義」並立;所以這一段的釋通,光記明標為論主自申己解,不是仍在述諸師之語。
落地上:遇到分類被質疑『界線重疊』時,本段給了一條通用解法——換一個分類軸看看。所緣重疊的,未必在能生之因上重疊。
十二、身器清淨三因與四聖種
〔清單十·上〕修行之前要先把「器」洗乾淨。 先問:想在修上速成,該先做什麼?論答:身器清淨略由三因——身心遠離、喜足少欲、住四聖種。身遠離是離雜亂共住,心遠離是離不善尋;而這兩樣要成就,得靠喜足少欲。所謂喜足即無不喜足,所謂少欲即無大欲。
再問:不喜足與大欲怎麼分?論先錄對法諸師之說:對已得的美妙衣服等更多求叫不喜足,對未得的多希求叫大欲。論隨即自難:「更求」不也是緣未得嗎?那兩者的差別便不成立。於是另立一說:對已得之物因不妙不多而悵望不歡,叫不喜足;對未得之物求妙求多,叫大欲。體性上,喜足少欲以無貪為體、通三界並通無漏,所治二種以欲貪為性、唯欲界所繫。
易誤處:把少欲與喜足讀成同一件事。分界就在已得與未得:喜足對治的是已得上的不滿,少欲對治的是未得上的多求。
〔清單十·下〕四聖種為什麼叫「種」。 先問:這個名字從哪裡來?論答:「能生眾聖故名聖種。」體亦是無貪;前三種(衣服、飲食、臥具隨得而喜足)唯是喜足,第四種是樂斷樂修。問:樂斷樂修怎麼也用無貪為體?答:因為它能棄捨對「有」的欲貪。
再問:為什麼要立這四樣?論說得極貼近出家的實情——弟子捨了俗家的生具與事業來出家,法主世尊憐愍他們,另安立兩件事:前三是助道的生具,第四是助道的事業;「汝等若能依前生具作後事業,解脫非久」。而所對治的,是契經所說以衣服、飲食、臥具、有無有為因的四種愛生。論並換一門說:為暫息與永除我所欲、我事欲——我所之事即衣服等,我事即自身,緣它們的貪即是欲;前三聖種暫止前三貪,第四聖種永滅四貪。
落地上:四聖種是一張可以照著查的清單——吃穿住上是否還在求妙求多?在斷惑修道上是否樂之如求飲食?光記釋此云「四聖種能生眾聖聖之種故,故名聖種」,並引《婆沙》釋樂斷樂修之別,其一作「樂斷煩惱,樂修聖道」——斷的是煩惱,修的是聖道,兩頭都要樂,才算住在第四聖種上。
十三、入修的兩道門:對症下藥
〔清單十一〕為什麼只給兩道門。 先問:入修之門這麼多,何以只立不淨觀與持息念為「要者」?論的答案是對治式的:不是門好,是病准。貪猛盛屢屢現前的人叫貪行者,他觀不淨能正入修;尋思多而心散亂的人叫尋行者,他依息念能正入修。門的價值全在它治得中不中。
再問:為什麼不淨觀治不了尋?論錄兩解並存:一說持息念所緣不多故能止亂尋,不淨觀顯形差別繁多反引更多尋思;一說持息念內門而轉故能止亂尋,不淨觀多在外門轉,好比眼識,所以治它無能。二說並錄,論不作取捨。
易誤處:把二門讀成入道的兩個『級別』,於是想挑高級的修。它們是橫的分工,不是縱的階梯;挑錯了,藥不對症,用功越勤越亂。
落地上:起修之前先自診——這幾個月現前最多的,是貪的相,還是散亂的相?診清楚了再選門。光記於此標其科為「此下第二別釋。就中,一明不淨觀、二明息念觀」,二門的分立就是從這裡開的。
十四、骨鎖觀:先擴到海邊,再收回眉間
〔清單十二〕為什麼專講骨鎖。 先問:貪有四種(顯色、形色、妙觸、供奉),各有各的所緣(青瘀等、被食等、蟲蛆等、屍不動),為什麼論偏要專辨骨鎖?答:因為「緣骨鎖修不淨觀,通能對治如是四貪,以骨鎖中無四貪境」——骨鎖裡沒有顏色可貪、沒有形狀可貪、沒有觸感可貪、也沒有承事可貪,四貪的立足點一齊被抽掉。一法通治四病,所以選它作代表。
再問:這觀能斷惑嗎?論說得很老實:不能。「此唯勝解作意攝故、少分緣故,不斷煩惱,唯能制伏令不現行。」它是假想觀,功能是壓住而不是拔根。
〔續〕三位是怎麼走的。 三位的走法是一擴一收:初習業位——先繫心於自身一分(足指、額、或隨所樂處),住心已,依勝解力假想皮肉爛墮、漸令骨淨,乃至具觀全身骨鎖;見一具已復觀第二,漸廣至一房一寺一園一村一國,乃至遍地以海為邊,其中骨鎖充滿;然後於所廣之事漸略而觀,直到只觀一具,這時初習業位成。已熟修位——於一具中先除足骨、思惟餘骨繫心而住,漸次乃至除頭半骨、思惟半骨而住。超作意位——除半頭骨,繫心眉間,專注一緣湛然而住。
易誤處:以為越廣越高。真正的次第是先擴後收:擴是為了增長勝解之力,收是為了讓勝解得自在。到最後只剩眉間一點,功夫反而最深。論並補一個四句分別——所緣小未必自在,因為作意有已熟未熟、所緣有自身至海之異,兩軸交錯成四句。
落地上:這是本卷少數可以逐步照著做的段落。要記住兩件事:一是起手要「隨所樂處」(不必人人從足指),二是收得下來才算成,擴不回來只是散。頌疏於此段行文最詳,骨鎖三位逐一舉例,是三疏中教學價值最高的一段。
十五、不淨觀的八問:一張性質表
〔清單十三〕八個問題一次答完。 先問:論為什麼在此忽然連下八問(何性、幾地、緣何境、何處生、何行相、緣何世、有漏無漏、離染得加行得)?因為阿毘達磨立一法必立其諸門分別——不作這張表,這一法就沒有位置。答案依次是:以無貪為性;通依十地(四靜慮、四近分、中間、欲界);唯緣欲界所見色境(所見者即顯色形色);唯人趣生而三洲除北;唯不淨行相;隨在何世緣自世境,若不生法通緣三世;唯是有漏;通離染得與加行得。
易誤處:把「唯是有漏」讀成貶語。它是從前面的限定推出來的結論——「既唯勝解作意相應,此觀理應唯是有漏」;假想成立之觀,不能是無漏。同樣,「唯人趣生,三洲除北」也不是輕視他方,是就修習之緣而說。
落地上:讀諸門分別要學會反著用——看到「唯是有漏」就回頭找是哪一個限定逼出來的(此處是勝解作意),看到「通二得」就回頭找是哪一個事實支持的(此處是有曾得未曾得)。每一格都應該追得到來源,追不到的,就是還沒讀通。
十六、持息念:以慧為體而名為念
〔清單十四〕名字為什麼叫「念」。 先問:論說息念「以慧為性」,那為什麼名字裡是個念字?論自答:「念力持故,於境分明所作事成」,好比四念住也是以慧為體而名念住。光記於此更分二釋:「息為境,名持息念。念能持息,名持息念」——一是就所緣立名,二是就能持立名。
再問:它為什麼只通五地(初靜慮、二三靜慮之近分、中間、欲界)?論給的理由極乾淨:這個念唯與捨受相應。苦樂二受能順引尋,而此念正是治尋的,故不俱起;喜樂二受能違專注,而此念要於境專注才成,故也不俱起。四受都排掉了,剩下的就是捨。(另有一說謂根本下三靜慮中亦有捨受,那就成八地;論並錄之。)
其餘諸門:緣風為境,依欲界身而起;唯人天趣而除北俱盧;通離染得與加行得;唯與真實作意相應——這一條把它與不淨觀分得很清楚,不淨觀是假想,持息念是實觀。論並直說:唯正法有情能修,外道無有,因為沒有說法之人,且自不能覺微細之法。
易誤處:把「唯與捨相應」讀成修息念要修得沒有感覺。捨不是麻木,是不被苦樂喜憂拉走;正因為不被拉走,專注才立得住。
落地上:這一節給了一個很實用的自檢——如果數息時心一直在『舒服/不舒服』上打轉,那多半還沒進到這個念所在的地方。
十七、六相:數隨止觀轉淨
〔清單十五〕為什麼要立六個。 先問:持息念的相圓滿,要具足哪六因?論列:一數、二隨、三止、四觀、五轉、六淨;末後為攝六相而說攝頌「持息念應知,有六種異相,謂數隨止觀、轉淨相差別」。六者不是六種修法,是同一修法圓滿所必經的六個相。
數:繫心緣入出息,不作加行,放捨身心,唯以念憶持息數,從一至十不減不增——理由是「恐心於現極聚散故」。其中容有三失:數減失(於二謂一)、數增失(於一謂二)、雜亂失(於入謂出、於出謂入);離此三失名為正數,中間散亂則從一重數,終而復始乃至得定。隨:不作加行而隨息行,念息入時遍身或一分,隨至喉、心、臍、髖、髀、脛乃至足指;息出則隨至一磔一尋,念恆隨逐。(有餘師說息出遠至風輪或吠嵐婆,論判不應理,因為此念與真實作意俱。)止:繫念唯在鼻端,或眉間乃至足指,隨所樂處安止其心,觀息住身如珠中縷,為冷為煖、為損為益。觀:觀察此息風已,兼觀息俱大種造色及依色住之心心所,具觀五蘊為境。轉:移轉——把緣息風之覺安置到後後勝善根中,乃至世第一法位。淨:昇進入見道等。(另有一說以四念住為初、金剛喻定為後名轉,盡智等方名淨;並錄。)
易誤處:把六相當成六個可以挑著做的法門。它是一條線:數到心不亂才談隨,隨得住才談止,止得穩才談觀,觀成了才有轉,轉到底才是淨。跳級即是空轉。
落地上:三失那一節值得抄下來自查——今天數錯了是減、是增、還是入出顛倒?三者各對應不同的心病(昏、掉、失念),對症才好調。
十八、息相差別:這口氣到底是什麼
〔清單十六〕最後一頌在辨什麼。 先問:前面講的是修法,這一頌為什麼忽然回過頭去分析「息」本身的法性?因為阿毘達磨的規矩是:凡作為所緣的法,也要給它一張性質表。答案有五項:隨身——隨身所生之地,息即彼地所攝,因為息是身的一分;依二——入出息之轉要依身與心二者的差別,所以生無色界、羯剌藍位、入無心定與第四靜慮等,息皆不轉(要身中有孔隙,且入出息地之心正現前,息才轉);情數非執受——是有情數所攝(有情身分故),而非有執受(與根相離故);等流——是等流性(同類因生故),不是所長養(身增長時它反損減),也不是異熟生(斷已還能相續,餘異熟色無此情形);非下緣——唯自地上地之心所緣,不是下地威儀心與通果心之境。
易誤處:把「非執受」讀成『不是我的』。執受在此是專門語,指與根相合而有覺受的那一分;息與根相離,所以非執受——這與所有權無關。
落地上:這一節示範了本論最典型的手法——修法講完,回頭把所緣本身也辨一遍。往後凡讀到某一觀門,不妨也問一問:這個所緣本身是哪一類法?答得出來,觀門才不會落在想像裡。論並順帶交代了一個可驗的細節:出第四靜慮等定時與初生之時息最先入,入定與死時息最後出——一入一出,正好扣住『依身心二者差別而轉』這一條。
承衍:三疏之鏡
以上是本卷論文自身之義。此下另立一節,收四事:三疏之判釋與互異、眾賢之破、真諦舊譯之異、可對讀之座標。鏡非論,只是換一種讀法看同一段文;並錄不判,各還其位。
一、三疏之判釋與互異
一部在本卷完全缺席的疏。 神泰疏是殘本,於本品現存唯卷十七,所釋為玄奘卷二十五(本品第四子),本卷全闕。卷一目次總表雖有「分別賢聖品」一詞,那是目次而非疏文,不得以之充數。據實標闕。
品名解題三家各有取徑。 光記以「賢謂賢和、聖謂聖正」訓名,並交代品序之由:「上三品別明有漏,次下三品別明無漏。欲令厭已生欣,故次明無漏」,又於無漏三品中判「賢聖〉明果、〈智〉明因、〈定〉明緣,果相麁顯,所以先明」——這是把整個下半部論的骨架一次交代清楚。寶疏則別引外典訓「賢」「聖」二字,並以滅道二諦之先後釋本品何以次隨眠品之後。頌疏最簡,只留「賢謂賢和,聖謂聖正,此品廣明,故名分別」一句。附記一條檢索之誡:「分別賢聖品」五字於頌疏全書零見,以之為檢索串必得假零命中。
品級大科三家同判三分而字面小異。 光記作「一總明道體性、二明道所證諦、三約聖道辨人」,寶疏作「一明道體性、二明道所觀、三就道辨人」,頌疏作「一總明道體性、二明道所證諦、三約道辨人」。寶疏且於品首作「就道辨人」而於科處作「就位辨人」——同一家自身二用,照錄不判。三家所判一致而字面各有小異,正可見科判是各家獨立所立,不是互相抄的。
見修二道:頌疏獨出「十五心位」。 光記與寶疏於此段未見逐字提及十五心,頌疏則明標「十五心位見道,速能治三界故」,把見道之頓斷落實到具體心數。三疏中此段教學鷹架最具體者為頌疏。並錄不判。
樂受之諍:光記獨密而二疏從簡。 本卷最密的一段對辯,光記逐句標宗達十處(敘異計、異部答、異部引三經答、異部以理答、又開二章、論主標顯有宗、三番徵責、牒經部救、有部破、有部通初經),寶疏與頌疏皆無此密度。本子白話層與義疏層的說者繫屬,即以光記這十處標宗為準繩。
三慧段:三家詳略之差最顯著。 光記明標「論主述諸師破毘婆沙義」,並先以「據加行位辨三慧別」限定毘婆沙師之教判所在之位;寶疏此段未見獨立的宗屬標籤,繫屬顯隱較光記為淡;頌疏則逕以「問:「三慧何別?」答」的問答格式呈現,而全然省略了「有言若爾」這一段對辯。同一段文,一家標得最細、一家從淡、一家整段不收——三家性格於此一目了然。並錄不判。
四聖種:寶疏獨補一喻。 光記釋名作「四聖種能生眾聖聖之種故,故名聖種」,並引《婆沙》一百八十一以三重釋樂斷樂修之別(其一作「樂斷煩惱,樂修聖道」,餘二為無間道與解脫道對、見道與修道對)。寶疏同引《婆沙》,而另補一喻——「眾聖種,故名為聖種。聖眾皆從此四生故,展轉承嗣次第不絕」,以聖種相承猶如族姓之相承為譬,光記未見此喻。頌疏於此段則以三因之科判提綱最為扼要。三家各有所長,不判優劣。
不淨觀與持息念:頌疏最詳而光記最工於釋名。 光記標科作「此下第二別釋。就中,一明不淨觀、二明息念觀」,並逐句列四貪四觀之對治關係;於持息念則出二釋「息為境,名持息念。念能持息,名持息念」。寶疏行文較簡。頌疏於骨鎖三位逐一舉例,行文最詳,教學價值最高。⇒ 三家於本卷範圍之義理內容並無互異,悉宗世親本論,所異者唯教學鷹架之詳略。
二、眾賢之破
眾賢二論於本品之品名不作「分別賢聖品」而作「辯賢聖品」;且《顯宗論》之品號較底本與《順正理論》全數後移一位,其賢聖品實題「辯賢聖品第七」。以本論之品名去搜二論,必得假零命中。
樂受之諍:眾賢自敘二造而不作牒引。 眾賢於本品自行重述兩方——先出餘部之執「此中餘部有作是言:定無實樂,受唯是苦」,續列理證;隨即立己宗「對法諸師咸作是說定有實樂。云何知然?苦樂生因功能別故」,改以『生因功能各異』為證。與世親長行的教理二重結構場景全合,惟他不採牒引式,而是自己把兩造重講一遍。一義二宗並錄,不判勝負。
三慧段:本卷評語最直的一處。 世親錄諸師之難而自以「今詳三相無過別」釋通;眾賢逐字牒引之後下了一句斷語——「彼由未達毘婆沙意故作是言」,隨即正面申述毘婆沙師的真義。這一組是二重反覆:世親破毘婆沙的表面義,眾賢反謂世親的釋通本身仍未達毘婆沙的真義。二宗並錄,不判勝負。
不喜足與大欲之訓詞。 世親自難對法諸師之訓詞而另立己說,眾賢引其新說——「經主言:應作是說,於所已得不妙不多悵望不歡,名不喜足」——而判為不應正理,反過來替對法師的原訓詞辯護。二宗並錄,不判勝負。
我所我事欲之釋。 眾賢引世親之釋——「經主於此自作釋言:我所事者,謂衣服等」——謂其義不異前段,頌中不該別為文句;於是另立異門釋,「由此我部毘婆沙師,更約異門釋此文句」,以「我所我執」顯頌文「暫息永除」四字的獨立意趣。二宗並錄,不判勝負。
三、真諦舊譯之異
品名全異。 玄奘作「分別賢聖品」,真諦作「分別聖道果人品第六之一」——真諦不取「賢聖」二字,逕以「聖道」與「果人」兩軸標舉。以玄奘之詞去搜真諦本,必得假零命中;逐段對位一律取場景結構。
頌句次第互換一例。 玄奘作「見道唯無漏,修道通二種」,真諦作「修道有二種,見道唯無流」——二句先後互換而義理全合。「無漏/無流」則是貫穿全篇的系統性譯字之差。
二諦一節之譯名差最具體。 玄奘作「彼覺破便無,慧析餘亦爾,如瓶水世俗,異此名勝義」,真諦作「若破無彼智,由智除餘爾,俗諦如瓶水,異此名真諦」——玄奘用「世俗諦」「勝義諦」全稱,真諦逕作「俗諦」「真諦」二字略稱(此處之「真諦」純為術語,非指譯者本人)。頌句次第與瓶水之喻二本全合。
入修二門之敘述次第倒置。 玄奘先出不淨觀後出息念,真諦則先立「阿那波那念入修次第」為段題,再回頭敘貪行者之不淨觀;義理(貪行者修不淨觀、尋行者修息念)全合,只是行文先後不同。譯名上,玄奘兼用音譯「阿那阿波那念」與義譯簡稱「持息念」二式,真諦所查得之段落唯見音譯一式。三慧之名亦然——玄奘用「聞所成慧」等全稱,真諦用「聞慧」等簡稱。二譯優劣不判。
誠實記:真諦本於良醫經之喻、三苦合說、樂受之諍、持息念六事與息相差別數段,逐字細校尚未完成,據實記為待補,不以玄奘之詞代填。
四、可對讀之座標
本卷的入修二門,於唯識根系的《瑜伽師地論》有可對讀之處,三組皆逐字有錨:其一,本卷以貪行者與尋行者二類配二門,《瑜伽師地論》於同一『以何煩惱增上而立行者』的判準下開為七類(貪行、瞋行、癡行、慢行、尋思行、等分行、薄塵行)——判準同而詳略異。其二,本卷以四貪立四種不淨所緣而以骨鎖通治,《瑜伽師地論》則先問不淨所緣為何而略說六種不淨,其依外朽穢不淨之列與本卷所緣多有重疊,而編次之綱不同:本卷以所治之貪為綱,彼以不淨之類為綱。其三,本卷之持息念,彼則以緣入出息之念為阿那波那念之所緣,並別立中間入息與中間出息之細目,本卷無之。⇒ 唯錄座標,不判高下;掛鏈之取捨屬義理之判。
Before Reading This Fascicle
The previous chapter said all it had to say about the abandoning of the afflictions, and so this fascicle turns on its heel in its very first sentence: “yet abandoning must be obtained by the force of the path; what is the mark of this path by which it comes about?” — abandoning does not happen of itself; it depends upon the path. The whole Chapter on the Worthy and the Noble opens from that one question.
Here the three ancient masters let the knife of the outline fall in the same place, and adjudge it threefold word for word: Puguang’s Record marks “within this chapter the main text is threefold: first, explaining the nature of the entity of the path in general; second, explaining the truths that the path realizes; third, distinguishing persons with respect to the noble path”; Fabao’s Commentary marks “the main text of this chapter is threefold: first, explaining the nature of the entity of the path; second, explaining what the path observes; third, distinguishing persons with respect to the path”; Yuanhui’s Verse Commentary marks “within this chapter the main text is threefold: first, explaining the nature of the entity of the path in general; second, explaining the truths that the path realizes; third, distinguishing persons with respect to the path.” Three houses divided their fascicles independently, and the three sections they adjudge are entirely the same — which shows that these three cuts were not forced upon the text by later hands. This fascicle walks exactly through the first two sections and steps into the opening section of the third (explaining the preparatory practices of the noble path).
There is one line to take hold of before reading this fascicle: it is a checklist of what must be prepared before entering the path. First it asks what the path is (its entity), then what the path sees (the four truths, the two truths), then how one comes to walk it (abiding in discipline, the three discernments, the purified bodily vessel, the two gates for entering cultivation). Inserted in the middle is the densest dispute in the whole fascicle — whether pleasant feeling really exists — and that is not a digression; it is the contest over the foundations of whether the truth of suffering can stand at all. If the foundation is loose, the first of the four truths collapses.
One more thing should be said in advance. This fascicle has two places where the author stands over on the side of the Sarvāstivādins (the real existence of pleasure, and the glosses of discontent and great desire), and one place where he speaks out on behalf of other masters against the Vaibhāṣikas (the three discernments). One and the same author, guarding the Sarvāstivādins in this passage and objecting to the Vaibhāṣikas in that — in reading, do not hurry to enlist him on a side; see first, in each passage, which principle it is that he is guarding.
I. The Path Divides in Two: The Path of Seeing Is without Outflows Alone, the Path of Cultivation Extends to Both
〔Checklist One〕Why the path of seeing can have no portion with outflows. First the question: since abandoning depends upon the path, might the path be a mundane path with outflows? The treatise answers in two halves: the path of seeing is without outflows alone, the path of cultivation extends to both. The reason is not a stipulation of form but a limit of capacity — “because the path of seeing can quickly counteract the three realms,” and “because it cuts off the nine grades of what is abandoned by seeing all at once, and no mundane path has such capacity.” A mundane path can only suppress level by level and grade by grade; it cannot counteract the three realms all at once, nor cut off nine grades in a single moment; and being unable, it does not qualify.
The easy error: to take “without outflows” for a badge of status, and so to read the path of seeing’s freedom from outflows as “it is without outflows because it is of high rank.” The order runs exactly the other way — it is because it has this capacity for cutting off all at once that it is adjudged to be necessarily without outflows. Of the path of cultivation, “the path of cultivation, being different, extends to both,” because cultivation must grind away portion by portion, and a mundane absorption with outflows can also take part in the work of suppressing the afflictions, and so it is let in.
In practice: hereafter, whenever some stage is adjudged “without outflows alone,” first ask, “what has it done that a path with outflows cannot do?” If that can be answered, the adjudication is not a label but a conclusion. Yuanhui here brings out one very serviceable detail of his own, marking it as “the stage of fifteen minds” — the cutting off all at once of the path of seeing falls within those fifteen minds, and this is the most concrete sentence any of the three commentaries offers on this passage.
II. The Name and Entity of the Four Truths: Old Names Taken Up Again, Not Newly Established
〔Checklist Two · First Part〕Why it says “already spoken of before.” First the question: the Chapter on the Worthy and the Noble is only now to treat the four truths properly, so why does it open by saying “the four truths were already spoken of before”? Answer: because the names of the four truths appeared long ago, in the Chapter on the Elements where dharmas with and without outflows were analyzed — and the treatise points out the place quite plainly: “what is without outflows is the noble path” states the truth of the path, “cessation through discernment is release from bondage” states the truth of cessation, and “and suffering and origin and the world” states the two truths of suffering and origin. And the entity? It too is the same entity as before, which is why the stanza uses the two words “likewise so.”
The easy error: to read this passage as redundant repetition. It is not repetition but a joint — the form of Abhidharma is that a dharma has its own place where it is established, where it is analyzed, and where it is put to use; here the old entity is only borrowed for a new use (from the analysis of the entity of dharmas to what the path realizes).
In practice: in reading this treatise, whenever you meet “already spoken of before” or “as analyzed above,” do not skip over it; the author is telling you in which chapter that concept is registered. Go back and take one look, and the whole passage often comes clear. There is another thing here to fix in mind: the names are two but the thing is not different — the treatise says that suffering and origin are only the division of appropriated aggregates on the side of result and on the side of cause, “by this division of suffering and origin into the natures of cause and result, the names differ but the thing is not different”; whereas for the truths of cessation and of the path the things are indeed distinct.
〔Checklist Two · Second Part〕Why the order is suffering, origin, cessation, path. First the question: since origin is the cause of suffering, why is the cause not spoken of first? Answer: because the order of the four truths is not set by cause and effect but is “spoken of according to the priority and posteriority of the stages of direct realization” — what is observed first in direct realization is spoken of first. And the order of direct realization comes in turn from the manner of contemplation in the preparatory stage; and why does the preparatory stage contemplate in this way? The treatise gives a measure: any dharma that is a “place of clinging attachment,” that can moreover “work oppression,” and that is besides the reason one seeks release, ought in principle to be observed first. Suffering is just such a dharma, and so suffering is observed first, and then one asks in order after the cause of suffering (origin), the cessation of suffering (cessation), and the path to that cessation (the path).
The easy error: to take this order for a logical ordering, and so to find “result before cause” unreasonable. It is not a logical ordering but a practice ordering — and the treatise at once nails the point down with two similes: one, seeing the sickness, seeking its cause, considering its cure, seeking the good medicine; two, the four qualities of the king of physicians in the Sūtra of the Good Physician (knowing well the state of the sickness, its cause, its cure, and the good medicine). A physician takes up a case from the symptoms, not from the first page of a textbook of pathology.
In practice: this can be carried straight over into one’s own work — first see clearly where the present oppression lies (suffering), then track down its cause (origin), then make sure that it can be stopped (cessation), and only last ask after the method (the path). Invert the order, and the method becomes empty talk. The treatise also settles in passing a point of form: the order in which dharmas are stated has three sources — following their arising (as with the four foundations of mindfulness), following mere convenience of phrasing (as with the four right exertions), and following direct realization (as with the four truths); do not run the three together.
III. The Three Kinds of Suffering Take in Everything with Outflows: The Skeleton of the Truth of Suffering
〔Checklist Three〕Why even happiness is counted within the truth of suffering. First the question: the world plainly has agreeable things in it, so how can it be said that “all the formations with outflows are the truth of suffering”? The treatise answers with the utmost articulation: it does not force pleasure to be called suffering, but apportions three kinds of suffering-nature — the agreeable formations with outflows conjoin with the suffering of change (a pleasant object will perish), the disagreeable with the suffering of suffering (suffering laid upon suffering), and the rest with the suffering of the formations (flowing on without staying is itself oppression). Each in its own way, and not one of them is left out.
Ask further: what are “agreeable, disagreeable, and the rest”? The treatise itself fastens them back to the three feelings — pleasant feeling, painful feeling, and feeling that is neither painful nor pleasant, in that order; and it adduces a sūtra for each: pleasant feeling is “pleasant when it arises, pleasant while it abides, painful when it perishes,” painful feeling is “painful when it arises, painful while it abides,” and of feeling that is neither, “whatever is impermanent is suffering.”
The easy error: to read the three kinds of suffering as three degrees of suffering (small, middling, great). They are not degrees but three routes by which a thing comes to be suffering — the suffering of change is suffering by way of alteration, the suffering of suffering is suffering by way of its own entity, the suffering of the formations is suffering by way of being made by many conditions and flowing on without staying. The three routes cannot be substituted for one another.
In practice: this section is the skeleton of the whole chapter. Hereafter, whenever you meet the two words “with outflows,” you can try the three kinds of suffering upon it: is this dharma suffering only when it perishes, or suffering in itself, or suffering fundamentally because it is in motion? Run the three questions through, and “what has outflows is suffering” ceases to be a slogan. The treatise adds one sentence that carries the weight: what truly pervades everything is the suffering of the formations — “in truth all formations are suffering because of suffering, and this only the noble ones are able to observe and see”; the apportioning of the sufferings of change and of suffering to the agreeable and the disagreeable only takes the side of each that is not shared with the others.
IV. The Eyelash and the Eyeball: Why Only the Noble Ones See the Suffering of the Formations
〔Checklist Four〕What the simile of a single eyelash is saying. First the question: if the suffering of the formations pervades everything with outflows, why does the ordinary man feel nothing of it? The treatise adduces a stanza in answer: set an eyelash on the palm of the hand and a man feels nothing at all; set it on the eyeball and it becomes harm and unease. The fool is like the palm and cannot feel the eyelash that is the suffering of the formations; the wise man is like the eyeball, and at one touch there arises the deepest revulsion and dread. The treatise then pushes the contrast to its limit — the fear of suffering that arises in a fool while he undergoes the aggregates of fierce suffering in the Avīci hell does not come up to the revulsion of the noble ones before the aggregates of the summit of existence.
The easy error: to read it as a lyrical remark that “the noble ones are more sensitive.” It is in fact a sentence of measure: the coarseness or fineness of what is felt is not settled by the magnitude of the suffering but by the support of the observer. Let the suffering of the hells be ever so fierce; falling upon a dull place it is only the suffering of suffering. The suffering of the formations is exceedingly slight; falling upon a keen place it becomes a great dread.
Ask further: then the truth of the path too is conditioned — should it not also be taken in by the suffering of the formations? The treatise answers flatly: no — the mark of the suffering of the formations is “to go against the mind of the noble ones,” and the arising of the noble path does not go against the mind of the noble ones; on the contrary it is just what draws forth the exhaustion of all sufferings. And so the two words “conditioned” are here used only to bring out that portion which has outflows.
In practice: this passage can be used to correct a common misconception — that cultivation means blunting one’s feeling. Precisely the opposite: it means growing that pair of eyeballs; and once they are grown, what one did not before feel to be a problem begins to be one.
V. Mung Beans and the Poisoned Sore: The Little There Is of Pleasure Will Not Establish a Truth
〔Checklist Five〕Why suffering alone is established as a noble truth and pleasure is not. First the question: if it be granted that among dharmas there is pleasure as well, why is suffering alone said to be a noble truth? The treatise first records the explanation of one class of masters: because pleasure is too little — as when a few mung beans are put into a heap of black beans, the little goes with the much and the whole is called a heap of black beans; and it adds a counter-question: what man of discernment, for the sliver of relief there is in pouring water upon a poisoned sore, would take the poisoned sore for a pleasure? Another class of masters explains by a stanza: because it “can be a cause of suffering, can gather sufferings together,” and because “one who has suffering still longs for it,” pleasure too is called suffering.
The easy error: to take these two explanations for the author’s settled account. The treatise at once brings out its own correct account — “in truth it should be said that the noble ones observe that all existences and all pleasure are in entity suffering, since with respect to the suffering of the formations they are of one taste; and by this suffering is established as a truth and pleasure is not.” The real reason is not that “pleasure is little,” but that “with respect to the suffering of the formations they are of one taste.” The treatise even turns back and strikes out the account that “the noble ones observe pleasant feeling as suffering because it is a cause of suffering”: being able to serve as a cause of suffering is the mode of apprehension of origin, and has nothing to do with the mode of apprehension of suffering; besides which, when the noble ones are born in the form and formless realms and take the dharmas there as their object, those aggregates are not causes of painful feeling, and yet the idea of suffering can still be turned upon them.
In practice: in reading Abhidharma one must learn to tell an “interim explanation” from a “final adjudication.” The treatise commonly lists several houses’ convenient accounts first, and then brings out a sentence of its own beginning “in truth it should be said”; that sentence is the load-bearing wall. One further distinction is appended here: how are the two modes of apprehension, “impermanent” and “suffering,” kept from being confused? The treatise says it clearly — because they arise and perish they are observed as impermanent; because they go against the mind of the noble ones they are observed as suffering; and merely by seeing impermanence one can know that a thing goes against the mind of the noble ones, which is why the mode of impermanence can draw forth the mode of suffering.
VI. The Dispute over the Nonexistence of Real Pleasure (Part One): One Side Establishes Its Position, the Other Presses Back
〔Long Prose Passage · Following Root 3〕Who is speaking. This is the densest passage of debate in the fascicle, and before reading it one should set the speakers in order. Following Puguang’s markings sentence by sentence: the opening passage, “some masters of another school maintain thus: there is definitely no real pleasure; feeling is suffering alone,” is a setting out of a divergent account, and Puguang expressly assigns the position to the Sautrāntikas and the Mahāsāṃghikas — “some Sautrāntikas, Mahāsāṃghikas, and the rest maintain thus: there is definitely no real pleasure; all three feelings are suffering alone”; next, “how is this known? By teaching and by principle” is that school putting its own question and answering it; the three sūtras adduced are that school’s proof from teaching, and “because all the causes of pleasure are indeterminate” is that school’s proof from principle; and further down, “again, the sense of pleasure arises only when suffering is being counteracted, and the sense of pleasure is born only when suffering is exchanged off,” which Puguang marks as that school “opening two further sections to show that there is no real pleasure: first, the sense of pleasure in counteracting suffering; second, the sense of pleasure in the exchange of suffering.”
First the question: where does the strength of this side’s proof from principle lie? It lies in its having seized upon a real observation — one and the same clothing and food, taken at the wrong time or beyond measure, produces suffering; from which they infer that clothing and food are causes of suffering all along, and that the truth shows itself only when the suffering grows strong. Then the two further sections: the sense of pleasure always arises only when suffering is counteracted (only when hungry does the rice smell good), and is always born only when suffering is exchanged off (only on shifting the load does one feel light). Whence the conclusion, “therefore feeling is suffering alone, and there is definitely no real pleasure.”
The easy error: to read this passage as the author’s own contention. It is not — Puguang changes the label at once in the very next sentence: “the author brings out and displays that the Sarvāstivāda school says that beyond painful feeling pleasure really exists, and this saying is reasonable.” The author here stands on the side of the Sarvāstivādins, and does so by open declaration, not as a neutral report.
In practice: the first labor in reading a passage of debate is to mark out “who is speaking” and only then read the content. Mislabel one sentence, and the whole passage’s purport is turned upside down.
〔Continued〕Three rounds of pressing back, one defense and one refutation. The author’s first step is not to adduce proof but to ask back: having struck out pleasure, what will you call suffering? Puguang marks this as “briefly making three rounds of pressing the Sautrāntikas, to display that pleasure really exists” — if oppression is suffering, then since there is also gratification, pleasure should be established; if harm is suffering, then since there is also benefit, pleasure should be established; if the unloved is suffering, then since there is also the lovable, pleasure should be established. All three rounds have one and the same structure: every word you use to define suffering presupposes its opposite.
The other side’s defense Puguang marks as “this is the citing of the Sautrāntikas’ and others’ defense”: the entity of the lovable is not real, since when the noble ones are separated from defilement what was lovable becomes unlovable. The Sarvāstivādins’ refutation Puguang marks as “the Sarvāstivādins refute”: that the lovable becomes unlovable when the noble ones are separated from defilement is because it is observed through another gate — it is observed as a place of heedlessness, as accomplished only by vast effort, as alterable and impermanent, and therefore called unlovable; it is not that its intrinsic mark was unlovable all along. The treatise adds one further backhanded stroke: if its own entity had been unlovable from the first, no one ought ever to have loved it; and if no love ever arose, then the noble ones on being separated from defilement would have no need to take up other modes of apprehension and grow weary of it.
The easy error: to read “it becomes unlovable on separation from defilement” as “the lovable is false.” What is divided here is the two layers of intrinsic mark and other gate: the lovableness of the intrinsic mark does not change; observed through another gate it may become unlovable. Fail to divide the two layers, and this whole passage will not move.
VII. The Dispute over the Nonexistence of Real Pleasure (Part Two): Explaining Through the Three Sūtras, Refuting the Proof from Principle, Establishing That Pleasure Really Exists
〔Checklist Six · The Long Prose Passage Continued〕How the Buddha himself explained that sentence. First the question: the World-Honored One plainly did say “of all the feelings there are, not one is not suffering” — how do the Sarvāstivādins get past it? The treatise answers: the Buddha himself has already explained it through — in the sūtra the Buddha told Ānanda that he spoke thus with an implicit sense, in dependence upon “all formations are impermanent” and “all that is conditioned is alterable.” Puguang marks this as “from here the Sarvāstivādins explain through the three sūtras adduced by the Sautrāntikas and the rest; this explains through the first sūtra.” The treatise adds a most ingenious side-proof: if it were really with respect to their intrinsic marks that all feelings were said to be suffering, Ānanda would have had no need to ask “with what implicit sense does this sūtra say that of all the feelings there are, not one is not suffering,” but ought only to have asked “with what implicit sense are three feelings spoken of”; and since the sūtra puts the question and answer the way it does, one may see that with respect to their intrinsic marks there really are three feelings.
The second sūtra, “you should observe pleasant feeling with suffering,” the treatise explains by two natures: pleasant feeling by the gate of its intrinsic mark is lovable (it has the nature of pleasure), and by another gate is impermanent and alterable (it has the nature of suffering); the Buddha exhorts observing pleasure as suffering because observing suffering can bring release, while observing pleasure becomes bondage instead. The third sūtra, “to take suffering for pleasure is called inversion,” the treatise says is spoken with respect to the world’s “reckoning it as pleasure without qualification” — pleasant feelings by another gate have the nature of suffering too, and objects of fine desire are little in pleasure and much in suffering, yet the world sees nothing but the pleasure in them, and so there is inversion.
The easy error: to take “spoken with an implicit sense” for an evasion. It has its rule: every time the treatise adjudges a sūtra to be spoken with a different sense, it must point out in dependence upon which sense it was so spoken (here, upon impermanence and alterability), and must be able to say why the Buddha spoke so (observing suffering can bring release). Where that cannot be pointed out, it may not be called an implicit sense.
In practice: hereafter, when two passages of scripture appear on their face to conflict, do not hurry to adjudge which prevails — first ask, “is this passage spoken with respect to the intrinsic mark, or with respect to another gate?” The treatise gives a complete demonstration of it here.
〔Continued〕How the proof from principle is refuted. The treatise turns back to refute the other side’s “all the causes of pleasure are indeterminate”: this account errs by mistaking the sense of “cause.” A cause of pleasure is never the outer object alone; it must be observed together with the differences of stage in the support. If this object at this stage of this support can act as a cause of pleasure, then it has never in such a case failed to act as a cause of pleasure — and so a cause of pleasure is determinate. The treatise adduces fire as a simile: whether fire is a cause of cooking or a cause of spoiling must likewise be observed together with the stage of what is cooked; one may not therefore say that fire is indeterminate. And it adds one more stroke: is the cause of pleasure within the third meditative absorption indeterminate? That cause has not at any time produced suffering.
As for the two sections, “the sense of pleasure arises only when suffering is counteracted” and “the sense of pleasure is born only when suffering is exchanged off,” the treatise refutes both by the same move: when one undergoes the pleasure born of excellent scents, tastes, and touches, what suffering exactly is being counteracted? And if it be said that a coarse suffering is being counteracted, then, that coarse suffering having ceased and not arisen again, there ought at that time to be a sense of the utmost pleasure instead. The pleasure of shifting a load is the very stage of the body being able to produce pleasure — for were it as they say, the later part of that stage should grow ever more pleasant (since the suffering grows ever slighter), and the fact is otherwise; and if there had been no suffering before, why at the last should a sense of suffering suddenly arise? It is because the body alters and the stages differ, as after wine there arises a taste sweet or sour. Whereupon it concludes: the principle that pleasant feeling really exists is established.
The easy error: to think that what the author refutes is “the existence of painful feeling.” He refutes one thing only — that pleasure has no real entity at all. That the three kinds of suffering take in everything with outflows is a point on which the author has not yielded a single step.
VIII. Action, Craving, and Ignorance: The Sūtra’s Saying That Craving Is Origin Is a Partial Statement, Not the Whole
〔Checklist Seven〕Whether calling the entity of suffering the truth of origin transgresses the sūtras. First the question: the treatise says that the entity of the formations of suffering is also called the truth of origin, yet the sūtra plainly says only that craving is origin — is this not a transgression of the sūtra? The treatise answers: the sūtra “speaks of craving as origin with respect to what is excellent; in truth the remaining dharmas are the truth of origin as well.” And the evidence? Other sūtras state the remainder — the Bhagavat says in a gāthā: “action, craving, and ignorance, being causes, summon the formations to come; they make the existences continue on, and this is called a pudgala.”
Ask further: how can there be two ways of speaking? The treatise divides it very finely: the sūtra’s saying that craving is origin is a partial statement of the cause of setting going, while the gāthā’s saying that action, craving, and ignorance are all causes is a complete statement of production and setting going, together with the causes of both. Action is the cause of production and craving is the cause of setting going; the appearing of an entity with the differences of class such as realm, destiny, and mode of birth is called “production,” and the continuing on of a further existence without such differences is called “setting going.” The treatise fixes it with a simile from farming: a seed is the productive cause of a sprout of one or another particular kind (it settles what will grow), and water is the setting-going cause of every sprout without distinction (it settles whether it will grow at all).
The easy error: to read “craving is origin” and “action, craving, and ignorance are causes” as two houses in disagreement. They are two registers of one and the same matter — the sūtra speaks with an implicit sense, and Abhidharma speaks according to the marks of dharmas; and the treatise adduces further the “five kinds of seed” as another name for “consciousness together with appropriation,” and “placed within the element of earth” as another name for the four stations of consciousness, showing that the sūtras commonly state the marks of dharmas under other names.
In practice: for the point that craving is the cause of setting going the treatise gives three verifiable proofs — one who has craving and one who has left craving both die, and only for the one with craving does a further existence arise again; the continuum of mind runs repeatedly toward wherever there is craving; and in appropriating a later body nothing clings and sticks as craving does, like bean-powder rubbed on the body with water at the bath, which when dry is hard to get off. All three proofs can be checked against one’s own mind, without waiting for a life to come.
IX. The Pot and the Water: How the Conventional Truth and the Ultimate Truth Are Divided
〔Checklist Eight〕The measure of the two truths is an experiment. First the question: where does the boundary between the conventional and the ultimate lie? What the treatise gives is not a definition but two workable procedures — first, break the thing (the pot shattered into shards) and see whether the cognition of it is still there; second, analyze out the remaining components with discernment (water analyzed into visible form and the rest) and see whether the cognition of it is still there. What is gone once broken or analyzed is the conventional truth; what remains when broken and analyzed is the ultimate truth.
Ask further: does the conventional truth then amount to the false? The treatise says quite plainly that it does not. Just while it is unbroken and unanalyzed, it is set up as that thing by the world’s idea and name, and “to say in dependence upon conventional principle that there is a pot and the like is real and not false, and this is called the conventional truth” — it is true in conventional principle, and that is why it is called a truth at all. The ultimate side runs the same way: form broken down to the ultimate atom, or taste and the rest analyzed away with superior discernment, and the cognition of form remains, “this really exists and so is called ultimate,” and feeling and the rest are likewise.
The easy error: to read the two truths as a division into true and false. The two truths are two kinds of truth, not one truth and one falsehood; otherwise the word “truth” in “conventional truth” would have nothing to rest upon. Another easy error is to take “analyzing out the remainder” for physical pulverizing — it is the analyzing out with discernment of the other dharmas of the same mass, set alongside the procedure of breaking the pot and not the same as it.
In practice: these two procedures may be picked up and used at any time. When you meet with a name, first ask, “once it is broken, is this cognition still there?” and “once its components are separated, is this cognition still there?” The answers settle which of the two truths you should hang it on. Puguang, at the gloss of the conventional truth, adduces the account of conventional earth and water from the earlier Chapter on the Elements as mutual evidence, which shows that this measure runs uniformly through the whole treatise and was not improvised here.
X. Abiding in Discipline and the Three Discernments: The First Flight of Steps into the Path
〔Checklist Nine〕Why it speaks of discipline before anything else. First the question: to move toward seeing the truths, what is the first step? The treatise answers: “one should first abide in pure śīla, and thereafter apply oneself to the discernment formed through hearing and the rest.” The order is firm — first abide in discipline, then take up the hearing that conduces to seeing the truths, then having heard, seek diligently for the sense of the dharma, then having got the sense of the dharma, reflect upon it without inversion, and only then, having reflected, be able to cultivate in dependence upon concentration. Four steps, each locking into the next.
Ask further: where lies the difference among the three discernments? The treatise records the Vaibhāṣika masters’ adjudication: the discernment formed through hearing takes names alone for its object (not yet able to relinquish the letter and observe the sense), the discernment formed through reflection takes both name and sense for its object (sometimes drawing the sense out of the letter, sometimes drawing the letter out of the sense), and the discernment formed through cultivation takes the sense alone for its object (being now able to relinquish the letter and observe the sense alone). And there is an excellent simile attached: in swimming across deep and rapid water, one who has never learned will not let go of his float, one who has learned but is not accomplished now lets go and now grasps, and one who has learned well swims across by his own strength without any support.
The easy error: to read the three discernments as three grades in quantity of knowledge. What they divide is one’s relation to the letter — gripping the letter, running back and forth between letter and sense, relinquishing the letter and observing the sense. However much one knows, so long as one cannot leave the words behind, one is still at the stage of hearing. There is a crucial qualification here too, which Puguang states plainly: this is “distinguishing the three discernments with respect to the preparatory stage”; with respect to the stage at which the three discernments are fully accomplished, all three take the sense alone for their object. Read without that qualification, and the dispute in the next section will be unintelligible.
In practice: take this back and check your own work with it — are you now memorizing the words, or going back and forth between letter and sense, or already able to relinquish the letter and abide in the sense? The three discernments are not a curriculum vitae; they are a position verifiable in oneself at this moment.
XI. The Objection That the Discernment Formed through Reflection Cannot Be Established: One Objection and One Explaining Through
〔The Long Prose Passage · The Section on the Three Discernments〕Where the objection comes from. First the question: since the discernment formed through reflection extends both to taking names and to taking the sense as object, is it not carved up between the discernment formed through hearing and the discernment formed through cultivation? This is exactly the objection recorded in the treatise — “someone says: if that is so, the discernment formed through reflection cannot be established; for since it extends both to taking names and to taking the sense as object, it should in that same order be what is formed through hearing and what is formed through cultivation.” Puguang here expressly assigns it: “the author sets out other masters’ refutation of the Vaibhāṣika sense” — the objectors are other masters, and the author is only setting out their refutation, not establishing it himself.
Ask further: how does the treatise explain it through? The treatise shifts to another angle of naming: the three discernments need not be divided by the breadth or narrowness of their objects, but by their causes — the superior discernment born in dependence upon hearing the authoritative teaching is called formed through hearing, the superior discernment born in dependence upon reflecting upon correct principle is called formed through reflection, and the superior discernment born in dependence upon cultivating concentration is called formed through cultivation. The two words “formed through” are just what shows that these three superior discernments are accomplished by the three causes of hearing, reflection, and concentration — as the world says of the life of an ox and the rest that it is “formed through eating grass.”
The easy error: to read this passage as the author overturning the Vaibhāṣika masters. The two sides are dividing along different axes — the Vaibhāṣikas establish the difference with respect to the object (and only within the preparatory stage), while here the difference is established with respect to the cause that produces them. The axes being different, they do not necessarily exclude each other. One thing is to be noted: Puguang sets up a separate outline label for this passage — “‘now on careful examination the three marks’ down to ‘formed through eating grass’: the author sets out his own understanding” — standing alongside the earlier “the author sets out other masters’ refutation of the Vibhāṣā sense”; so the explaining through of this passage Puguang expressly marks as the author setting forth his own understanding, and not as still setting out the words of other masters.
In practice: when a classification is challenged as having overlapping boundaries, this passage offers a general solution — try another axis of classification. What overlaps in its objects need not overlap in the cause that produces it.
XII. The Three Causes of a Purified Bodily Vessel, and the Four Noble Lineages
〔Checklist Ten · First Part〕Before cultivating, wash the “vessel” clean. First the question: for one who wishes to succeed quickly in cultivation, what is to be done first? The treatise answers: the purity of the bodily vessel is in brief by three causes — seclusion of body and mind, contentment and fewness of desires, and abiding in the four noble lineages. Seclusion of body is separation from confused dwelling together; seclusion of mind is separation from unwholesome applied thought; and for those two to be accomplished one must rely upon contentment and fewness of desires. What is called contentment is being without discontent, and what is called fewness of desires is being without great desire.
Ask further: how are discontent and great desire divided? The treatise first records the account of the masters of Abhidharma: to seek yet more of fine clothing and the rest already obtained is called discontent, and to long in many directions for what is not yet obtained is called great desire. The treatise at once objects against itself: is not “seeking yet more” also taking what is not yet obtained for its object? In that case the difference between the two does not stand. And so it establishes another account: to be gloomily unhappy over what has already been obtained because it is not fine and not much is called discontent; and to seek the fine and the abundant in things not yet obtained is called great desire. As for their natures, contentment and fewness of desires have non-greed for their entity and extend to the three realms and to what is without outflows, while the two they counteract have the greed of the desire realm for their nature and are affiliated to the desire realm alone.
The easy error: to read fewness of desires and contentment as one and the same thing. The boundary lies just at the obtained and the not yet obtained: contentment counteracts dissatisfaction over what has been obtained, and fewness of desires counteracts much seeking after what has not.
〔Checklist Ten · Second Part〕Why the four noble lineages are called “lineages.” First the question: where does the name come from? The treatise answers: “because they can produce the host of the noble ones, they are called noble lineages.” Their entity too is non-greed; the first three (contentment with clothing, food, and bedding as they are obtained) are contentment alone, and the fourth is delight in abandoning and delight in cultivating. Question: how can delight in abandoning and cultivating also have non-greed for its entity? Answer: because it can cast away the greed of desire for existence.
Ask further: why are these four established? The treatise speaks very close to the actual condition of one gone forth — a disciple has forsaken the household provisions and the household occupation and gone forth; the World-Honored One, master of the Dharma, out of pity for them established two things: the first three are the provisions that assist the path, and the fourth is the occupation that assists the path; “if you can do the latter occupation in dependence upon the former provisions, release is not far off.” And what is counteracted is the arising of the four cravings spoken of in the sūtra, having clothing, food, bedding, and existence and nonexistence for their causes. The treatise also states it by another gate: for the temporary stilling and the permanent removal of the desire for what is mine and the desire for the matter of myself — the matter of what is mine being clothing and the rest, the matter of myself being one’s own body, and the greed that takes them as object being desire; the first three noble lineages temporarily still the first three greeds, and the fourth permanently extinguishes all four.
In practice: the four noble lineages are a checklist one can run down — in food, clothing, and lodging, is there still a seeking of the fine and the abundant? In abandoning the afflictions and cultivating the path, is there delight such as one has in seeking food and drink? Puguang glosses it: “the four noble lineages, being that which can produce the host of the noble ones, the seed of the noble, are therefore called noble lineages,” and adduces the Mahāvibhāṣā on the difference between delight in abandoning and delight in cultivating, one account being “delight in abandoning the afflictions, delight in cultivating the noble path” — what is abandoned is the afflictions and what is cultivated is the noble path, and there must be delight at both ends before one counts as abiding in the fourth noble lineage.
XIII. The Two Gates for Entering Cultivation: Fitting the Medicine to the Illness
〔Checklist Eleven〕Why only two gates are given. First the question: the gates for entering cultivation are so many; why are only the contemplation of impurity and mindfulness that holds the breath established as “the essential ones”? The treatise’s answer is by way of counteraction: it is not that the gates are good, but that they are exact to the illness. One in whom greed is fierce and repeatedly manifest is called a practitioner of greed, and by observing the impure he can properly enter cultivation; one whose applied thought is much and whose mind is scattered is called a practitioner of applied thought, and in dependence upon mindfulness of the breath he can properly enter cultivation. The whole value of a gate lies in whether it treats the case aright.
Ask further: why can the contemplation of impurity not counteract applied thought? The treatise records two accounts side by side: one, that mindfulness that holds the breath has few objects and so can settle scattered applied thought, while the contemplation of impurity has many objects, and the manifold differences of color and shape draw forth yet more applied thought; two, that mindfulness that holds the breath turns upon the inner gate and so can settle scattered applied thought, while the contemplation of impurity turns for the most part upon the outer gate, like eye-consciousness, and so cannot counteract it. The two accounts are recorded together, and the treatise makes no choice between them.
The easy error: to read the two gates as two “grades” of entry into the path, and so to want to cultivate the higher one. They are a lateral division of labor, not a vertical stair; choose wrongly, and the medicine will not fit the illness, and the harder one works the more confused one grows.
In practice: before beginning to cultivate, diagnose yourself — over these past months, has what has most often been manifest been the mark of greed, or the mark of distraction? Diagnose clearly and only then choose a gate. Puguang here marks the outline as “from here the second, the separate explanation. Within it, first explaining the contemplation of impurity, second explaining the contemplation that is mindfulness of the breath,” and it is from here that the division of the two gates opens.
XIV. The Contemplation of the Chain of Bones: First Extend to the Ocean’s Edge, Then Draw Back to Between the Brows
〔Checklist Twelve〕Why the chain of bones alone is treated. First the question: greed is of four kinds (of color, of shape, of fine touch, and of attendance), and each has its own object (the discolored and the rest, the devoured and the rest, worms and maggots and the rest, the motionless corpse); why does the treatise insist on treating the chain of bones alone? Answer: because “by taking the chain of bones as object and cultivating the contemplation of impurity, one can counteract all four of these greeds alike, since within the chain of bones there is no object of the four greeds” — in the chain of bones there is no color to covet, no shape to covet, no touch to covet, and no attendance to covet either; the footing of all four greeds is taken away at once. One dharma counteracts four illnesses, and so it is chosen as representative.
Ask further: can this contemplation cut off the afflictions? The treatise says quite honestly that it cannot. “Since this is taken in by attention through resolve alone, and since it takes only a portion for its object, it does not cut off the afflictions, but can only suppress them and keep them from being manifest.” It is a contemplation of imagining, and its function is to hold down and not to pull up by the root.
〔Continued〕How the three stages are walked. The three stages are walked as one extending and one drawing back: the stage of first taking up the work — one first fastens the mind upon one part of one’s own body (a toe, the forehead, or wherever one likes), and the mind having settled, one imagines by the force of resolve that skin and flesh rot and fall away and that the bones are gradually made clean, until one observes the chain of bones of the whole body complete; having seen one, one observes a second, and gradually extends to a room, a monastery, a park, a village, a kingdom, until the whole earth to the ocean’s edge is filled with chains of bones; then upon what has been extended one gradually draws back and observes, until only one chain of bones is observed, and there the stage of first taking up the work is accomplished. The stage of practice matured — within that one chain one first removes the foot bones, reflects upon the remaining bones and fastens the mind upon them, and gradually until half the skull is removed and one reflects upon the half that remains. The stage of surpassing attention — one removes that half skull, fastens the mind between the brows, and abides with limpid concentration upon a single object.
The easy error: to think that the wider the higher. The real order is first extend, then draw back: the extending is to increase the force of resolve, the drawing back is to make resolve free in its use. At the very end nothing is left but a single point between the brows, and the work is deeper than ever. The treatise adds a fourfold distinction — a small object does not entail freedom, since attention may be matured or unmatured and the object may run from one’s own body to the ocean, the two axes crossing to make four alternatives.
In practice: this is one of the few passages in the fascicle that can be followed step by step. Two things are to be remembered: first, in setting out one takes “whatever place one likes” (not everyone must begin from a toe); second, it counts as accomplished only when one can draw it back — to extend and be unable to return is mere dissipation. Yuanhui’s writing on this passage is the fullest, giving instances one by one for the three stages of the chain of bones, and it is the passage of highest teaching value in any of the three commentaries.
XV. The Eight Questions on the Contemplation of Impurity: A Table of Its Properties
〔Checklist Thirteen〕Eight questions answered at one go. First the question: why does the treatise here suddenly put eight questions in a row (what nature, how many levels, what object, where born, what mode of apprehension, what time-period as object, with or without outflows, obtained upon separation from defilement or through preparatory effort)? Because in Abhidharma, to establish a dharma is necessarily to establish its analysis through the several gates — without this table the dharma has no place. The answers in order are: it has non-greed for its nature; it extends to ten levels (the four meditative absorptions, the four access stages, the intermediate absorption, and the desire realm); it takes only the visible form of the desire realm for its object (what is seen being color and shape); it is born in the human destiny alone, and among the three continents excluding the northern; it has the mode of apprehension of impurity alone; in whatever time-period it is, it takes the object of that same period, and if it is a dharma that will not arise it takes all three periods; it is with outflows alone; and it extends to both being obtained upon separation from defilement and being obtained through preparatory effort.
The easy error: to read “with outflows alone” as a disparagement. It is a conclusion drawn out of the restriction stated earlier — “since it is associated with attention through resolve alone, this contemplation should in principle be with outflows alone”; a contemplation established by imagining cannot be without outflows. So too “born in the human destiny alone, among the three continents excluding the northern” is no slight upon other regions, but is said with respect to the conditions for cultivating it.
In practice: in reading an analysis through the several gates, learn to use it backwards — when you see “with outflows alone,” go back and find which restriction forced it out (here, attention through resolve); when you see “extends to both kinds of obtaining,” go back and find which fact supports it (here, that there is a difference between what has once been obtained and what has not). Every cell should be traceable to its source; where it cannot be traced, one has not yet read it through.
XVI. Mindfulness That Holds the Breath: Discernment for Its Entity, and Yet Named Mindfulness
〔Checklist Fourteen〕Why the name is “mindfulness.” First the question: the treatise says that mindfulness of the breath “has discernment for its nature,” so why is there a word for mindfulness in its name? The treatise answers itself: “because it is held by the force of mindfulness, the object is distinct and what is to be done is accomplished” — as the four foundations of mindfulness likewise have discernment for their entity and are called foundations of mindfulness. Puguang here divides it further into two glosses: “the breath being the object, it is called mindfulness that holds the breath; mindfulness being able to hold the breath, it is called mindfulness that holds the breath” — the one naming it from the object, the other from what does the holding.
Ask further: why does it extend to five levels only (the first meditative absorption, the access stages of the second and third, the intermediate absorption, and the desire realm)? The reason the treatise gives is perfectly clean: this mindfulness is associated with the feeling of equanimity alone. Painful and pleasant feeling can conduce to drawing forth applied thought, and this mindfulness is precisely what counteracts applied thought, and so they do not arise together with it; gladness and pleasure can go against fixity upon an object, and this mindfulness is accomplished only by being fixed upon its object, and so, being contrary in this way, they too do not arise together with it. All four feelings being excluded, what remains is equanimity. (Another account says that within the fundamental lower three meditative absorptions there is also the feeling of equanimity, in which case it would be eight levels; the treatise records it alongside.)
The remaining gates: it takes the wind for its object and arises in dependence upon a body of the desire realm; it is in the human and heavenly destinies alone, excluding Uttarakuru; it extends to being obtained upon separation from defilement and through preparatory effort; and it is associated with real attention alone — which divides it very clearly from the contemplation of impurity, that being an imagining and this a real observing. The treatise says outright that only sentient beings within the true Dharma can cultivate it and non-Buddhists have it not, since they have none to expound it and cannot of themselves become aware of so subtle a dharma.
The easy error: to read “associated with equanimity alone” as meaning that in cultivating mindfulness of the breath one is to feel nothing. Equanimity is not numbness; it is not being dragged off by pain, pleasure, gladness, and sorrow; and it is just because one is not dragged off that fixity upon the object can stand.
In practice: this section yields a very serviceable self-check — if while counting the breath the mind keeps circling about “comfortable / uncomfortable,” then most likely one has not yet come to where this mindfulness is.
XVII. The Six Marks: Counting, Following, Settling, Observing, Turning, Purifying
〔Checklist Fifteen〕Why six are established. First the question: for the mark of mindfulness that holds the breath to be complete, which six causes must be present? The treatise lists them: first counting, second following, third settling, fourth observing, fifth turning, sixth purifying; and at the end, to gather up the six marks, it gives the summarizing stanza, “mindfulness that holds the breath should be known to have six differing marks, namely the distinctions of counting, following, settling, observing, turning, and purifying.” The six are not six methods of cultivation; they are the six marks that one and the same cultivation must pass through to be complete.
Counting: fasten the mind upon the breath going in and out, make no other preparatory effort, let body and mind go, and by mindfulness alone hold in mind the number of the breaths, from one to ten, neither less nor more — the reason being “lest the mind be too gathered in or too scattered at the moment.” Within this three faults may occur: the fault of counting short (taking two for one), the fault of counting long (taking one for two), and the fault of confusion (taking the in-breath for the out and the out for the in); free of these three it is called correct counting, and if the mind scatters partway one should count again in order from one, and having finished begin once more, until concentration is obtained. Following: without making a further preparatory effort, follow the course of the breath — attending to how far the breath goes in and out. That is: when attending to the breath going in, does it course through the whole body or through a part? Following that breath inward, it goes to the throat, the heart, the navel, the hip, the thigh, the shin, and on to the toes, and mindfulness follows constantly. If one attends to the breath going out, it can leave the body a span or a fathom, and whichever way it goes mindfulness follows constantly. (Another class of masters says the breath goes out extremely far, as far as the circle of wind or the Vairambha wind. That account is unreasonable, since this mindfulness arises together with real attention.) Settling: fasten mindfulness at the tip of the nose, or between the brows, or on to the toes, wherever one likes, and there settle the mind; and observe this breath abiding in the body like a thread strung through a bead, and whether it is cold or warm, whether it harms or benefits. Observing: having observed this breath-wind, observe together with it the great elements and derived form that arise along with the breath, and the mind and mental factors that abide in dependence upon form, observing the five aggregates complete as one’s object. Turning: turning means shifting — the awareness that took the breath-wind for its object is set within the ever more excellent wholesome roots that follow, and on up to the stage of the highest worldly dharma. Purifying: purifying means ascending and entering the path of seeing and the rest.
The easy error: to take the six marks for six methods among which one may pick and choose. They are one line: only when the counting has brought the mind out of distraction is there talk of following; only when the following holds is there talk of settling; only when the settling is steady is there talk of observing; only when the observing is accomplished is there turning; and only when the turning is carried through is there purifying. To skip a grade is to spin in place.
In practice: the section on the three faults is worth copying out for self-examination — today’s miscounting, was it short, or long, or a reversal of in and out? Each of the three answers to a different illness of mind (torpor, restlessness, lost mindfulness), and only by fitting the case can it be adjusted.
XVIII. The Differences of the Mark of the Breath: What This Breath Actually Is
〔Checklist Sixteen〕What the last stanza is distinguishing. First the question: what has gone before treated the method of cultivation; why does this stanza suddenly turn back to analyze the dharma-nature of the “breath” itself? Because it is a rule of Abhidharma that any dharma serving as an object must be given a table of its properties too. There are five answers: following the body — the breath is taken in by whatever level the body is born into, since the breath is a part of the body; depending on two — the turning of the in- and out-breath depends upon the differences of both body and mind, and so for one born in the formless realm, at the kalala stage, and on entering the absorptions without mind and the fourth meditative absorption and the rest, the breath does not turn (there must be openings within the body, and the mind of the level to which the in- and out-breath belongs must be manifest, before the breath turns); of the class of sentient beings, unappropriated — it is taken in by the class of sentient beings (being a part of a sentient being’s body), and yet is unappropriated (being separate from the faculties); homogeneous — it is of homogeneous nature (produced by a homogeneous cause), and is not nourished (when the body grows the breath diminishes instead), nor maturation-born (since after being cut off it can continue again, and no other maturational form is like this); not the object of a lower level — it is the object of a mind of its own level and of a higher level alone, and is not the object-field of the mind of the mode of deportment or the mind of penetrative effect of a lower level.
The easy error: to read “unappropriated” as “not mine.” Appropriated is here a technical term, denoting that portion which is joined with a faculty and so has feeling; and the breath is separate from the faculties, and so is unappropriated — which has nothing to do with ownership.
In practice: this section demonstrates the most typical move of the treatise — having finished with the method of cultivation, turn back and analyze the object itself as well. Hereafter, whenever you read of some gate of contemplation, it is worth asking: what class of dharma is this object itself? Answer that, and the gate of contemplation will not come to rest in imagination. The treatise also settles in passing a verifiable detail: on coming out of the fourth meditative absorption and the rest, and at the moment of birth, the breath enters first; on entering the fourth meditative absorption and the rest, and at the last moment of death, the breath goes out last — one entering and one going out, fastening exactly upon the line “it turns in dependence upon the differences of the two, body and mind.”
Further Resonances: The Mirror of the Three Commentaries
The above is the sense of the treatise’s own text in this fascicle. Below, a separate section gathers four matters: the adjudications and divergences of the three commentaries, Saṅghabhadra’s refutations, the divergences of Paramārtha’s earlier translation, and the coordinates available for parallel reading. A mirror is not the treatise; it is only another way of reading one and the same text. Recorded together without adjudication, each restored to its own place.
1. The Adjudications and Divergences of the Three Commentaries
One commentary entirely absent from this fascicle. Shentai’s commentary is a fragment, and of this chapter only Fascicle Seventeen survives, which explains Xuanzang’s Fascicle Twenty-Five (the fourth unit of this chapter); for this fascicle it is wholly wanting. Although the table of contents in Fascicle One does contain the words “Chapter Analyzing the Worthy and the Noble,” that is a table of contents and not commentarial text, and may not be made to serve. The want is marked as it stands.
Three houses take three routes in glossing the chapter name. Puguang glosses the name by “‘worthy’ means worthy and harmonious, ‘noble’ means noble and correct,” and settles the reason for the chapter’s place in the order: “the three chapters above explained what has outflows separately; the three chapters below explain what is without outflows separately. In order that, having wearied of the one, one should come to delight in the other, what is without outflows is explained next”; and among the three chapters on what is without outflows he adjudges that “the Worthy and the Noble explains the result, Knowledge explains the cause, Absorption explains the condition; the mark of the result being coarse and evident, it is explained first” — which sets out at one stroke the skeleton of the whole latter half of the treatise. Fabao instead adduces outside texts to gloss the two words “worthy” and “noble,” and explains by the order of the truths of cessation and the path why this chapter comes after the Chapter on the Latent Tendencies. Yuanhui is briefest, retaining only the sentence “‘worthy’ means worthy and harmonious, ‘noble’ means noble and correct; this chapter explains them at length, hence ‘analysis.’” One caution about searching is to be appended: the five words “Chapter Analyzing the Worthy and the Noble” have zero occurrences in the whole of Yuanhui’s work, and to use them as a search string is bound to yield a false zero.
The chapter-level main outline: three houses adjudge it threefold word for word, with slight differences of wording. Puguang gives “first, explaining the nature of the entity of the path in general; second, explaining the truths that the path realizes; third, distinguishing persons with respect to the noble path”; Fabao gives “first, explaining the nature of the entity of the path; second, explaining what the path observes; third, distinguishing persons with respect to the path”; Yuanhui gives “first, explaining the nature of the entity of the path in general; second, explaining the truths that the path realizes; third, distinguishing persons with respect to the path.” Fabao moreover gives “distinguishing persons with respect to the path” at the head of the chapter and “distinguishing persons with respect to the stage” at the place of the outline — one and the same house using two forms, recorded as it stands without adjudication. That the three houses adjudge alike while each words it slightly differently is precisely what shows that the outlines were established independently by each house and not copied from one another.
The two paths of seeing and cultivation: Yuanhui alone brings out “the stage of fifteen minds.” Puguang and Fabao are not seen to mention fifteen minds word for word in this passage, while Yuanhui expressly marks “the path of seeing at the stage of fifteen minds can quickly counteract the three realms,” putting the cutting off all at once of the path of seeing upon a definite number of minds. Of the three commentaries, Yuanhui’s teaching scaffold is the most concrete on this passage. Recorded together without adjudication.
The dispute over pleasant feeling: Puguang alone is dense, the other two brief. In the densest passage of debate in this fascicle, Puguang marks the position sentence by sentence in ten places (setting out the divergent account, the other school answering, the other school adducing three sūtras in answer, the other school answering by principle, the two further sections opened, the author displaying the Sarvāstivāda position, the three rounds of pressing, the citing of the Sautrāntikas’ defense, the Sarvāstivādins’ refutation, and the Sarvāstivādins explaining through the first sūtra); neither Fabao nor Yuanhui has this density. The attribution of speakers in the vernacular layer and the exposition layer of this unit follows Puguang’s ten markings as its standard.
The section on the three discernments: here the difference of fullness among the three houses is most marked. Puguang expressly marks “the author sets out other masters’ refutation of the Vaibhāṣika sense,” and first restricts the Vaibhāṣika masters’ adjudication to its proper stage with “distinguishing the three discernments with respect to the preparatory stage”; Fabao has no separate label of attribution in this passage, his attributions being fainter than Puguang’s; Yuanhui simply presents it in the form of question and answer, “Question: how do the three discernments differ? Answer,” and omits the whole of the ‘someone says: if that is so’ debate. One and the same passage: one house marks it most finely, one is faint, one does not take up the passage at all — the characters of the three houses are plain at a glance here. Recorded together without adjudication.
The four noble lineages: Fabao alone supplies a simile. Puguang glosses the name as “the four noble lineages, being that which can produce the host of the noble ones, the seed of the noble, are therefore called noble lineages,” and adduces Mahāvibhāṣā one hundred eighty-one for the threefold explanation of the difference between delight in abandoning and delight in cultivating (one of them being “delight in abandoning the afflictions, delight in cultivating the noble path,” the other two being the pairing of the uninterrupted path with the path of liberation, and of the path of seeing with the path of cultivation). Fabao adduces the Mahāvibhāṣā likewise, but supplies a further simile — “the seed of the host of the noble, and hence called noble lineage. The host of the noble all arise from these four, inheriting one from another in unbroken succession” — taking the succession of the noble lineages to be like the succession of a clan, a simile not seen in Puguang. Yuanhui in this passage is the most succinct in his outline of the three causes. Each of the three has its own strength; no judgment of merit is made.
The contemplation of impurity and mindfulness that holds the breath: Yuanhui is the fullest and Puguang the most skilled at glossing names. Puguang marks the outline as “from here the second, the separate explanation. Within it, first explaining the contemplation of impurity, second explaining the contemplation that is mindfulness of the breath,” and sets out sentence by sentence the counteracting relation of the four greeds and the four contemplations; and on mindfulness that holds the breath he brings out two glosses, “the breath being the object, it is called mindfulness that holds the breath; mindfulness being able to hold the breath, it is called mindfulness that holds the breath.” Fabao’s writing is briefer. Yuanhui gives instances one by one for the three stages of the chain of bones, his writing being the fullest and of the highest teaching value. ⇒ In the doctrinal content within the range of this fascicle the three houses have no divergence, all following Vasubandhu’s treatise; what differs is only the fullness of the teaching scaffold.
2. Saṅghabhadra’s Refutations
Saṅghabhadra’s two treatises name this chapter not “Chapter Analyzing the Worthy and the Noble” but “Chapter Adjudicating the Worthy and the Noble”; and the chapter numbers of the Treatise Revealing the Doctrine are all moved one place later than in the base text and the Treatise Conforming to Correct Principle, so that its chapter on the worthy and the noble is in fact entitled “Chapter Seven, Adjudicating the Worthy and the Noble.” To search the two treatises with this treatise’s chapter name is bound to yield a false zero.
The dispute over pleasant feeling: Saṅghabhadra restates the two parties himself and does not cite. Saṅghabhadra in this chapter restates the two sides on his own account — first bringing out the other school’s position, “here some of another school say: there is definitely no real pleasure; feeling is suffering alone,” and listing its proofs from principle; then at once establishing his own school’s position, “the masters of Abhidharma all say that pleasure definitely really exists. How is this known? Because the capacities of the productive causes of suffering and of pleasure differ,” shifting the proof to “the capacities of the productive causes differ.” The scene agrees entirely with the twofold structure of teaching and principle in Vasubandhu’s prose, except that he does not adopt the citing form, but restates both parties himself. One meaning and two schools, recorded together, without adjudication of which prevails.
The section on the three discernments: the bluntest verdict in the fascicle. Vasubandhu records other masters’ objection and explains it through with “now on careful examination the three marks have no fault of difference”; Saṅghabhadra cites him word for word and then passes a verdict — “he says this because he has failed to reach the sense of the Vibhāṣā” — and then sets out positively the true sense of the Vaibhāṣika masters. This pair is a double reversal: Vasubandhu refutes the surface sense of the Vaibhāṣikas, and Saṅghabhadra says in return that Vasubandhu’s own explaining through still fails to reach the true sense of the Vaibhāṣikas. The two schools recorded together, without adjudication of which prevails.
The glosses of discontent and great desire. Vasubandhu objects against the masters of Abhidharma’s gloss and establishes an account of his own; Saṅghabhadra cites the new account — “the Sūtra-master says: it should be said thus, that to be gloomily unhappy over what has already been obtained because it is not fine and not much is called discontent” — and adjudges it unreasonable, turning about to defend the masters of Abhidharma’s original gloss. The two schools recorded together, without adjudication of which prevails.
The explanation of the desire for what is mine and the desire for the matter of myself. Saṅghabhadra cites Vasubandhu’s explanation — “the Sūtra-master here makes his own explanation, saying: the matter of what is mine refers to clothing and the rest” — and says that its sense does not differ from what precedes and that the stanza ought not to have made separate lines for it; whereupon he establishes an explanation by another gate, “therefore the Vaibhāṣika masters of my school explain these lines further by another gate,” bringing out by “the grasping at what is mine as mine” the independent purport of the stanza’s four words “temporarily stilled and permanently removed.” The two schools recorded together, without adjudication of which prevails.
3. The Divergences of Paramārtha’s Earlier Translation
The chapter name differs entirely. Xuanzang gives “Chapter Analyzing the Worthy and the Noble,” Paramārtha “Chapter Six, Part One, Analyzing the Noble Path and the Persons of the Fruits” — Paramārtha does not take up the two words “worthy and noble,” but marks the chapter directly by the two axes of “the noble path” and “the persons of the fruits.” To search Paramārtha’s text with Xuanzang’s words is bound to yield a false zero; the aligning of passages one by one takes the structure of the scene throughout.
One instance of the lines of a stanza exchanging places. Xuanzang gives “the path of seeing is without outflows alone, the path of cultivation extends to both,” Paramārtha “the path of cultivation is of two kinds, the path of seeing is without flow alone” — the two lines exchange their order while the doctrine agrees entirely. “Without outflows / without flow” is then a systematic difference of rendering-character running through the whole piece.
In the section on the two truths the difference of rendered names is most concrete. Xuanzang gives “when that is broken the cognition of it is gone, and so too when the remainder is analyzed with discernment; as with the pot and the water, this is conventional; what differs from this is called ultimate,” Paramārtha “if on breaking there is no cognition of it, and by cognition the remainder is removed likewise, the conventional truth is like the pot and the water; what differs from this is called the true truth” — Xuanzang uses the full names “conventional truth” and “ultimate truth,” while Paramārtha gives simply the two-character abbreviations “conventional truth” and “true truth” (the “true” here being purely a technical term and not the translator himself). The order of the lines and the similes of the pot and the water agree entirely in the two versions.
The order of exposition of the two gates for entering cultivation is inverted. Xuanzang brings out the contemplation of impurity first and mindfulness of the breath after, while Paramārtha first sets up “the order of entering cultivation by mindfulness of ānāpāna” as the heading of the passage and then turns back to set out the contemplation of impurity of the practitioner of greed; the doctrine (the practitioner of greed cultivating the contemplation of impurity, the practitioner of applied thought cultivating mindfulness of the breath) agrees entirely, and only the order of the writing differs. As to rendered names, Xuanzang uses both the transcription “mindfulness of āna and apāna” and the abbreviated rendering by sense “mindfulness that holds the breath,” while in the passages found in Paramārtha only the transcribed form appears. So too with the names of the three discernments — Xuanzang uses the full names “the discernment formed through hearing” and the rest, Paramārtha the abbreviations “the discernment of hearing” and the rest. No judgment of merit is made between the two translations.
Honest record: in Paramārtha’s text, for the several passages of the simile of the good physician, the joint statement of the three kinds of suffering, the dispute over pleasant feeling, and the six matters of mindfulness that holds the breath together with the differences of the mark of the breath, the word-for-word close collation has not yet been completed, and is recorded as awaiting supplement, Xuanzang’s words not being used to fill the gap.
4. Coordinates for Parallel Reading
The two gates for entering cultivation in this fascicle have places available for parallel reading in the Yogācārabhūmi of the Yogācāra root lineage, and all three sets are anchored word for word. First, this fascicle matches two classes, the practitioner of greed and the practitioner of applied thought, to the two gates, while the Yogācārabhūmi, under the same measure of “establishing a practitioner by which affliction is dominant,” opens it out into seven classes (the practitioner of greed, of hatred, of delusion, of pride, of applied thought, of equal parts, and of slight dust) — the measure the same, the fullness different. Second, this fascicle establishes four objects of impurity by the four greeds and takes the chain of bones as counteracting them all, while the Yogācārabhūmi first asks what the object of impurity is and states in brief six kinds of impurity, its list under outer decaying impurity overlapping much with the objects of this fascicle, though the principle of arrangement differs: this fascicle takes the greed counteracted for its cord, and that text the classes of impurity. Third, for the mindfulness that holds the breath of this fascicle, that text takes the mindfulness that has the in- and out-breath for its object as the object of mindfulness of ānāpāna, and further establishes the fine headings of the intermediate in-breath and the intermediate out-breath, which this fascicle does not have. ⇒ The coordinates are recorded only, with no judgment of higher and lower; the choice among these links belongs to doctrinal adjudication.
四念住·四善根·見道十六心The Four Foundations of Mindfulness · The Four Wholesome Roots · The Sixteen Minds of the Path of Seeing
全文五層 →Full five layers →讀這一卷之前
上一卷把入修的兩道門(不淨觀與持息念)講完,這一卷開頭只有一句轉語——「如是已說入修二門,由此二門心便得定。心得定已復何所修」。定已經有了,接下來要做的事只有一件:起觀。這一卷從起觀的第一步(四念住)講到觀成的最後一步(世第一法),再一躍而入見道十六心,最後停在預流極七返。加行位之終與見道位之始,全在這一卷之內,所以它是整品的樞紐。
三家古德在這裡把科判的刀落在同一處。光記標「此下第三明四念住。就中,一明別相念住、二明總相念住」,寶疏標「下三頌,第三明四念住也。前兩頌明別相念住,後一頌明總相念住」,頌疏標「從此第三,明四念住,就中分二:一明別相念住、二明總相念住」——三家獨立分卷而界線全同,連所分的二科都逐字相同;寶疏更把頌數繫上去(前兩頌別相、後一頌總相),恰與本卷正十五至正十七的頌次相合。
還有一件事要先說在前頭。這一卷讀起來像一張階梯圖,煖、頂、忍、世第一,一級一級往上;但真正承重的不是階梯的高度,而是每一級所繫的分位——什麼時候唯是法念住、什麼時候具四念住,什麼時候具觀四諦、什麼時候只剩欲界苦一個行相。分位一亂,整張圖就讀成了勵志的比喻。所以下文逐段都要回到一個問題:此時所緣者何,所修者幾。
一、止先成,觀才有立足處
先問:為什麼開頭要說「依已修成滿勝奢摩他,為毘鉢舍那修四念住」?直接修觀不行嗎?
論給的次第是硬的:奢摩他(止)是心安住一境不散亂的那一分,毘鉢舍那(觀)是於境簡擇而見其相的那一分。止若未成滿,慧所起的簡擇便隨境流轉,觀不成其為觀。所以四念住不是從零起手的功課,是接在定上的功課——這也正是上一卷不淨觀與持息念的落點:那兩門是把心收住,收住了才輪到這一門把心用出去。
易誤處:把「依已修成止」讀成一句客套的過場話。它是資格語——沒有這一句,下面煖頂忍世第一整條線都無處生根。
落地上:讀本卷之前先確認一件事——這一整卷所講的,全部發生在等引地(定地)之中。後文說四善根「唯等引地故」而欲界無有,根就在這裡。
二、自相與共相:一境兩看
先問:同樣是觀身受心法,「自相」與「共相」差在哪裡?
論分得很清楚。自相是「身受心法各別自性名為自相」——各自不共他物的那一分:身之自性是大種造色,受與心「如自名顯」(受即領納、心即了別),法之自性是「除三餘法」。共相則是「一切有為皆非常性、一切有漏皆是苦性及一切法空非我性」——不限於一物而通於眾物的那一分。自相是分得開,共相是通得過。
易誤處:以為共相就是把四個自相加起來。不是。自相之觀是把身受心法各安其位,共相之觀是在這四樣上一齊看出非常、苦、空、非我——同一個所緣,兩種看法。也正因為兩種看法並用,後文才會有「別相念住」與「總相念住」之分:三家古德的科判就是照這條線切的。
落地上:往後凡讀到某一觀「唯不雜緣」或「通雜不雜」,先回頭問一句『他此刻用的是哪一種相』——答案通常就在自相共相這一分上。
三、念住之體有三:自性、相雜、所緣
先問:念住的體到底是什麼?論說「此四念住體各有三」,一個名目為什麼要有三個體?
因為所問的角度有三個。自性念住「以慧為體」——單問能觀的那一分是什麼法。相雜念住「以慧、所餘俱有為體」——連同與慧同時俱起的受想思等一齊算。所緣念住「以慧所緣諸法為體」——乾脆算它所緣的那四境。三個答案不衝突,是三把尺量同一件事。
論還特地為此舉了一部經:那部經說四念住「由何故集?由何故滅」,答以食、觸、名色、作意的集滅,依次令身受心法集滅。論判此為所緣念住——因為集滅所說的是四境,不是能觀之慧。
易誤處:把三種體讀成三個階段(先修自性、再修相雜、後修所緣)。它們不是次第,是同一修行的三種計法。真諦舊譯此三作「自性念處、相應念處、境界念處」,第二第三支的譯名雖異,三分之架構完全一樣——可見這三分是本論之骨,不是譯者的安排。
落地上:以後遇到『某某之體有三』的體例,先問是三個階段還是三把尺;本卷示範的是後者。
四、何以在慧上立「念住」之名
先問:既然自性是慧,為什麼名字裡是「念」?
論先錄毘婆沙師之答:「此品念增故。是念力持慧得轉義,如斧破木由楔力持」——斧是慧,楔是念;劈木要靠楔子把裂口撐住,慧要靠念的力持才轉得起來。論主接著給出另一個講法:「理實應言慧令念住,是故於慧立念住名,隨慧所觀能明記故」——不是念持慧,是慧使念住得下來。二說並出,本論不以前說為非,只說「理實應言」。
易誤處:把這一段當成訓詁上的細節而跳過。它決定的是修行的著力點:若照毘婆沙師,用功處在念;若照論主,用功處在慧之簡擇,念是隨之而住的果。真諦本此處作「由念力安立成故,譬如破木堅持於楔」,譬喻逐字相合,可見二譯所承的是同一段。
落地上:本論凡出「理實應言」四字,即是論主自出所見而不隱其與宗說之異;讀到這四個字要停一下,看清前後兩個講法各自把重量壓在哪裡。
五、次第、治倒與雜緣:四之所以為四
先問:念住為什麼恰好是四個,而且是身、受、心、法這個順序?
論給了兩層理由。次第之由:「隨境麁者應先觀故」,又因「諸欲貪於身處轉」,所以觀身在最初;然後是一條連環——貪身由於欣樂受,欣樂受由於心不調,心不調由於惑未斷,於是受、心、法依次而下。數目之由:「此四念住如次治彼淨、樂、常、我四種顛倒,故唯有四不增不減」——身治淨倒、受治樂倒、心治常倒、法治我倒,四倒只有四個,所以念住不多不少。
還有一層開合:前三種「唯不雜緣」,第四種法念住「通雜不雜」——「若於身等二三或四總而觀察名為雜緣」。這一句是下文的伏筆:總相念住與四善根,全從這個雜緣的法念住裡長出來。
易誤處:把四念住的順序當作重要性的排序。它是對治的順序,也是粗細的順序,不是價值的排序。
落地上:修法的次第若無理由,就只是儀軌;本論在此把理由給足了——四倒是病,四念住是藥,一藥一病,數目自然封死。
六、總緣法念住:把四境收成一境
先問:別相念住修熟以後,下一步是什麼?
論說「彼觀行者居緣總雜法念住中,總觀所緣身等四境修四行相,所謂非常、苦、空、非我」。這就是總相念住——不再一境一境地看,而是把身受心法四境合起來總觀,所修的行相也收成四個共相行相。
易誤處:以為總相念住是在別相之外另起一門新功夫。不是。它是同一個法念住,只是所緣從「不雜」轉為「總雜」;所以三家古德都把它科為四念住二分中的後一分,而不另立一科。
落地上:這一段極短(本卷正十七只有一頌),但它是全卷的關節——下一段的煖法,正是從這個總緣共相法念住漸次成熟而生的。若把這一節讀輕了,四善根就會變成憑空冒出來的四級台階。
七、煖法:聖道之火的前相
先問:四善根的第一級為什麼叫「煖」?
論說「修習總緣共相法念住,漸次成熟乃至上上品。從此念住後,有順決擇分初善根生,名為煖法」,並釋其名——「此法如煖立煖法名,是能燒惑薪聖道火前相」。惑是薪,聖道是火,煖是火將起未起時的那股熱氣。名字裡藏著一個判斷:此位還不是聖道,只是聖道的前相。
煖的分位長,所以「能具觀察四聖諦境,及能具修十六行相」。十六行相論在此逐諦列出:苦諦四「一非常、二苦、三空、四非我」,集諦四「一因、二集、三生、四緣」,滅諦四「一滅、二靜、三妙、四離」,道諦四「一道、二如、三行、四出」。
易誤處:把煖讀成一種身心的暖熱覺受。論給的是譬喻的取義——取其為火之前相,不取其為觸之所覺。寶疏於此節特別點出煖之所從生「此從思慧或修慧生」,也仍是就慧說,不就受說。
落地上:凡本論以物象立名(煖、頂、忍),先問一句『取的是它哪一義』;答案幾乎都在緊接的一句訓詞裡。
八、頂法:進退兩際的那一點
先問:煖既已能具觀四諦、具修十六行相,頂法又多了什麼?
論說「此煖善根下中上品漸次增長至成滿時有善根生,名為頂法,此轉勝故更立異名」,而「此亦如煖具觀四諦,及能具修十六行相」——所觀所修並沒有增加,增加的是位次之勝。名之訓有二:「動善根中此法最勝,如人頂故,名為頂法。或由此是進退兩際,如山頂故,說名為頂。」
兩個訓詞的取義不同。「如人頂」取其最高——在還會動搖的善根裡它是頂點;「如山頂」取其臨界——站在這裡不進則退。(頌疏此段用的是「煗」字,是煖之異體,非別義,據實記而不判。)
易誤處:以為頂法比煖法更穩。恰恰相反——頂仍在「動善根」之列,仍會退。真正不退要到忍位。頂法的意義不在穩,在於它是動與不動的分水嶺。
落地上:修行位次上凡稱「頂」者,多半不是安穩之處而是抉擇之處;本論這一訓可以借去讀一切同型的名相。
九、忍法三品:從遍觀四諦收到欲界一苦
先問:忍法為什麼叫忍?它和頂法的實際差別在哪裡?
論釋名有二義:「於四諦理能忍可中此最勝故」——前位也能忍可四諦,此位最勝;「又此位忍無退墮故名為忍法」——到這裡不再退墮。前一義是就慧之安受說,後一義是就位之不退說。體性上,「此忍善根安足增進皆法念住,與前有別」:煖頂初安足時唯法念住而後增進時具四念住,忍則自始至終唯法念住。
三品之分是本節的要害:「下中二品與頂法同,謂具觀察四聖諦境及能具修十六行相;上品有異,唯觀欲苦,與世第一相隣接故。」中間的過程論也說得極細——瑜伽師於色無色的對治道等,「一一聖諦行相所緣漸減漸略,乃至但有二念作意思惟欲界苦聖諦境」,這叫中忍位;再從此無間起一個「一行一剎那」的上品忍。
易誤處:把「漸減漸略」讀成功夫退步。正相反,這是收束——所緣愈減、行相愈簡,力量愈集中,直到只剩欲界苦一個行相、一個剎那,才接得上世第一法。三疏於此各有著眼:光記取其三品之開合,寶疏取其立名之較量,頌疏兼取忍可與無退二義。
落地上:本論凡言『漸略所緣』,皆是加行成熟之相,不是懈退之相;判準在於後面接的是更利之道,還是散亂。
十、世第一法:有漏之中的最後一級
先問:既然還是有漏,憑什麼稱「第一」?
論答得直接:「此有漏故名為世間,是最勝故名為第一。此有漏法世間中勝,是故名為世第一法。」勝的理由也給了——「有士用力,離同類因,引聖道生,故名最勝」:它不必依賴同類的前法為因,就能引出聖道。真諦本此處作「離同類因,由此功力能引聖道故」,義理全同。
形態上它與上品忍一樣:「緣欲苦諦修一行相唯一剎那。」
易誤處:把世第一法想成一個很長的殊勝境界。它只有一剎那。整個有漏加行的終點,是一個一剎那的無間之因。
落地上:這一節解釋了為什麼後文說世第一法「無命終捨」——它根本來不及命終,下一剎那就是苦法智忍。位次愈高,時間愈短,這是本卷的一條暗線。
十一、四善根之體與所修:現在修四、未來修十六
先問:四善根既名念住,它們的體是什麼?
論說「念住性故皆慧為體,若并助伴皆五蘊性。然除彼得,勿諸聖者煖等善根重現前故」——連同助伴算是五蘊,但要把「得」除掉;否則聖者已捨的煖等善根就會重新現前了。這一句刪減看似瑣碎,卻是為了守住前後文的一致。
接著是一大段現在修與未來修的細帳:煖初安足時,緣三諦法念住現在修而未來修四,隨一行相現在修而未來修四;緣滅諦則未來修一。後增進時,未來行相就升到十六。理由論自己給了兩句——初安足時「由此種性先未曾得,要同分者方能修故」,後增進時「由此種性先已曾得,不同分者亦能修故」。
易誤處:把這段表格式的文字當成可以略過的枝節。它是本論「修」字的定義示範:現在修是正起的那一個,未來修是由此而得的一切;曾得與未曾得,決定了未來修的寬窄。
落地上:讀這類數目時,先分清三欄——所緣是哪一諦、現在起的是幾、未來所得的是幾。三欄一分,密密麻麻的數字立刻成行。
十二、順決擇分:四級的總名與它的六地、九處、男女
先問:煖頂忍世第一四者的總名「順決擇分」是怎麼拆的?
論逐字拆:「決謂決斷,擇謂簡擇」——決斷簡擇指的是諸聖道,因為聖道能斷疑(決)、能分別四諦相(擇)。「分謂分段,此言意顯所順唯是見道一分」——所順的只是見道這一分。四者能引生決擇分而順益於它,故名順決擇分。
其下諸門一一有判準。所成:「四種皆修所成,非聞思所成,唯等引地故」。品:前二下品(俱可動可退)、忍中品、世第一獨上品。地:依六地(四靜慮、未至、中間);欲界無有因「闕等引故」,上地無有因是「見道眷屬故」。異熟:能感色界五蘊異熟為圓滿因而不能牽引,「憎背有故」。身:依欲界身,人天九處而除北俱盧洲;前三善根三洲初起,第四善根天處亦起,因為「此無初後一剎那故」。男女:前三男女俱通得二,第四女身亦得二種,而依男身唯得男身善根,因為「已得女身非擇滅故」。捨:聖者失地方捨,異生命終必捨,前二善根亦由退捨;「失退二捨非得為性,退必起過,失不必然」。
論還誠實地留了一處異說:頌之「二或七」是「為顯二有異說」,尊者妙音說煖頂二者依前六地及欲界共七地。
易誤處:把這一整段當成分類表而不問它為何如此分。每一門其實都在回答同一個問題——這四級善根到底站在什麼位置上:站在定地(所成、地),站在欲界之身(身、男女),站在還會失去的位置上(捨、退)。
落地上:凡遇本論的「諸門分別」,把門與門連起來讀一遍,那個法的坐標就出來了;一門一門孤立地背,反而記不住。
十三、四善根之勝利:四句保證各保證了什麼
先問:得了這四級,各得到什麼確定的保障?
論給四句:「煖必至涅槃,頂終不斷善,忍不墮惡趣,第一入離生。」四句的力度是遞增的。得煖者縱使「有退斷善根造無間業墮惡趣等」,仍「無久流轉,必至涅槃」——保的是終局,不保過程。得頂者「雖有退等,而增畢竟不斷善根」。得忍者「雖命終捨住異生位,而增無退,不造無間,不墮惡趣」。得世第一法者「雖住異生位,而能趣入正性離生」。
論還替頌補了兩處義准:頌只說「不墮惡趣」,而「造無間業者必墮惡趣故」,所以不造無間業已含在內;頌未言離命終捨,而世第一法無間即入離生,所以無命終捨也已成立。
忍位不墮惡趣的所以然,論說得極細——「若至忍位,於少趣生處身有惑中得不生法故」,而後逐字釋六者:趣謂諸惡趣、生謂卵濕生、處謂無想與北俱盧與大梵處、身謂扇搋半擇迦二形身、有謂第八等有、惑謂見所斷惑;且「於下忍得惡趣不生,所餘不生至上忍方得」。
易誤處:把「煖必至涅槃」讀成得煖以後就一路順風。論明說得煖者仍可能退、可能斷善、可能造無間、可能墮惡趣——保的只是不會永久流轉。這裡本論插了一問:「若爾,何殊順解脫分」(順解脫分也必至涅槃)?答曰「若無障礙,去見諦近,此與見道行相同故」——差別在距離與行相,不在終局。
落地上:讀一切「必得」之語,先問所必者是終局還是過程。本節是全論分辨這件事最清楚的一處。
十四、種性可轉:可轉到哪一級為止
先問:既然三乘種性各有其煖頂忍世第一,中途可不可以換乘?
論的答案是有界限的可轉。聲聞種性的煖、頂已生,「容可轉成無上正覺」;但「彼若得忍無成佛理」——理由極有意思:「菩提薩埵利物為懷,為化有情必往惡趣,彼忍種性不可迴轉」。得忍者決定不墮惡趣,而菩薩為化有情必須能往惡趣,於是不墮惡趣這件好事,反而堵死了成佛之路。至於轉成獨覺,則煖頂忍三位皆可,「在佛乘外故說為餘」。
麟角喻獨覺與佛則無轉,因為二者「皆以第四靜慮為依,一坐便成自乘覺故」;第四靜慮是「不傾動最極明利三摩地」,所以堪為所依。「一坐」的界限論主自定為「從煖善根乃至菩提,不起于座」,並另錄一說——「有餘師說:從不淨觀不起于座乃至菩提」。
易誤處:把「不墮惡趣」一概當作愈高愈好的功德。本節示範了本論的分寸:同一種功德,在不同的種性上有不同的後果。這不是價值判斷,是位次與願力的結構性衝突。
落地上:讀三乘之異時,注意本論從不比高下,只列各自的條件與界限;「在佛乘外故說為餘」一語尤可玩味——那是分類語,不是貶語。
十五、順解脫分:三生之最速與人三洲
先問:順決擇分之前還有什麼?
論說「順決擇分今生起者,必前生起順解脫分」,而「諸有創殖順解脫分,極速三生方得解脫」——第一生起順解脫分,第二生起順決擇分,第三生入聖乃至解脫。論用了一個農事之喻:「譬如下種、苗成、結實,三位不同。身入法性、成熟、解脫,三位亦爾。」
其體是「唯聞思所成,通三業為體」——就最勝說唯是意業,但由這個思願所攝起的身業語業也得此名。所以門檻並不高:「有施一食持一戒等深樂解脫,願力所持便名種殖順解脫分。」處所則限在人趣三洲,並須「遇佛出世殖此善根」,另錄一說「有餘師言:亦遇獨覺」。
易誤處:以為順解脫分是很高的位次。它低到一食一戒即可種殖——關鍵不在事的大小,在「深樂解脫」與「願力所持」。決定它是不是順解脫分的,是願,不是量。
落地上:這一節替全卷的階梯裝了最底下的一階,也給了一個很實際的判準:日常的一施一戒,繫在解脫之願上,就已經入了這條線。
十六、苦法智忍:見道之門與它的立名
先問:世第一法之後的第一剎那是什麼?
論說「從世第一善根無間,即緣欲界苦聖諦境,有無漏攝法智忍生,此忍名為苦法智忍」。立名之由是「為顯此忍是無漏故,舉後等流以為標別」——用它後面的等流果(苦法智)來標別它;「此能生法智,是法智因,得法智忍名,如花果樹」,好像以花果稱樹,是因中說果。
同一剎那還有第二個名目:「即此名入正性離生,亦復名入正性決定。」論逐字釋之——「經說正性,所謂涅槃」;「生謂煩惱,或根未熟。聖道能越,故名離生」;聖道能決定趣涅槃、能決了諦相,故得「決定」之名;「至此位中說名為入」。
易誤處:把「離生」的「生」讀成生死之生。論明說「生謂煩惱,或根未熟」——所離的是煩惱與未熟,不是受生本身。
落地上:一個剎那而有三個名(苦法智忍、入正性離生、入正性決定),是因為它同時是第一個無漏心、異生位的終點、聖位的起點。名多不是繁瑣,是同一事的三面。
十七、異生性由誰捨:一正義二異說
先問:異生性到底是被哪一個法捨掉的?
論的正義是苦法智忍:「此忍生已得聖者名,此在未來捨異生性」——注意是「在未來」,也就是此忍將生而未生之位;論自釋此意為「謂許此忍未來生時有此用非餘,如燈及生相」(燈未至而已破闇、生相在未來而能生法)。
其下並錄二說。甲說:「有餘師說:世第一法捨異生性」;論難之曰「此義不然,彼此同名世間法故、性相違故」。繼有一句釋通:「亦無有失,如上怨肩能害怨命」——借怨家之肩以害怨家之命,同類亦能相害。乙說:「有餘師說:此二共捨,如無間道解脫道故。」
易誤處:把「未來捨」讀成拖到以後才捨。這裡的「未來」是法的位次(未生位),不是時間上的以後。這一分位講不清,後面「見道十五心/第十六心」的分際也會跟著亂。又,「亦無有失,如上怨肩能害怨命」一句的說者,光記標為「有餘師釋」,而論文的承接語氣近於論主自申——此一標籤之差,本卷唯錄不判,詳見承衍節。
落地上:本論並錄異說時,難語與釋通語常常緊接,讀時要把每一句掛回它的主人;掛錯一句,整段的立破就反了。
十八、十六心之流轉:法智、類智與八忍八智
先問:十六心是怎麼排出來的?
一條規律走四遍。每一諦上先緣欲界起「法忍」,法忍無間起「法智」;再總緣色無色二界起「類忍」,類忍無間起「類智」——一諦四心,四諦十六心。所以苦諦有苦法智忍、苦法智、苦類智忍、苦類智,集滅道三諦「各四亦然」。論把十六個名目逐一寫足,不作省略。
法與類之名,論也給了理由:「最初證知諸法真理故名法智,此後境智與前相似故得類名,以後隨前而證境故。」法智是初證,類智是隨之而證的同類。
易誤處:以為「法智」是指緣「法」的智、「類智」是指分門別類的智。不是。法智緣欲界,類智緣上二界;「類」是相似於前者之義。真諦舊譯此節的「無漏」作「無流」,屬譯字之異而非義異。
落地上:十六心不必硬背,記住一個公式即可——『一諦二界、界各忍智』;四諦一乘,十六自出。
十九、現觀三種與頓漸之辯
先問:既然十六心次第而起,那些主張「唯頓現觀」的說法錯在哪裡?
論不急著判錯,先分清詞義:「此中餘部有作是言:於諸諦中唯頓現觀。然彼意趣應更推尋,彼現觀言無差別故」——你說的「現觀」是哪一種?於是立三種:「唯無漏慧於諸諦境現見分明名見現觀」·「此無漏慧并餘相應同一所緣名緣現觀」·「此諸能緣并餘俱有戒生相等不相應法同一事業名事現觀」。
分清之後答案就出來了:見苦諦時「於苦聖諦具三現觀,於餘三諦唯事現觀,謂斷證修」。所以若就見現觀說頓,不成——「以諸諦中行相別故」;若用一個無我行相總見諸諦,則與契經所說「以苦行相思惟於苦」等相違。但若說「見一諦時,於餘諦中得自在故」而說頓,或說「於見苦時即能斷集證滅修道」而說頓,論都答以「理亦無失」——因為那說的其實是事現觀。教證上,論舉「佛告長者:於四聖諦非頓現觀,必漸現觀」,並說「如是等有三經,一一經有別喻」。
易誤處:把這一段讀成一場勝負之爭。論的作法是先切詞義再論是非:同一個「頓」字,落在見現觀上不成立,落在事現觀上則許之。爭點不在頓漸,在所指。
落地上:遇到兩造相持,本論示範的第一步永遠是問『你這個詞指的是哪一種』;詞一分,多半的相違就自解了。
二十、十六心依何地
先問:這十六個剎那依什麼地而起?
論答得極省:「隨世第一所依諸地,應知即此十六心依。彼依六地,如先已說。」也就是四靜慮、未至、中間六地——與世第一法同依一地。
易誤處:以為入了見道就換了一個更高的地。沒有換。所依之地不變,變的是無漏與否——世第一法是有漏之最後,苦法智忍是無漏之最初,二者同地而異性。
落地上:這一節雖短,卻堵住一個常見的想像:見道不是換了地方,是在原地換了道。
二十一、忍是無間道,智是解脫道
先問:忍與智為什麼一定要前後間雜而起?
論以二道判之:「十六心中忍是無間道,約斷惑得,無能隔礙故。智是解脫道,已解脫惑得,與離繫得俱時起故。」忍正斷惑之得,無所隔礙;智則惑得已脫而與離繫得同時而起。論給的譬喻是家常的——「猶如世間驅賊閉戶」:先把賊趕出去(無間道),再把門關上(解脫道)。
其下有一假設之難:若說第二個只是無間道而與離繫得俱生,則此位中應不起已斷之疑智;若說見道位唯忍斷惑,則與本論所說九結聚相違。論主答:「此難不然,諸忍皆是智眷屬故,如王眷屬所作事業名王所作。」
易誤處:把「智是解脫道」讀成智不斷惑。論的分工是斷與證:斷之正作在忍,得之現前在智;而忍既是智之眷屬,說「智斷」也不算錯——這正是論主答難之所在。
落地上:驅賊與閉戶這個喻可以一路帶到修道位去用——後文九品失德的無間解脫九品,用的是同一副結構。
二十二、前十五心是見道:一畦稻的譬喻
先問:十六心都見諦理,為什麼只有前十五算見道?
論說「苦法智忍為初,道類智忍為後,其中總有十五剎那,皆見道所攝,見未見諦故。至第十六道類智時,無一諦理未見今見,如習曾見,故修道攝」。判準只有一條——是不是「未見今見」。
隨即有難:第十六心所觀的道類忍不也是未見今見嗎?論答「此中約諦不約剎那」,並舉喻:「如刈畦稻唯餘一科,不可名為此畦未刈」——一畦稻只剩一棵沒割,不能說這畦沒割完。論又補四條理由:道類智是果所攝、頓修八智十六行、捨前道、相續起,所以如餘修道。
再難:道類智必不退,正因它任持見道所斷之斷,就該算見道。論答「此難不然,太過失故」(照這樣推,後起諸道都成見道了)。末後一問:「何緣七智亦見道攝?」答「見諸諦理未究竟故,謂未周遍見諸諦理中間起故」。
易誤處:以為見道與修道的界線是『懂了沒有』。本論的界線是所見之諦有沒有剩——剩一諦未見即見道,一諦不剩即修道,與智之利鈍、位之高下無關。
落地上:一畦稻之喻可以反過來自檢:判斷一件事完成與否,看的是整畦,不是最後一棵。
二十三、隨信行與隨法行:鈍利之別與三向之立
先問:見道位中的人怎麼分?
論說「見道位中聖者有二,一隨信行、二隨法行,由根鈍利別立二名」——鈍根名隨信行,利根名隨法行。訓詞論給得很細:「由信隨行名隨信行,彼有隨信行,名隨信行者」,又「或由串習此隨信行以成其性」,其人「先信他隨行義故」;隨法行者則「於先時由自披閱契經等法隨行義故」。一個先信他人之言,一個先自披閱經法。寶疏於此更分二層——先釋「行名」,再釋「人也」(行與人各是一層),是三疏中獨出的一分。
其下依先前斷修惑的多少立三向:先未以世道斷惑名具縛,或已斷欲界一品乃至五品,此位名初果向;已斷六品或七八品,名第二果向;已離欲界九品,或已斷初定一品乃至具離無所有處,名第三果向。論並順帶交代了初果之所以為初——「謂預流果,此於一切沙門果中必初得故」。
易誤處:把隨信行看低一級。論只說根有鈍利,未說果有優劣;二者同在見道,所趣三向亦同。鈍利分的是入處,不是成就。
落地上:讀本論之判人,先分清哪些是「根」的分別、哪些是「位」的分別;本節二者交錯而各不相犯,是一個好樣本。
二十四、至第十六心:向轉為果,名亦隨轉
先問:第十六心一到,變的是什麼?
兩件事同時發生。位變:「即前隨信隨法行者,至第十六道類智心名為住果,不復名向」——前預流向今住預流果,前一來向今住一來果,前不還向今住不還果。名變:「至住果位捨得二名,謂不復名隨信法行,轉得信解、見至二名」,且「諸鈍根者先名隨信行今名信解,諸利根者先名隨法行今名見至」——因為「此二聖者信慧互增,故標信解、見至名別」。
論還順手排除一項:「阿羅漢果必無初得,見道無容斷修惑故,世道無容離有頂故。」
易誤處:以為換名是換人。人沒有換,換的是所依之位:向位上以行立名(隨信、隨法),果位上以德立名(信解、見至)。真諦舊譯於此的譯名系統與玄奘正相對照——因位作「信隨行」「法隨行」(前後字互倒),果位作「信樂得」,而「見至」一名二譯反而全同。
落地上:本論之名相多是位次的函數;讀到一個人前後異名,先問他的位次動了沒有,再問名字為何跟著動。
二十五、住果非向:為什麼不逕稱後果之向
先問:先斷欲界修惑一至五品的人,到第十六心明明可以往上走,為什麼只名住果而不名後果之向?
論的判準只有一條:「諸得果時於勝果道必定未得,故住果者乃至未起勝果道時,但名住果,不名後向。」向之名繫於已起勝果之道,未起則不名向——這與能不能往上走無關。
論隨即補一句事實:那些先斷一至五品的人「至得果時,此生必定起勝果道」;並由此推出一條:「由此先離三靜慮染後依下地入見道者,彼得果已於現生中必能引生後勝果道。若異此者,聖生上地應不可說定成樂根。」
易誤處:把「非向」讀成不能前進。它說的只是此刻的名——名依現行之道而立,不依未來之能。
落地上:本論立名的通則在此顯得最乾淨:名繫於已現起者,不繫於將可有者。這一條回頭去讀前面的「向」與「果」,處處都對得上。
二十六、九品失德:下下之道斷上上之障
先問:修惑與對治道為什麼要分九品,而且是下下對上上?
論先定二名:「失謂過失,即所治障。德謂功德,即能治道。」欲界修所斷惑有九品,「上地乃至有頂例亦應爾」;能治的無間解脫二道也各有九品。分法是三三相乘——根本三品各分下中上,得下下、下中、下上、中下、中中、中上、上下、上中、上上。
配對的規則是交叉的:「下下品道勢力能斷上上品障,如是乃至上上品道勢力能斷下下品障。」理由論說得很平實:上上品的德在最初根本還沒有;等這個德有了的時候,上上品的失早已沒有了。
論在此連下三組譬喻:浣衣「麁垢先除,於後後時漸除細垢」;明闇「麁闇小明能滅,要以大明方滅細闇」;又「如經久時所集眾病,服少良藥能令頓愈」「如長時所集大闇,一剎那頃小燈能滅」。末後一句點題——「白法力強、黑法力劣」。
易誤處:以為要用最強的道去斷最重的惑。本論正相反。粗重的惑最先被最劣的道斷掉,愈細的惑愈要愈勝的道——因為粗惑先現而勝道後成。次第不是由強到弱,是由粗到細。
落地上:三組譬喻其實是同一條理路的三種說法;記住『洗衣先去粗垢』一句,九品配對的方向就不會記反。
二十七、預流極七返:七之為數與第八有之諍
先問:「極七返」四個字,每個字管什麼?
論逐字拆:「七返言顯七往返生,是人天中各七生義。極言為顯受生最多,非諸預流皆受七返故。」所以「七」是人天各七,「極」是上限而非定額。預流之名亦逐字釋:「諸無漏道總名為流,由此為因趣涅槃故。預言為顯最初至得,彼預流故說名預流。」
論還自設一問:這個名目何義?若說初得道即名預流,則第八有者亦應名預流;若說初得果即名預流,則倍離欲、全離欲者至道類智亦應名預流。論的收法是:「此預流名目初得果,然依遍得一切果者初所得果建立此名」——一來、不還不是決定最初所得,唯此決定初得。
其下有一場三重往復。難:契經明言「無處無容見圓滿者更可有受第八有義」,而人天各七合為二十八生,豈不相違?答:「此契經意約一趣說,若如言執,中有應無。」再難:那麼上流至有頂者也應一趣無第八生。釋通:「依欲界說故無此過。」論並舉教證——「以契經說天七及人」,且「飲光部經分明別說於人天處各受七生」。至於何以無第八有,論給的理由是「相續齊此必成熟故,聖道種類法應如是」,喻以「七步蛇、第四日瘧」;又說他「有餘七結在故,謂二下分、五上分結」,故中間雖有聖道現前而餘業力持不證圓寂。
易誤處:把二十八生與經說的「無第八有」看成硬矛盾。論的化解是分齊不同——經就一趣說七,論就人天合說二十八。又,難者之身分,光記推為彌沙塞部而自標「或是」(推定語氣),本卷唯錄不判,詳見承衍節。
落地上:凡遇經論數目相違,先問二者的分齊是不是同一個;本節是全論處理此類相違最完整的一個示例。
二十八、七言引頌與苦邊際:一卷的收處
先問:卷末忽然引一首七言頌,是要證什麼?
上文說預流「無退墮法」,理由有四——不生長退墮之業、違彼生長業與果、強盛善根鎮身、加行意樂俱清淨;末後一句是「諸有決定墮惡趣業尚不起忍,況得預流」。就在這裡引頌為證:「愚作罪小亦墮惡,智為罪大亦脫苦,如團鐵小亦沈水,為鉢鐵大亦能浮。」同是鐵,團而小者沉,打成鉢而大者反浮——決定沉浮的不是罪之大小,是承載它的那個相續是愚是智。此塊前文作「故有頌言」而非「頌曰」,且不入本頌之數,故本帙標為引頌;大正作偈而明本作長行,屬版本體裁之異,考據目三已錄。
末後論以「苦邊際」收卷。問其立名之義,答曰「依齊此生後更無苦,是令後苦不相續義。或苦邊際所謂涅槃」。又問涅槃如何可作,答「除彼得障,故說作言。如言作空,謂毀臺觀」——說「作空」不是造出一個空來,是把擋住的臺觀拆掉。最後一句是本卷的收句:「餘位亦有極七返生,然非決定,是故不說。」
易誤處:把「作苦邊際」讀成造出一個叫涅槃的東西。論用「作空」之喻正是為了擋住這個讀法——所作者是除障,不是生法。
落地上:一卷從「心得定已復何所修」問起,到「除彼得障,故說作言」收束;起處是加行之始,收處是障之除盡。中間那十六個剎那,就是這一卷全部的重量所在。
承衍:三疏之鏡
以上是本卷論文自身之義。此下另立一節,收四事:三疏之判釋與互異、眾賢之破與補、真諦舊譯之異、可對讀之座標。鏡非論,只是換一種讀法看同一段文;並錄不判,各還其位。
一、三疏互異之處
一部在本卷完全缺席的疏。 神泰疏是殘本,現存七卷之中唯卷十七觸及賢聖品,而那一卷自標「論卷二十五」,所釋的是本品第四子(六種種性一系)。本卷全域機械核零命中,據實標闕,不以他卷之文充之。所以本卷之鏡只有三面,不是四面。
同一段科判,三家全合而所繫不同。 四念住之科,三家逐字同判「別相/總相」二分,這是本品最強的一處古德之證;然而寶疏獨把頌數繫上去(「前兩頌明別相念住,後一頌明總相念住」),光記與頌疏則只出科名。科同而所繫之細不同,並錄不判。
煖法所從生之慧。 寶疏獨標「此從思慧或修慧生」,光記與頌疏於此未出。此非三家相違,是寶疏獨補一層;然而它所補的正是本論後文「非聞思所成」的鄰界之問(此位之慧從何而來,與此位本身屬何所成,是兩個問題),值得並看。
一個異體字。 頌疏於煖法一節作「煗」,光記寶疏作「煖」。字之異體,非別義,據實記而不判。
忍法立名,三家各取一義。 光記取三品之開合(「忍有三品,下、中同頂,具觀四諦修十六行,此總相說」),寶疏取立名之較量(「前位善根於四諦理亦能忍可,此最……」——前位亦能忍可而此位最勝),頌疏兼取二義(「忍可四諦,最殊勝故。又無退故……」)。三家所取皆不出論文,唯著眼不同。
苦法智忍之釋名,三家覆蓋分工不齊。 頌疏於此有最貼近純釋名的一句——「苦法智忍者,苦法是苦諦法,忍緣苦法,名苦法忍」;光記於本卷範圍內未見獨立的純釋名句,其可繫者是附於「捨異生性」一諍的延伸語——「世第一法至住位時,苦法智忍在正生時,未成就故不名聖者」。⇒ 同一名相,三疏的覆蓋不齊,據實記,不以他節之文補此節之闕。
「亦無有失」一句的說者。 這是本卷說者標籤最須留意的一處。論文「亦無有失,如上怨肩能害怨命」一句,承接的語氣近於論主自申;而光記標之為「有餘師釋:雖世第一與異生性同是世間,性相違故能捨異生性,亦無有失」。二者有出入,唯錄不判——或是光記以「有餘師」統稱婆沙異說之通例,非另立第三宗。本卷白話層於此句不派說者,與此處同向。
隨信行之訓,寶疏獨分二層。 光記作「由信隨行,名隨信行。彼人有隨信……」,頌疏作「由根鈍利立此二名。若鈍根者,名隨信行」,皆一氣釋下;寶疏則明分二層——「釋隨信行名。先以信地為首,行隨信起,名隨信行。此釋行名。『彼有隨信行,名隨信行者』,釋人也」。行之名與人之名各是一層,這是三疏中唯寶疏點出的分際,回頭讀論文的「名隨信行」與「名隨信行者」二句,確實一句釋法、一句釋人。
第八有之難者是誰。 光記標「或是彌沙塞部難,彼執人、天合受七生」,而以「或是」自表推定,非確指;答方則明標「說一切有部答」。寶疏於此段未逐句另立標籤。⇒ 難者之部屬唯錄光記之推定,不代為確指;論文自身未言難者是誰。
三處『無明標』不是闕釋。 忍智無間解脫之假設難、七智亦見道攝之答句、第八有之第二答句——光記於此三處皆與論文一體連書而未另立問答標籤。這是疏文的體裁,不是疏文的空白;與神泰疏『本卷全闕』性質不同,不可混列。
二、眾賢之破與補釋
眾賢二論於此品的品名不作「分別賢聖品」,《順正理論》作「辯賢聖品第六」,《顯宗論》作「辯賢聖品第七」——以俱舍的品名去搜二論,永遠找不到。
兩處逐字牒引,皆在立名上。 本卷範圍內眾賢稱「經主」而逐字轉述世親之處,全部只有兩條,且都落在名相的立名上。其一是苦法智忍:眾賢先自立其解「是彼智生障之對治,故復名曰苦法智忍」,然後牒世親之釋「經主此中作如是釋:為顯此忍是無漏故,舉後等流以為摽別。此能生法智是法智因,得法智忍名,如花果樹」,繼而自出所見。所爭者是立名之所由——眾賢繫之於所對治(彼智生障之對治),世親繫之於後等流果(舉後等流以為標別)。二說並錄,不判勝負。
其二是無間解脫二道:眾賢設問「復以何緣說斷對治名無間道,說離繫得俱時起智名解脫道」,而後牒之「經主釋言:約斷惑得無能隔礙故名為無間道,已脫惑得與離繫得俱時起故名解脫道」。此處純為轉述而後別申,本節唯錄其牒句與所在。
一條誠實的負命題。 《顯宗論》於本卷相應段「經主」二字零命中,然而它對同一論義確有覆蓋(苦法智忍等術語皆在)。⇒ 這是顯隱之異,不能由此推出顯宗論於此段無說。負命題所能證的只有一件事:眾賢在顯宗論此段沒有用「經主」這個標名去點世親的名。
本卷對辯之稀,本身是一項事實。 與本品其他各子相比,本卷眾賢逐字牒引之處極少,且無直接破語。本卷所講的是念住、善根、見道次第的教理鋪陳,非有部宗義的爭議焦點——此事據實記,不代判其故。
三、真諦舊譯之異
真諦《俱舍釋論》於本卷相應段自成一系,其品名作「分別聖道果人品第六」,與玄奘「分別賢聖品第六」全異,且真諦此品分三卷而玄奘分四卷。體例上,玄奘作「頌曰/論曰」整頌先出,真諦作「偈曰/釋曰」逐句嵌釋——本卷玄奘的十六個本頌塊,在真諦本作若干短偈散布。
譯名自成一系。 念住作念處、相雜作相應、所緣作境界、煖法作暖行、無漏作無流、心得定作已得三摩提。這些差別貫穿全段,不是偶一為之。
最具體的一組系統差在見道之人的名目上。 因位玄奘作「隨信行」「隨法行」,真諦作「信隨行」「法隨行」——前後兩字互倒;果位玄奘作「信解」,真諦作「信樂得」。而同一組之中的「見至」一名,二譯反而全同。⇒ 一組四名之內,三名互異而一名全同,此為譯名系統差之中的例外,據實記。
最貼近的兩段。 其一是念住立名的破木楔喻:奘「是念力持慧得轉義,如斧破木由楔力持」‖諦「由念力安立成故,譬如破木堅持於楔」——譬喻逐字相合。其二是煖法之立:奘「是能燒惑薪聖道火前相」‖諦「是能燒惑薪,四聖道火前」。二譯於此二處幾無開合之差。
開合互異之例。 頂法之訓詞,玄奘於立名句即申「如人頂故」「如山頂故」二解,真諦則把訓詞另置他句;四倒之治,玄奘散文直陳,真諦先出偈而後申釋;收卷之句,玄奘先出「非決定」後出「是故不說」,真諦句序恰相反。⇒ 皆是次第之異而非義理之異,二譯優劣不判。
四、可對讀之座標
向前接的是子1。 本卷的第一句逐字承接入修二門——「如是已說入修二門,由此二門心便得定」。不淨觀與持息念所成的定,就是本卷四念住的立足處;子1 與子2 之間沒有斷點,是同一條線上的兩段。
向後接的是子3。 本卷收在「住果極七返」而明言「餘位亦有極七返生,然非決定,是故不說」;下一卷開口即是斷修惑之後的一來向果——本卷末句所留的空缺,正是下一卷的起處。
橫向接的是隨眠品。 本卷正三十五前半所用的九品失德,其九品修惑之分是隨眠品所立;本卷只說「如先已辯欲修斷惑九品差別,如是上地乃至有頂例亦應爾」而不重立,是把前品之尺直接取來用。讀本節若覺得九品之分來得突然,回隨眠品即得其本。
縱向貫穿全品的是「分位」二字。 從煖之初安足與後增進,到忍之下中上三品,到十六心之前十五與第十六,到住果與向——本卷每一次立名、每一次判人,判準都在分位上,不在境界的高低上。這是本品最可帶走的一把尺。
至於本卷向唯識一系的對讀座標,本次未取得經裁准之逐字錨,從闕待補,不以記憶擬引。
Before Reading This Fascicle
The last fascicle finished explaining the two gates of entering cultivation (the contemplation of impurity and mindfulness of the breath), and this one opens with a single sentence of transition — “thus have been explained the two gates of entering cultivation; by these two gates the mind then gains concentration. The mind having gained concentration, what further is to be cultivated?” Concentration is already there, and what remains to be done is one thing only: to raise up observation. This fascicle goes from the first step of raising observation (the four foundations of mindfulness) to the last step of its accomplishment (the highest worldly dharma), then leaps at a bound into the sixteen minds of the path of seeing, and comes to rest at last upon the stream-enterer who returns at most seven times. The end of the stage of preparatory practice and the beginning of the path of seeing are both within this one fascicle, and so it is the pivot of the whole chapter.
Here the three houses of ancient masters let the knife of their outlines fall in one and the same place. Puguang marks, “below, the third, explaining the four foundations of mindfulness. Within it, first the foundations of mindfulness on the individual characteristic, second the foundation of mindfulness on the common characteristic”; Fabao marks, “the three stanzas below are the third, explaining the four foundations of mindfulness. The first two stanzas explain the foundations of mindfulness on the individual characteristic, the last stanza the foundation of mindfulness on the common characteristic”; Yuanhui marks, “from here the third, explaining the four foundations of mindfulness, divided within into two: first the foundations of mindfulness on the individual characteristic, second the foundation of mindfulness on the common characteristic” — three houses dividing their fascicles independently and yet with boundaries wholly the same, and even the two divisions they make agreeing word for word; while Fabao further fastens the stanza count upon it (the first two stanzas the individual characteristic, the last stanza the common), which tallies exactly with the stanza order of Roots 15 to 17 in this fascicle.
One thing more must be said at the outset. This fascicle reads like a diagram of stairs — heat, summit, receptivity, the highest worldly dharma, rung above rung; but what really bears the weight is not the height of the stairs, it is the station fastened to each rung — when there is the foundation of mindfulness on dharmas alone and when all four foundations of mindfulness, when the four truths are observed in full and when there is left but the single mode of apprehension of the suffering of the desire realm. Let the stations fall into confusion, and the whole diagram is read as an inspirational figure of speech. Hence every passage below must come back to one question: what is taken as object at this moment, and how many things are cultivated.
1. Calm Abiding Accomplished First, and Only Then Has Observation a Footing
First ask: why must it be said at the outset that “in dependence upon the excellent calm abiding already cultivated to fullness, one cultivates the four foundations of mindfulness for the sake of insight”? Will it not do to cultivate observation directly?
The order the treatise gives is hard: calm abiding (śamatha) is that portion whereby the mind rests upon a single object and is not scattered, and insight (vipaśyanā) is that portion whereby one discriminates upon an object and sees its character. If calm abiding is not cultivated to fullness, the discrimination raised by discernment drifts along with its objects, and observation does not become observation at all. Hence the four foundations of mindfulness are not an exercise begun from nothing; they are an exercise joined onto concentration — and this is just where the contemplation of impurity and mindfulness of the breath of the last fascicle come down: those two gates gather the mind in, and only when it is gathered in does the turn come for this gate to put it to use.
The easy error: to read “in dependence upon the calm abiding already cultivated” as a mere polite sentence of transition. It is a sentence of qualification — without it, the whole line of heat, summit, receptivity, and the highest worldly dharma below has nowhere to take root.
In practice: before reading this fascicle make sure of one thing — everything spoken of in it takes place within the levels of meditative equipoise (the levels of concentration). The later statement that the four wholesome roots are “only of the levels of meditative equipoise” and are not found in the desire realm has its root just here.
2. The Individual and the Common Characteristic: Two Ways of Looking at One Object
First ask: in observing body, feeling, mind, and dharmas alike, where lies the difference between the “individual characteristic” and the “common characteristic”?
The treatise divides them very clearly. The individual characteristic is “the several intrinsic natures of body, feeling, mind, and dharmas are called the individual characteristic” — that portion in each which is not shared with anything else: the intrinsic nature of the body is the great elements and derived form; feeling and mind are “just as their names display them” (feeling being the receiving of what is felt, mind the discerning knowledge of an object); and the intrinsic nature of dharmas is “the dharmas remaining when the three are taken away.” The common characteristic is “that all the conditioned are of the nature of impermanence, that all with outflows are of the nature of suffering, and that all dharmas are of the nature of emptiness and non-self” — that portion which is not confined to one thing but runs through many. The individual characteristic is what can be told apart; the common characteristic is what passes through.
The easy error: to suppose that the common characteristic is the four individual characteristics added together. It is not. The observation by individual characteristic sets body, feeling, mind, and dharmas each in its own place; the observation by common characteristic sees impermanence, suffering, emptiness, and non-self upon all four at once — one and the same object, two ways of looking. And it is just because the two ways of looking are used together that there comes to be, further on, the division into “foundations of mindfulness on the individual characteristic” and “the foundation of mindfulness on the common characteristic”: the outlines of the three houses of ancient masters are cut along this very line.
In practice: hereafter, whenever one reads that a given observation has “an unmixed object only” or “extends to both mixed and unmixed,” first turn back and ask what kind of characteristic he is using at this moment — the answer usually lies in this very division of individual and common.
3. A Foundation of Mindfulness Has Three Entities: Intrinsic Nature, Conjunction, and Object
First ask: what after all is the entity of a foundation of mindfulness? The treatise says, “the entity of each of these four foundations of mindfulness is threefold”; why should one name require three entities?
Because the angle from which the question is put is threefold. The foundation of mindfulness as intrinsic nature “has discernment for its entity” — asking only what dharma that portion is which observes. The foundation of mindfulness as conjoined “has for its entity discernment together with the remaining dharmas coexisting with it” — reckoning in the feeling, perception, volition, and the rest that arise together with discernment. The foundation of mindfulness as object “has for its entity the dharmas that discernment takes as its object” — reckoning outright the four objects it takes. The three answers do not conflict; they are three measures laid to one and the same thing.
The treatise even adduces a sūtra for this: that sūtra says of the four foundations of mindfulness, “by what do they come to be gathered? by what do they come to cease,” and answers with the gathering and ceasing of food, contact, name-and-form, and attention as making body, feeling, mind, and dharmas gather and cease in order. The treatise adjudges this to be the foundation of mindfulness as object — since what is said to gather and cease is the four objects and not the discernment that observes.
The easy error: to read the three entities as three stages (first cultivating intrinsic nature, then conjunction, then object). They are not an order; they are three ways of reckoning one and the same practice. Paramārtha’s old version renders these three as “the station of mindfulness as intrinsic nature, as associated, and as object-field,” and although the renderings of the second and third members differ, the framework of the threefold division is wholly the same — which shows that this threefold division is the bone of the treatise itself and not an arrangement of the translator.
In practice: hereafter, when one meets the form “such and such has three entities,” first ask whether they are three stages or three measures; what this fascicle exhibits is the latter.
4. Why the Name “Foundation of Mindfulness” Is Established upon Discernment
First ask: since the intrinsic nature is discernment, why does the name contain “mindfulness”?
The treatise first records the Vaibhāṣika masters’ answer: “because in this class mindfulness is preponderant. The sense is that it is by the sustaining force of mindfulness that discernment gets to proceed, as in splitting wood with an axe the cleft is held by the force of the wedge” — the axe is discernment and the wedge is mindfulness; to split wood one must have the wedge hold the cleft open, and discernment must have the sustaining force of mindfulness before it can proceed. The author then gives another account: “in strict principle one should say that it is discernment that makes mindfulness stand fast, and therefore the name foundation of mindfulness is established upon discernment, since following upon what discernment observes it can record clearly” — it is not that mindfulness sustains discernment, but that discernment makes mindfulness able to stand fast. The two accounts stand out together, and the treatise does not declare the former wrong, saying only “in strict principle one should say.”
The easy error: to take this passage for a detail of glossing and skip it. What it settles is where the weight of practice is put: on the Vaibhāṣikas’ account the exertion goes into mindfulness; on the author’s, the exertion goes into the discrimination of discernment, and mindfulness is the result that stands fast in its train. Paramārtha’s version here has “because it is established by the force of mindfulness, as in splitting wood the wedge is firmly held,” the simile agreeing word for word, which shows that the two versions carry the same passage.
In practice: wherever this treatise brings out the words “in strict principle one should say,” it is the author putting forward his own view without concealing its difference from the tenet of the school; when one reads those words one should stop and see just where each of the two accounts, before and after, puts the weight.
5. Order, the Counteracting of the Inversions, and Mixed Objects: Why Four Are Four
First ask: why are the foundations of mindfulness exactly four, and in this order of body, feeling, mind, and dharmas?
The treatise gives two layers of reason. As to the ground of the order: “because what is coarse in the aspect of its object ought to be observed first,” and again because “the several desires and greeds proceed upon this one thing, the body,” so that the observation of the body comes first; and then a chain follows — greed for the body arises from taking delight in feeling, delight in feeling from the mind’s being untamed, the mind’s being untamed from the afflictions not yet cut off, and so feeling, mind, and dharmas come down in that order. As to the ground of the number: “these four foundations of mindfulness counteract, each in its own order, those four inversions of purity, pleasure, permanence, and self; hence there are only four, neither more nor fewer” — body counteracting the inversion of purity, feeling that of pleasure, mind that of permanence, dharmas that of self; the inversions being only four, the foundations of mindfulness are neither more nor fewer.
There is a further layer of opening and closing: the first three have “unmixed objects only,” while the fourth, the foundation of mindfulness on dharmas, “extends to both the mixed and the unmixed” — “if among body and the rest one observes two, three, or four of them together, it is called having a mixed object.” This sentence is the foreshadowing of what follows: the foundation of mindfulness on the common characteristic and the four wholesome roots all grow out of this foundation of mindfulness on dharmas with mixed objects.
The easy error: to take the order of the four foundations of mindfulness for an ordering by importance. It is an order of counteraction, and also an order of coarse and fine, and not an order of value.
In practice: an order of practice without a reason is mere ritual; here the treatise gives the reason in full — the four inversions are the illness and the four foundations of mindfulness the medicine, one medicine to one illness, and the number is thereby sealed of itself.
6. The Foundation of Mindfulness on Dharmas with a Total Object: Gathering the Four Objects into One
First ask: when the foundations of mindfulness on the individual characteristic have been cultivated to ripeness, what comes next?
The treatise says, “that practitioner of observation, abiding within the foundation of mindfulness on dharmas whose object is total and mixed, observes together the four objects, body and the rest, and cultivates the four modes of apprehension, namely impermanent, suffering, empty, and non-self.” This is the foundation of mindfulness on the common characteristic — no longer looking at one object after another, but taking the four objects of body, feeling, mind, and dharmas together and observing them as one, the modes of apprehension cultivated being likewise gathered into the four modes of the common characteristic.
The easy error: to suppose that the foundation of mindfulness on the common characteristic is a new exercise raised up beside those on the individual characteristic. It is not. It is the same foundation of mindfulness on dharmas, only with its object turned from “unmixed” to “total and mixed”; which is why all three houses of ancient masters outline it as the second of the two divisions of the four foundations of mindfulness, and do not set up a separate division for it.
In practice: this passage is exceedingly short (Root 17 of this fascicle being a single stanza), yet it is the joint of the whole fascicle — the wholesome root of heat in the next passage is precisely what arises out of this foundation of mindfulness on dharmas taking the common characteristic as a total object, ripening by degrees. Read this section too lightly, and the four wholesome roots turn into four steps sprung out of nowhere.
7. The Wholesome Root of Heat: The Forerunner of the Fire of the Noble Path
First ask: why is the first rung of the four wholesome roots named “heat”?
The treatise says, “when the foundation of mindfulness on dharmas taking the common characteristic as a total object is cultivated and ripens by degrees up to the highest of the high grades, then after this foundation of mindfulness there arises the first wholesome root of the factors conducive to penetration, named the wholesome root of heat,” and explains the name — “this dharma is named the wholesome root of heat as being like heat, being the forerunner of the fire of the noble path which can burn the firewood of the afflictions.” The afflictions are the firewood, the noble path is the fire, and heat is the warmth that is there when the fire is about to rise and has not yet risen. Hidden in the name is an adjudication: this station is not yet the noble path, but only its forerunner.
The station of heat is long, and so it “is able to observe in full the objects that are the four noble truths, and able also to cultivate in full the sixteen modes of apprehension.” The sixteen modes of apprehension the treatise here lists truth by truth: four on suffering, “first impermanent, second suffering, third empty, fourth non-self”; four on origin, “first cause, second origin, third production, fourth condition”; four on cessation, “first cessation, second calm, third excellent, fourth escape”; four on the path, “first path, second suitable, third proceeding, fourth deliverance.”
The easy error: to read heat as some warm sensation of body and mind. What the treatise gives is the sense taken from a simile — taking it as the forerunner of fire, not as something felt by touch. Fabao at this section points out expressly the discernment from which heat arises, “this arises from the discernment formed by reflection or the discernment formed by cultivation,” and this too is said with reference to discernment and not to feeling.
In practice: wherever this treatise establishes a name from a physical image (heat, summit, receptivity), first ask which of its senses is taken; the answer is almost always in the sentence of gloss that immediately follows.
8. The Wholesome Root of Summit: That Point on the Brink of Advance and Retreat
First ask: since heat can already observe the four truths in full and cultivate the sixteen modes of apprehension in full, what does the wholesome root of summit add?
The treatise says, “this wholesome root of heat, increasing by degrees through the low, middling, and high grades until it is complete, gives rise to a wholesome root named the wholesome root of summit, and since it is more excellent a different name is further established for it,” and that “this too, like heat, observes the four truths in full and is able to cultivate the sixteen modes of apprehension in full” — what is observed and what is cultivated have not increased; what has increased is the excellence of the station. The gloss of the name is twofold: “among the movable wholesome roots this dharma is the most excellent, as with the crown of a man, and so it is named the wholesome root of summit. Or because it is the very brink between advance and retreat, as with the summit of a mountain, it is called summit.”
The two glosses take different senses. “As with the crown of a man” takes the highest point — among wholesome roots that still waver it is the top; “as with the summit of a mountain” takes the critical edge — standing here, not to advance is to fall back. (Yuanhui in this passage writes the word “heat” with a variant graph, not a different sense; recorded as it stands, without adjudication.)
The easy error: to suppose that summit is steadier than heat. Just the contrary — summit still stands in the rank of “movable wholesome roots” and can still retreat. Real non-retreat waits upon the station of receptivity. The meaning of summit lies not in steadiness but in its being the watershed between the movable and the unmovable.
In practice: in the stations of practice, whatever is called a “summit” is for the most part not a place of security but a place of decision; this gloss of the treatise may be borrowed for reading every technical term of the same type.
9. The Three Grades of Receptivity: From Observing the Four Truths at Large to the Single Suffering of the Desire Realm
First ask: why is receptivity named receptivity? And where lies its real difference from summit?
The treatise glosses the name in two senses: “because among those that can receive the principle of the four truths this is the most excellent” — the former stations too can receive the four truths, and this station is the most excellent; “again, because the receptivity of this station has no falling back, it is named the wholesome root of receptivity” — from here on there is no more falling back. The former sense is said with reference to discernment’s calm reception, the latter with reference to the station’s non-retreat. As to entity, “this wholesome root of receptivity, both in setting foot and in advancing further, is the foundation of mindfulness on dharmas, and herein it differs from the former two”: heat and summit are the foundation of mindfulness on dharmas alone when they first set foot and have all four when they advance further, whereas receptivity is the foundation of mindfulness on dharmas from first to last.
The division into three grades is the crux of this section: “the low and middling grades are the same as summit, that is, they observe in full the objects that are the four noble truths and cultivate in full the sixteen modes of apprehension; the high grade is different, observing only the suffering of the desire realm, since it stands close beside the highest worldly dharma.” The treatise sets out the intervening course in the finest detail as well — the practitioner of yoga, with regard to the counteracting paths and the rest of the form and formless realms, “lessens and abridges by degrees the modes of apprehension and the objects upon each single noble truth, until there is left only a two-moment attention pondering the object that is the noble truth of the suffering of the desire realm,” and this is called the station of middling receptivity; and from this, with nothing intervening, there arises a high grade of receptivity of “one mode of apprehension and one moment.”
The easy error: to read “lessening and abridging by degrees” as a falling off in the exercise. Just the contrary — this is a gathering in: the fewer the objects and the simpler the modes of apprehension, the more the strength is concentrated, until only the single mode of apprehension of the suffering of the desire realm and a single moment are left, and only then can it join to the highest worldly dharma. The three commentaries each have their own point of view here: Puguang takes the opening and closing of the three grades, Fabao the comparison in establishing the name, Yuanhui both senses of receiving and of non-retreat.
In practice: wherever this treatise speaks of “abridging the object by degrees,” it is a mark of the ripening of preparatory practice and not a mark of slackening retreat; the measure lies in whether what follows is a keener path or a scattered mind.
10. The Highest Worldly Dharma: The Last Rung among Things with Outflows
First ask: since it is still with outflows, on what ground is it called “highest”?
The treatise answers directly: “since this is with outflows it is called worldly, and since it is the most excellent it is called highest. This dharma with outflows is the most excellent among worldly dharmas, and is therefore named the highest worldly dharma.” The reason for its excellence is given too — “it has the force of human effort, and apart from a homogeneous cause it draws forth the arising of the noble path, and so it is called the most excellent”: without depending upon a former dharma of its own class as cause, it can draw the noble path out. Paramārtha’s version here has “apart from a homogeneous cause, by this force it can draw forth the noble path,” the doctrine being wholly the same.
In form it is the same as the high grade of receptivity: “taking the truth of the suffering of the desire realm as object, it cultivates one mode of apprehension and lasts one moment only.”
The easy error: to imagine the highest worldly dharma as some long and excellent state. It lasts one moment only. The terminus of the whole preparatory practice with outflows is a cause, one moment long, with nothing intervening after it.
In practice: this section explains why the later text says the highest worldly dharma “has no relinquishing at the end of life” — there is simply no time for life to end, for the next moment is the receptivity to the cognition of dharma concerning suffering. The higher the station the shorter the time: this is one of the hidden threads of the fascicle.
11. The Entity of the Four Wholesome Roots and What They Cultivate: Four Cultivated in the Present, Sixteen for the Future
First ask: since the four wholesome roots are named foundations of mindfulness, what is their entity?
The treatise says, “being of the nature of foundations of mindfulness they all have discernment for their entity; taken together with their attendants they are all of the nature of the five aggregates. Yet their acquisition is to be excepted, lest the wholesome roots of heat and the rest belonging to the noble ones should come to be present once more” — reckoned with their attendants they are the five aggregates, but “acquisition” must be taken out; otherwise the wholesome roots of heat and the rest that a noble one has relinquished would come to be present again. This little subtraction looks like a trifle, and yet it is made to hold the consistency of what comes before and after.
There follows a long passage of fine accounts of cultivation in the present and cultivation for the future: at the first setting foot of heat, the foundation of mindfulness on dharmas taking the three truths as object is cultivated in the present while four are cultivated for the future, and any one mode of apprehension is cultivated in the present while four are cultivated for the future; taking the truth of cessation as object, one only is cultivated for the future. When it advances further, the modes of apprehension for the future rise to sixteen. The treatise gives the reason itself in two sentences — at the first setting foot, “because this class has not been obtained before, only what is of the same portion can be cultivated”; in advancing further, “because this class has already been obtained before, what is not of the same portion can also be cultivated.”
The easy error: to take this tabular stretch of text for a side branch that may be passed over. It is the treatise’s demonstration of what it means by the word “cultivate”: cultivation in the present is the one actually arising, and cultivation for the future is everything obtained thereby; and whether a thing has been obtained before or not settles how wide the future cultivation is.
In practice: in reading numbers of this kind, first sort out three columns — which truth is the object, how many arise in the present, how many are obtained for the future. Sort the three columns, and the close-packed figures fall at once into rows.
12. The Factors Conducive to Penetration: The General Name of the Four Rungs, and Their Six Levels, Nine Places, Male and Female
First ask: how is the general name “factors conducive to penetration,” covering heat, summit, receptivity, and the highest worldly dharma, taken apart?
The treatise takes it apart word by word: “‘decision’ means deciding, ‘discernment’ means discriminating” — deciding and discriminating refer to the noble paths, since the noble path can cut off doubt (decision) and can distinguish the characteristics of the four truths (discernment). “‘Factor’ means a portion; the sense of the words is to show that what they are conducive to is only one portion, the path of seeing” — what they are conducive to is only this one portion, the path of seeing. The four can draw forth the factors of decisive discernment and are conducive to them, whence they are named the factors conducive to penetration.
Below this each of the several gates has its measure. What they are formed by: “all four are formed by cultivation and not by hearing or reflection, since they belong only to the levels of meditative equipoise.” Grade: the first two are of the low grade (both movable and liable to retreat), receptivity of the middling, the highest worldly dharma alone of the high. Level: they depend upon six levels (the four meditative absorptions, access concentration, and the intermediate absorption); they are not in the desire realm because “meditative equipoise is wanting there,” and not in the higher levels because they “belong to the retinue of the path of seeing.” Maturation: they can call forth the maturation of the five aggregates of the form realm as a cause of fullness but cannot project, “because they abhor and turn away from the existences.” Body: they depend upon a body of the desire realm, in the nine places of men and gods excepting Uttarakuru; the first three wholesome roots arise for the first time in the three continents, and the fourth can arise for the first time in the places of the gods as well, because “it has no first and later but only a single moment.” Male and female: as to the first three, man and woman alike obtain both kinds, and as to the fourth a woman’s body also obtains both, whereas one depending upon a male body obtains only the wholesome root of a male body, because “with regard to a female body he has already obtained cessation independent of discernment.” Relinquishing: a noble one relinquishes only upon losing the level, an ordinary being must relinquish at the end of life, and the first two wholesome roots are relinquished by retreat as well; “the two relinquishings, losing and retreat, have non-acquisition for their nature, and retreat certainly involves the raising of a fault while losing does not necessarily.”
The treatise also honestly leaves room for one divergent account: the “six or seven” of the stanza is “in order to display that there are two divergent accounts,” the Venerable Ghoṣa saying that heat and summit depend upon the six former levels together with the desire realm, seven in all.
The easy error: to take this whole stretch for a table of classifications without asking why it is so divided. Every gate is in fact answering one and the same question — just where these four rungs of wholesome root stand: they stand upon the levels of concentration (what they are formed by, level), upon a body of the desire realm (body, male and female), and upon a position that may still be lost (relinquishing, retreat).
In practice: whenever one meets an “analysis through the several gates” in this treatise, read the gates through in connection with one another and the coordinates of that dharma come out; memorized gate by gate in isolation, they are on the contrary not retained.
13. The Advantages of the Four Wholesome Roots: What Each of the Four Sentences Guarantees
First ask: having obtained these four rungs, what settled guarantee does one obtain at each?
The treatise gives four sentences: “one who obtains heat will certainly reach nirvāṇa; one who obtains summit will in the end not cut off the wholesome; one who obtains receptivity will not fall into the evil destinies; the highest enters the certainty of the noble path.” The force of the four sentences increases by degrees. One who obtains heat, though he may still have “retreat, cutting off the wholesome roots, doing deeds of immediate retribution, falling into the evil destinies and so forth,” yet “will not go on wandering for long, but will certainly reach nirvāṇa in the end” — what is guaranteed is the end, not the course. One who obtains summit, “though he may still retreat and so forth, yet by ascendancy will in the end not cut off his wholesome roots.” One who obtains receptivity, “though he relinquishes it at the end of life and still abides in the station of an ordinary being, yet by ascendancy does not retreat, does not do deeds of immediate retribution, and does not fall into the evil destinies.” One who obtains the highest worldly dharma, “though he abides in the station of an ordinary being, is nevertheless able to enter the certainty of the noble path.”
The treatise also supplies two inferences on behalf of the stanza: the stanza says only “does not fall into the evil destinies,” but since “one who does deeds of immediate retribution must fall into the evil destinies,” the not doing of deeds of immediate retribution is already contained in it; and the stanza does not speak of being apart from relinquishing at the end of life, but since the highest worldly dharma enters the certainty of the noble path with nothing intervening, its having no relinquishing at the end of life is likewise established.
The ground of the receptivity-station’s not falling into the evil destinies the treatise sets out in the finest detail — “upon reaching the station of receptivity, he obtains the dharma of not being born with regard to a portion of destinies, births, places, bodies, existences, and afflictions,” and it then glosses the six word by word: destinies means the several evil destinies; births means birth from an egg and from moisture; places means the Heaven of Non-Percipient Beings, Uttarakuru, and the place of great Brahmā; bodies means the bodies of one congenitally without a sexual faculty, of one whose sexual faculty is incomplete, and of a person of both sexes; existences means an eighth existence and the like; afflictions means the afflictions abandoned by seeing; and “at low receptivity there is obtained the not being born in the evil destinies, while the rest are obtained only upon high receptivity.”
The easy error: to read “one who obtains heat will certainly reach nirvāṇa” as meaning that after obtaining heat all goes smoothly. The treatise says expressly that one who obtains heat may still retreat, may still cut off the wholesome, may still do deeds of immediate retribution, may still fall into the evil destinies — what is guaranteed is only that he will not wander for ever. Here the treatise inserts a question: “if that is so, how does it differ from the factors conducive to liberation” (which likewise certainly reach nirvāṇa)? The answer is, “because it is without obstruction, because it is near to seeing the truths, and because its modes of apprehension are the same as those of the path of seeing” — the difference lies in distance and in modes of apprehension, not in the end.
In practice: in reading every saying of the form “he will certainly obtain,” first ask whether what is certain is the end or the course. This section is the clearest place in the whole treatise for telling the two apart.
14. The Turning of Class: Up to Which Rung the Turning May Go
First ask: since each of the three vehicular classes has its own heat, summit, receptivity, and highest worldly dharma, may one change vehicles midway?
The treatise’s answer is a turning with bounds. When heat and summit have arisen in one of the class of the śrāvaka, “it is still possible to turn toward unsurpassed perfect awakening”; but “if he has obtained receptivity there is no principle by which he may become a Buddha” — and the reason is most interesting: “a bodhisattva bears the welfare of beings in his heart, and in order to convert sentient beings he must go to the evil destinies, whereas that class which has obtained receptivity cannot be turned back.” One who obtains receptivity is determined not to fall into the evil destinies, while a bodhisattva must be able to go to the evil destinies in order to convert beings; and so this good thing, the not falling into the evil destinies, on the contrary blocks up the road to Buddhahood. As for turning into a pratyekabuddha, all three stations of heat, summit, and receptivity may do so, “and since he lies outside the vehicle of the Buddha he is spoken of as ‘the other.’”
For the pratyekabuddha likened to the qilin’s horn and for the Buddha there is no turning, because the two of them “both take the fourth meditative absorption as their support and awaken to the awakening of their own vehicle in a single sitting”; the fourth meditative absorption is “a concentration unshaken and utterly clear and keen,” and so is fit to be their support. The bound of “a single sitting” the author fixes himself as “from the wholesome root of heat up to awakening he does not rise from his seat,” and he records another account alongside — “some other master says: from the contemplation of impurity he does not rise from his seat, up to awakening.”
The easy error: to take “not falling into the evil destinies” as a merit which is simply better the higher it goes. This section exhibits the treatise’s sense of measure: one and the same merit has different consequences in different classes. This is not a judgment of value; it is a structural conflict between station and vow.
In practice: in reading the differences among the three vehicles, note that the treatise never compares them as higher and lower but only sets out the conditions and bounds of each; the sentence “since he lies outside the vehicle of the Buddha he is spoken of as ‘the other’” is especially worth savoring — it is a word of classification, not a word of disparagement.
15. The Factors Conducive to Liberation: Three Lifetimes at the Fastest, and the Three Continents of Men
First ask: what is there before the factors conducive to penetration?
The treatise says, “one in whom the factors conducive to penetration arise in this present life must have given rise to the factors conducive to liberation in a former life,” and “whoever first plants the factors conducive to liberation gains liberation in three lifetimes at the fastest” — in the first life the factors conducive to liberation arise, in the second the factors conducive to penetration, in the third he enters the noble state and so on to liberation. The treatise uses a simile from farming: “it is as with the three different stations of sowing the seed, the shoot’s growing, and the bearing of fruit; and so it is with the three stations of the body’s entering the nature of dharma, of ripening, and of liberation.”
Their entity is “formed by hearing and reflection only, having all three kinds of action for their entity” — as regards what is most excellent they are mental action only, yet the bodily and verbal actions raised up under this resolve and vow also get the name. So the threshold is not high at all: “if a man gives a single meal or keeps a single precept and the like and deeply delights in seeking liberation, then, sustained by the force of his vow, this is called planting the factors conducive to liberation.” The place is confined to the three continents of the destiny of men, and one must “meet the appearance of a Buddha in the world to plant this wholesome root,” with another account recorded alongside, “some other master says that meeting a pratyekabuddha will do as well.”
The easy error: to suppose that the factors conducive to liberation are a lofty station. They are low enough to be planted with a single meal and a single precept — the point lies not in the size of the deed but in “deeply delighting in liberation” and in “being sustained by the force of a vow.” What settles whether it is a factor conducive to liberation is the vow, not the amount.
In practice: this section fits the lowest step to the stairs of the whole fascicle, and gives besides a very practical measure: an everyday act of giving or of discipline, fastened to the vow of liberation, has already entered this line.
16. The Receptivity to the Cognition of Dharma concerning Suffering: The Gate of the Path of Seeing and the Establishing of Its Name
First ask: what is the first moment after the highest worldly dharma?
The treatise says, “with nothing intervening after the wholesome root of the highest worldly dharma, taking as object the noble truth of the suffering of the desire realm, there arises a receptivity to the cognition of dharma comprised within the outflowless; this receptivity is named the receptivity to the cognition of dharma concerning suffering.” The ground of the name is that “in order to show that this receptivity is without outflows, its later homogeneous outflow is adduced as its distinguishing mark” — its later homogeneous result (the cognition of dharma concerning suffering) is used to mark it out; “since it can produce the cognition of dharma and is the cause of the cognition of dharma, it gets the name receptivity to the cognition of dharma, as a tree is named from its flower and fruit,” the result being spoken of in the cause.
The same moment has a second designation as well: “this very one is named the entry into the certainty of the noble path, and is also named the entry into rightness and determination.” The treatise glosses it word by word — “what the sūtra calls rightness is nirvāṇa”; “‘birth’ means the afflictions, or the faculties not yet ripened. The noble path can pass beyond it, and hence it is called separation from birth”; the noble path can with certainty tend toward nirvāṇa and can decidedly discern the characteristics of the truths, whence the name “determination”; and “on reaching this station, one is said to enter.”
The easy error: to read the “birth” of “separation from birth” as the birth of birth and death. The treatise says expressly, “‘birth’ means the afflictions, or the faculties not yet ripened” — what is separated from is the afflictions and unripeness, not the taking of birth itself.
In practice: that one moment should have three names (the receptivity to the cognition of dharma concerning suffering, the entry into the certainty of the noble path, the entry into rightness and determination) is because it is at once the first outflowless mind, the terminus of the station of an ordinary being, and the beginning of the noble station. Many names are not prolixity; they are three faces of one thing.
17. By What Ordinary-Being Status Is Relinquished: One Correct Sense and Two Divergent Accounts
First ask: by which dharma, after all, is ordinary-being status relinquished?
The treatise’s correct sense is the receptivity to the cognition of dharma concerning suffering: “once this receptivity has arisen one gets the name of noble one, and it relinquishes ordinary-being status while in the future” — note “while in the future,” that is, in the station where this receptivity is about to arise and has not yet arisen; and the treatise itself explains the sense as “that is, it is allowed that this receptivity has this function at its future moment of arising, and that no other dharma has it, as with a lamp and with the mark of arising” (the lamp dispelling the darkness before it has arrived, the mark of arising producing the dharma while itself in the future).
Below this two accounts are recorded alongside. The first: “some other master says: it is the highest worldly dharma that relinquishes ordinary-being status,” which the treatise objects to, saying “this principle is not so, because the two of them are alike named worldly dharmas, and because their natures are contrary.” There follows a sentence explaining it through: “there is no fault in this either, as by the shoulder of an enemy one can take the enemy’s life” — borrowing the shoulder of an enemy to take an enemy’s life, things of one class being able to harm one another. The second: “some other master says: it is the two of them that relinquish it together, as an uninterrupted path and a path of liberation do.”
The easy error: to read “relinquishing while in the future” as putting the relinquishing off till later. The “future” here is a station of a dharma (the station of not yet having arisen) and not a later point of time. Fail to make this station clear, and the boundary between “the fifteen minds of the path of seeing” and “the sixteenth mind” below will go astray with it. Again, as to the speaker of the sentence “there is no fault in this either, as by the shoulder of an enemy one can take the enemy’s life,” Puguang marks it as “some other master explains,” whereas the momentum with which the treatise connects it is close to the author speaking for himself — this difference of label the fascicle records without adjudicating, for which see the section on further resonances.
In practice: where this treatise records divergent accounts side by side, the objection and the sentence explaining it through often follow hard upon each other; in reading one must hang every sentence back upon its own master, for hang one sentence wrong and the establishing and refuting of the whole passage are reversed.
18. The Course of the Sixteen Minds: The Cognition of Dharma, the Subsequent Cognition, and the Eight Receptivities and Eight Cognitions
First ask: how are the sixteen minds laid out?
One rule walked four times over. Upon each truth, first, taking the desire realm as object, a “receptivity to the dharma” arises, and with nothing intervening after it a “cognition of dharma”; then, taking the two realms of form and formlessness together as object, a “subsequent receptivity” arises, and with nothing intervening after it a “subsequent cognition” — four minds to one truth, sixteen minds to four truths. Hence upon the truth of suffering there are the receptivity to the cognition of dharma concerning suffering, the cognition of dharma concerning suffering, the receptivity to the subsequent cognition concerning suffering, and the subsequent cognition concerning suffering, while upon the three truths of origin, cessation, and the path “there are likewise four minds each.” The treatise writes out all sixteen names in full and abridges nothing.
For the names “dharma” and “subsequent” the treatise gives its reason too: “because it first realizes and knows the true principle of dharmas it is named the cognition of dharma; the objects and cognitions after it, because they resemble the former, get the name subsequent, for the latter realizes its object following after the former.” The cognition of dharma is the first realization, and the subsequent cognition is of the same kind, realizing in its train.
The easy error: to suppose that “the cognition of dharma” means a cognition taking “dharmas” as its object, and “the subsequent cognition” a cognition that sorts things into classes. It does not. The cognition of dharma takes the desire realm as object and the subsequent cognition the two higher realms; “subsequent” means resembling what went before. Paramārtha’s old version renders the “outflowless” of this section as “without flow,” which is a difference of rendering-character and not of sense.
In practice: the sixteen minds need not be memorized by force; remember one formula — “one truth, two realms; upon each realm a receptivity and a cognition”; multiply by the four truths, and the sixteen come out of themselves.
19. The Three Kinds of Direct Realization and the Dispute over Simultaneity and Gradualness
First ask: since the sixteen minds arise in order, where is the error in those who maintain “simultaneous direct realization only”?
The treatise is in no haste to declare it wrong, but first sorts out the sense of the word: “here another school says this: with regard to the truths there is only simultaneous direct realization. Yet their intent should be further sought out, since the word ‘direct realization’ as they use it is undistinguished” — which kind of “direct realization” do you mean? Thereupon it establishes three kinds: “outflowless discernment alone seeing clearly before it the objects that are the truths is called the direct realization that is seeing” · “this outflowless discernment together with the other associated dharmas taking one and the same object is called the direct realization that is taking as object” · “these dharmas that take an object, together with the other coexisting dharmas not associated with mind, such as discipline and the mark of arising, performing one and the same business, is called the direct realization that is the matter done.”
Once they are sorted out the answer comes of itself: at the time of seeing the truth of suffering, “with regard to the noble truth of suffering there are all three kinds of direct realization, and with regard to the other three truths only the direct realization that is the matter done, namely cutting off, realizing, and cultivating.” Hence if simultaneity be said of the direct realization that is seeing, it does not stand — “since among the truths the modes of apprehension are severally different”; and if one were to see all the truths together by the single mode of apprehension of non-self, that would contradict the sūtra’s saying that one “ponders suffering by the mode of apprehension of suffering” and the rest. But if one says simultaneity on the ground that “at the time of seeing one truth one gains mastery with regard to the other truths,” or says simultaneity on the ground that “at the time of seeing suffering one is able to cut off origin, realize cessation, and cultivate the path,” the treatise answers in both cases, “in principle there is no fault either” — because what is spoken of there is in fact the direct realization that is the matter done. As proof from scripture the treatise adduces “the Buddha told the householder: with regard to the four noble truths there is no simultaneous direct realization but necessarily a gradual direct realization,” and says “of sūtras such as this there are three, and each has its own simile.”
The easy error: to read this passage as a contest for victory. The treatise’s way is first to sort out the sense of the word and then to discuss right and wrong: one and the same word “simultaneous” does not stand when it falls upon the direct realization that is seeing, and is allowed when it falls upon the direct realization that is the matter done. The point at issue is not simultaneity or gradualness, but what is being referred to.
In practice: when two parties stand opposed, the first step this treatise exhibits is always to ask, “which of these does your word refer to?”; sort out the word, and most contradictions untie themselves.
20. Upon What Level the Sixteen Minds Depend
First ask: upon what level do these sixteen moments arise?
The treatise answers most sparingly: “following upon the levels on which the highest worldly dharma depends, it should be known that these sixteen minds depend upon just those. It depends upon six levels, as was said above.” That is, the six levels of the four meditative absorptions, access concentration, and the intermediate absorption — the same level as the highest worldly dharma.
The easy error: to suppose that on entering the path of seeing one has changed to a higher level. There is no change. The level depended upon does not change; what changes is whether it is outflowless or not — the highest worldly dharma is the last of what has outflows, the receptivity to the cognition of dharma concerning suffering the first of what is outflowless, the two of the same level and of different nature.
In practice: short as this section is, it blocks a common imagining: the path of seeing is not a change of place, but a change of path in the same place.
21. Receptivity Is the Uninterrupted Path, Cognition the Path of Liberation
First ask: why must receptivity and cognition arise alternately, one before and one after?
The treatise adjudges it by the two paths: “among the sixteen minds, receptivity is the uninterrupted path, since with regard to the acquisition that cuts off the afflictions there is nothing that can block it. Cognition is the path of liberation, since it has already been liberated from the acquisition of the afflictions and arises at the same time as the acquisition of release from bondage.” Receptivity is what properly cuts off the acquisition of the afflictions, with nothing to block it; cognition is where the acquisition of the afflictions has been shed and it arises together with the acquisition of release. The simile the treatise gives is homely — “as when men in the world drive out a thief and shut the door”: first drive the thief out (the uninterrupted path), then shut the door (the path of liberation).
Below it there is a supposed objection: if the second be merely an uninterrupted path arising together with the acquisition of release from bondage, then at this station there should arise no cognition of doubt already cut off; and if in the station of the path of seeing receptivity alone cuts off the afflictions, that contradicts the nine clusters of fetters spoken of in the treatise itself. The author answers: “this objection is not so, because all the receptivities are the retinue of cognition, as the business done by a king’s retinue is called the doing of the king.”
The easy error: to read “cognition is the path of liberation” as meaning that cognition does not cut off the afflictions. The division of labor the treatise makes is between cutting off and realizing: the proper doing of the cutting is in receptivity, the presence of the acquisition in cognition; and since receptivity is the retinue of cognition, to say “cognition cuts off” is not wrong either — which is precisely the point of the author’s answer to the objection.
In practice: the figure of driving out the thief and shutting the door may be carried straight on into the station of the path of cultivation — the nine grades of uninterrupted and liberation paths of the nine grades of fault and virtue below use the very same structure.
22. The First Fifteen Minds Are the Path of Seeing: The Simile of a Field of Paddy
First ask: since all sixteen minds see the principle of the truths, why are only the first fifteen counted as the path of seeing?
The treatise says, “with the receptivity to the cognition of dharma concerning suffering for the first and the receptivity to the subsequent cognition concerning the path for the last, there are fifteen moments in all therein, and all are comprised within the path of seeing, because they see truths not seen. By the time of the sixteenth, the subsequent cognition concerning the path, there is no principle of a truth unseen that is now seen, and it is like reviewing what has been seen, and so it is comprised within the path of cultivation.” The measure is a single one — whether it is “unseen and now seen.”
An objection follows at once: is not the receptivity to the subsequent cognition concerning the path, observed at the sixteenth mind, also unseen and now seen? The treatise answers, “here we speak with regard to the truths and not with regard to moments,” and gives a simile: “as when in reaping a paddy field there is one plant left, one may not say that this field has not been reaped” — one plant left unreaped in a field does not mean the field has not been reaped through. The treatise adds four further reasons: the subsequent cognition concerning the path is comprised within a fruit, it cultivates at once the eight cognitions and sixteen modes of apprehension, it relinquishes the path before it, and it arises in continuity; and so it is like the rest of the path of cultivation.
A further objection: the subsequent cognition concerning the path certainly does not retreat, precisely because it sustains the cutting off of what is cut off by the path of seeing, and so ought to count as the path of seeing. The treatise answers, “this objection is not so, because the fault goes too far” (by such reasoning every later-arisen path would become the path of seeing). And a last question: “for what reason are the seven cognitions also comprised within the path of seeing?” Answer: “because the seeing of the principles of the truths is not yet complete, that is, because they arise in the midst of a seeing of the principles of the truths that is not yet all-round.”
The easy error: to suppose that the boundary between the path of seeing and the path of cultivation is “whether one has understood.” The treatise’s boundary is whether any truth is left unseen — one truth left unseen and it is the path of seeing, not one truth left and it is the path of cultivation, and this has nothing to do with dullness or keenness of faculty or with the height of station.
In practice: the simile of the paddy field may be turned round for self-examination: in judging whether a thing is finished, look at the whole field and not at the last plant.
23. One Who Follows through Faith and One Who Follows the Dharma: The Difference of Dull and Keen, and the Establishing of the Three Approachings
First ask: how are persons in the station of the path of seeing divided?
The treatise says, “in the station of the path of seeing there are two kinds of noble one, first one who follows through faith and second one who follows the dharma; these two names are established by the difference of dull and keen faculties” — those of dull faculties are named ones who follow through faith, those of keen faculties ones who follow the dharma. The gloss the treatise gives in fine detail: “because his practice follows upon faith he is named following through faith; and since he has this following through faith he is named one who follows through faith,” and again “or because by repeated practice of this following through faith it has become his nature,” such a person “in the former time believing the words of others and practicing following upon them”; while one who follows the dharma is such “because in the former time he perused for himself the sūtras and the other dharmas and practiced following upon them.” One first believed the words of others, the other first perused the sūtras for himself. Fabao here further divides two layers — first explaining “the name of the practice,” then explaining “the person” (practice and person being each a layer), which is a distinction he alone among the three commentaries brings out.
Below this, three approachings are established according to how much of the afflictions abandoned by cultivation was cut off before: he who has not before cut off any affliction by the mundane path is named one with the fetters entire, or he may have cut off from one grade up to five grades of the desire realm, and at this station he is named an approacher to the first fruit; he who has cut off six grades, or seven or eight, is named an approacher to the second fruit; he who has become separated from all nine grades of the desire realm, or has cut off from one grade of the first absorption up to being wholly separated from the sphere of nothingness, is named an approacher to the third fruit. The treatise also explains in passing why the first fruit is first — “that is, the fruit of stream-entry, because among all the fruits of the ascetic life this is certainly the first to be obtained.”
The easy error: to look down upon one who follows through faith as a rung lower. The treatise says only that faculties are dull or keen, and does not say that the fruits are better or worse; the two are alike in the path of seeing, and the three approachings they tend toward are the same as well. Dullness and keenness divide the way in, not the accomplishment.
In practice: in reading this treatise’s adjudication of persons, first sort out which distinctions are of “faculty” and which of “station”; in this section the two cross without infringing upon each other, and it is a good specimen.
24. At the Sixteenth Mind: Approaching Turns into Fruit, and the Names Turn with It
First ask: when the sixteenth mind arrives, what changes?
Two things happen at once. The station changes: “those very ones who follow through faith and who follow the dharma, on reaching the sixteenth mind, the subsequent cognition concerning the path, are named as abiding in a fruit and are no longer named approachers” — the former approacher to stream-entry now abides in the fruit of stream-entry, the former approacher to once-returning in the fruit of once-returning, the former approacher to non-returning in the fruit of non-returning. The names change: “on reaching the station of abiding in a fruit the two names are relinquished and two obtained, that is, one is no longer named one who follows through faith or one who follows the dharma but obtains instead the two names one resolute through faith and one attained through view,” and “those of dull faculties, formerly named ones who follow through faith, are now named ones resolute through faith; those of keen faculties, formerly named ones who follow the dharma, are now named ones attained through view” — because “in these two noble ones faith and discernment are each preponderant, and so the separate names one resolute through faith and one attained through view are marked out.”
The treatise also excludes one item in passing: “the fruit of the arhat is certainly not obtained here for the first time, because the path of seeing cannot cut off the afflictions abandoned by cultivation, and because the mundane path cannot separate one from the defilement of the summit of existence.”
The easy error: to suppose that a change of name is a change of person. The person has not changed; what has changed is the station depended upon: in the station of approaching the name is established upon practice (following through faith, following the dharma), and in the station of fruit upon virtue (resolute through faith, attained through view). Paramārtha’s old version here stands exactly opposite to Xuanzang’s in its system of renderings — at the causal station it has “following in accordance with faith” and “following in accordance with the dharma” (the two graphs inverted), and at the fruit station “one who attains through faith and delight,” while the one name “one attained through view” is on the contrary wholly the same in the two versions.
In practice: the technical terms of this treatise are for the most part functions of station; when one reads that a person has different names before and after, first ask whether his station has moved, and then ask why the name has moved with it.
25. Abiding in a Fruit Is Not Approaching: Why He Is Not Straightway Called an Approacher to the Later Fruit
First ask: one who has before cut off from one to five grades of the afflictions of the desire realm abandoned by cultivation plainly can go upward when he reaches the sixteenth mind; why then is he named only as abiding in a fruit and not as an approacher to the later fruit?
The treatise’s measure is a single one: “at the times of obtaining the fruits the path of the higher fruit is certainly not yet obtained, and so one abiding in a fruit, so long as the path of the higher fruit has not arisen, is named only as abiding in a fruit and not as approaching the next.” The name of approaching is fastened to the path of the higher fruit having arisen; where it has not arisen he is not named an approacher — and this has nothing to do with whether he can go upward.
The treatise at once adds a matter of fact: those who had before cut off from one to five grades, “at the time of obtaining the fruit, will certainly give rise to the path of the higher fruit in this very life”; and from this it draws one further conclusion: “from this, one who had before become separated from the defilement of three meditative absorptions and afterwards entered the path of seeing in dependence upon a lower level will, after obtaining the fruit, certainly be able to draw forth the later path of the higher fruit in his present life. Were it otherwise, it could not be said that a noble one born into a higher level certainly possesses the faculty of pleasure.”
The easy error: to read “not approaching” as meaning that he cannot go forward. What it says is only the name at this moment — the name is established upon the path actually in course, not upon a capacity for the future.
In practice: here the general rule by which this treatise establishes names appears at its cleanest: the name is fastened to what has already arisen, not to what may yet be had. Read the earlier “approaching” and “fruit” back in the light of this, and everything tallies.
26. The Nine Grades of Fault and Virtue: The Path of the Lowest of the Low Cuts Off the Obstruction of the Highest of the High
First ask: why must the afflictions abandoned by cultivation and the counteracting paths be divided into nine grades, and that with the lowest of the low set against the highest of the high?
The treatise first fixes the two names: “‘fault’ means defect, that is, the obstruction to be counteracted; ‘virtue’ means merit, that is, the path that counteracts.” The afflictions of the desire realm abandoned by cultivation have nine grades, and “so likewise it should be for the higher levels up to the summit of existence”; the two counteracting paths, uninterrupted and of liberation, have nine grades each as well. The way of dividing is three multiplied by three — the fundamental three grades each divided into low, middling, and high, yielding the lowest of the low, the middling of the low, the highest of the low, the lowest of the middling, the middling of the middling, the highest of the middling, the lowest of the high, the middling of the high, and the highest of the high.
The rule of pairing is crosswise: “the path of the lowest of the low grades has the force to cut off the obstruction of the highest of the high grades, and so on in this way until the path of the highest of the high grades has the force to cut off the obstruction of the lowest of the low grades.” The reason the treatise gives quite plainly: the virtue of the highest of the high grades is at first not there at all; and by the time that virtue is there, the fault of the highest of the high grades is long since gone.
Here the treatise sets down three sets of similes one after another: the washing of clothes, “the coarse grime is removed first, and afterwards the fine grime is removed by degrees”; brightness and darkness, “a coarse darkness a small light can extinguish, whereas to extinguish a fine darkness a great light is required”; and again, “as when the many illnesses gathered over a long time are all at once healed by taking a little good medicine,” “as when a great darkness gathered over a long time is extinguished by a small lamp in a single moment.” The last sentence points the theme — “the force of the bright dharmas is strong and the force of the dark dharmas is weak.”
The easy error: to suppose that the strongest path must be used to cut off the heaviest affliction. The treatise says just the contrary. The coarse and heavy afflictions are cut off first by the weakest path, and the finer the affliction the more excellent the path required — because the coarse afflictions are present first while the excellent path is accomplished later. The order is not from strong to weak, but from coarse to fine.
In practice: the three sets of similes are in fact three sayings of one line of reasoning; remember the one sentence “in washing clothes the coarse grime goes first,” and the direction of the pairing of the nine grades will never be remembered backwards.
27. The Stream-Enterer Returning at Most Seven Times: Seven as a Number, and the Dispute over an Eighth Existence
First ask: in the four words “returning at most seven times,” what does each word govern?
The treatise takes them apart word by word: “the words ‘seven returns’ display seven births of going and returning, in the sense of seven births each among men and among gods. The word ‘at most’ is to display that the births taken are no more than this, and not that all stream-enterers take seven returns.” So the “seven” is seven each among men and gods, and “at most” is an upper bound and not a fixed quota. The name stream-enterer is glossed word by word too: “the several outflowless paths are together named the stream, since by them as cause one tends toward nirvāṇa. The word ‘entering’ is to display the first arrival and attainment; he enters this stream, and so is named a stream-enterer.”
The treatise also puts a question to itself: what sense does this name point to? If first obtaining the path is what is named stream-entry, then one in his eighth existence ought also to be named a stream-enterer; if first obtaining a fruit is what is named stream-entry, then one twofold separated and one wholly separated from desire ought also to be named stream-enterers on reaching the subsequent cognition concerning the path. The treatise gathers it up thus: “this name stream-enterer points to the first obtaining of a fruit, yet the name is established with reference to that fruit which is first obtained by one who obtains all the fruits one after another” — once-returning and non-returning are not certainly obtained first, and this alone is certainly obtained first.
Below this there is a threefold exchange. The objection: the sūtra says plainly, “there is no place and no room for one whose seeing is complete to have the sense of taking an eighth existence,” and yet seven each among men and gods make twenty-eight births — is this not a contradiction? The answer: “the intent of this sūtra is stated with regard to a single destiny; if one holds fast to the letter, then intermediate existence would have to be nonexistent.” The further objection: then for one who goes upstream to the summit of existence there ought likewise to be no eighth birth within a single destiny. The explaining through: “this is said with regard to the desire realm, and so there is no such fault.” The treatise adduces proof from scripture as well — “because the sūtra says ‘seven among gods and among men,’” and “the sūtra of the Kāśyapīyas plainly and separately says that seven births are taken in the place of men and in the place of gods.” As to why there is no eighth existence, the reason the treatise gives is that “his continuum, having come this far, must ripen, and the class of the noble path is by its very nature just so,” with the similes of “the seven-step snake and the fourth-day fever”; and again that he “still has seven other fetters remaining, namely the two lower fetters and the five higher fetters,” so that though the noble path is present in the meantime, being held by the force of the remaining actions he does not realize complete quiescence.
The easy error: to take the twenty-eight births and the sūtra’s “no eighth existence” for a hard contradiction. The treatise’s resolution is that the compass differs — the sūtra says seven with regard to a single destiny, the treatise says twenty-eight with men and gods reckoned together. Again, as to who the objector is, Puguang conjectures the Mahīśāsakas and marks his own words “it may be” (a conjectural tone), which the fascicle records without adjudicating, for which see the section on further resonances.
In practice: whenever numbers in sūtra and treatise disagree, first ask whether the compass of the two is the same; this section is the completest specimen in the treatise of the handling of such contradictions.
28. The Quoted Stanza of Seven Characters and the Limit of Suffering: Where the Fascicle Comes to Rest
First ask: at the end of the fascicle a stanza of seven characters to the line is suddenly quoted; what is it to prove?
Above it is said that the stream-enterer is “of the nature not to fall back,” for four reasons — he does not grow the actions that fall back, he goes counter to the growing of such actions and to their fruits, his strong wholesome roots hold his body down, and both his preparatory practice and his intention are pure; and the last sentence is “those who have actions that will certainly make them fall into the evil destinies cannot so much as raise up receptivity, still less obtain stream-entry.” It is just here that the stanza is quoted as proof: “the sin done by a fool, though small, still makes him fall into the evil; the sin wrought by a wise man, though great, can still be freed from suffering; as a lump of iron, though small, sinks in the water, while iron made into a bowl, though great, can float.” The same iron, in a lump and small, sinks; beaten into a bowl and great, it floats instead — what settles sinking and floating is not the size of the sin but whether the continuum that bears it is foolish or wise. The text before this block reads “hence there is a stanza that says” and not “the stanza says,” and it does not enter the count of the root stanzas, and so this collection marks it as a quoted stanza; the Taishō gives it as a stanza while the Ming edition gives it as prose, which is a difference of format between editions and has been recorded at item three of the apparatus.
At the last the treatise closes with “the limit of suffering.” Asked on what sense the name is established, it answers, “it is established upon there being no further suffering after this present life, in the sense of making the later suffering not continue. Or the limit of suffering is just nirvāṇa.” Asked further how nirvāṇa can be made, it answers, “because the obstruction to its acquisition is removed, the word ‘make’ is used; as when one speaks of making a space, meaning the demolishing of a terrace and tower” — to say “make a space” is not to produce a space, but to pull down what was blocking the place. The last sentence is the fascicle’s close: “those in the other stations also have at most seven returning births, yet not with certainty, and so it is not spoken of.”
The easy error: to read “making the limit of suffering” as producing a thing called nirvāṇa. The treatise uses the simile of “making a space” precisely to block that reading — what is made is the removal of an obstruction, not the producing of a dharma.
In practice: the fascicle begins from the question “the mind having gained concentration, what further is to be cultivated?” and comes to rest at “because the obstruction to its acquisition is removed, the word ‘make’ is used”; the beginning is the start of preparatory practice, the close is the exhaustion of obstruction. Those sixteen moments in between are where the whole weight of the fascicle lies.
Further Resonances: A Mirror of Three Commentaries
The above is the sense of the text of the fascicle itself. Below, a separate section gathers four matters: the adjudications of the three commentaries and their divergences, Saṅghabhadra’s refutations and supplements, the divergences of Paramārtha’s old version, and the coordinates available for reading alongside. A mirror is not the treatise; it is only another way of reading one and the same text; and the accounts are recorded together without adjudication, each returned to its own place.
One. Where the Three Commentaries Diverge
One commentary wholly absent from this fascicle. Shentai’s commentary is a fragment, and of its seven extant fascicles only Fascicle Seventeen touches the Chapter on the Worthy and the Noble; that fascicle marks itself as “the twenty-fifth fascicle of the treatise,” and what it explains is the fourth unit of this chapter (the series on the six kinds of lineage). A mechanical check over the whole range of this fascicle yields zero occurrences, and the want is marked as it stands, the text of another fascicle not being used to fill it out. So the mirror of this fascicle has only three faces and not four.
One and the same outline division, the three houses agreeing wholly while what they fasten to it differs. On the outline of the four foundations of mindfulness the three houses adjudge the twofold division “individual characteristic / common characteristic” word for word, which is the strongest single witness of the ancient masters in this chapter; yet Fabao alone fastens the stanza count upon it (“the first two stanzas explain the foundations of mindfulness on the individual characteristic, the last stanza the foundation of mindfulness on the common characteristic”), while Puguang and Yuanhui give only the names of the divisions. The outline being the same and what is fastened to it differing in detail, both are recorded without adjudication.
The discernment from which the wholesome root of heat arises. Fabao alone marks “this arises from the discernment formed by reflection or the discernment formed by cultivation,” which Puguang and Yuanhui do not give here. This is not a contradiction among the three houses but a further layer supplied by Fabao alone; yet what he supplies borders precisely upon the treatise’s later question of what is “not formed by hearing or reflection” (whence the discernment of this station comes, and to what forming this station itself belongs, being two questions), and the two are worth looking at together.
One variant graph. Yuanhui in the section on the wholesome root of heat writes the graph for “heat” in a variant form, where Puguang and Fabao write the usual form. A variant writing of the graph, not a different sense; recorded as it stands, without adjudication.
In establishing the name of receptivity, each house takes one sense. Puguang takes the opening and closing of the three grades (“receptivity has three grades; the low and the middling are the same as summit, observing the four truths in full and cultivating the sixteen modes of apprehension — this is said in general terms”), Fabao takes the comparison in establishing the name (“the wholesome roots of the former stations can also receive the principle of the four truths; this is the most …” — the former stations too can receive, and this is the most excellent), and Yuanhui takes both senses (“since it receives the four truths and is the most excellent. Again, since there is no retreat …”). What each takes is within the text of the treatise; only the point of view differs.
In explaining the name of the receptivity to the cognition of dharma concerning suffering, the coverage of the three commentaries is unevenly divided. Yuanhui has here the sentence that comes closest to a pure explanation of the name — “as for the receptivity to the cognition of dharma concerning suffering: the dharma of suffering is the dharma of the truth of suffering, and the receptivity takes the dharma of suffering as its object, whence it is named the receptivity to the dharma of suffering”; within the range of this fascicle no independent sentence of pure explanation of the name is found in Puguang, what may be hung upon him being an extension appended to the dispute over “relinquishing ordinary-being status” — “when the highest worldly dharma reaches the station of abiding, the receptivity to the cognition of dharma concerning suffering is at its very moment of arising and, not yet accomplished, he is not called a noble one.” ⇒ For one and the same technical term the coverage of the three commentaries is uneven; recorded as it stands, the text of another section not being used to fill out the want here.
The speaker of the sentence “there is no fault in this either.” This is the place in the fascicle where the marking of speakers most needs care. The treatise’s sentence “there is no fault in this either, as by the shoulder of an enemy one can take the enemy’s life” is, in the momentum of its connection, close to the author speaking for himself; whereas Puguang marks it as “some other master explains: though the highest worldly dharma and ordinary-being status are alike worldly, since their natures are contrary it can relinquish ordinary-being status, and there is no fault in this either.” The two are at variance, and it is recorded without adjudication — it may be that Puguang uses “some other master” as a general designation for the divergent accounts of the Mahāvibhāṣā, and is not setting up a third tenet. The vernacular layer of this fascicle assigns no speaker to this sentence, which runs in the same direction.
In glossing one who follows through faith, Fabao alone divides two layers. Puguang gives “because his practice follows upon faith, he is called following through faith. That person has this following through faith …” and Yuanhui gives “by the dullness or keenness of the faculties these two names are established. He of dull faculties is named one who follows through faith, since in the former time he followed …,” both explaining straight through; whereas Fabao expressly divides two layers — “this explains the name of the practice. ‘He who has this following through faith is called one who follows through faith’ explains the person.” The name of the practice and the name of the person are each a layer, a distinction which among the three commentaries Fabao alone points out; and turning back to the treatise’s two sentences, “is named following through faith” and “is named one who follows through faith,” it is indeed so, the one explaining the dharma and the other the person.
Who the objector concerning an eighth existence is. Puguang marks, “it may be an objection of the Mahīśāsakas, who hold that seven births are taken by men and gods together,” using “it may be” to express his own conjecture and not a definite ascription; and on the answering side he expressly marks “the answer of the Sarvāstivādins.” Fabao sets up no separate label sentence by sentence in this passage. ⇒ As to who the objector is, only Puguang’s conjecture is recorded, and no definite ascription is made on his behalf; the treatise itself does not say who the objector is.
Three places “without an express mark” are not a want of explanation. The supposed objection concerning the uninterrupted and liberation paths of receptivity and cognition, the answering sentence to the question why the seven cognitions too are comprised within the path of seeing, and the second answering sentence in the dispute over an eighth existence — at all three Puguang writes continuously with the text of the treatise and sets up no separate label of question and answer. This is the form of the commentary and not a blank in it; it is of a different nature from Shentai’s “wholly wanting for this fascicle,” and the two may not be listed together.
Two. Saṅghabhadra’s Refutations and Supplementary Explanations
Saṅghabhadra’s two treatises do not name this chapter “Analysis of the Worthy and the Noble”: the Treatise Conforming to Correct Principle has “Adjudication of the Worthy and the Noble, chapter six” and the Treatise Revealing the Doctrine “Adjudication of the Worthy and the Noble, chapter seven” — search the two treatises with the Kośa’s chapter name and one will never find them.
Two word-for-word citations, both on the establishing of names. Within the range of this fascicle the places where Saṅghabhadra says “the Sūtra-master” and reports Vasubandhu word for word are only two in all, and both fall upon the establishing of a technical term. The first is the receptivity to the cognition of dharma concerning suffering: Saṅghabhadra first sets up his own explanation, “it is the counteragent of the obstruction to the arising of that cognition, and so it is further named the receptivity to the cognition of dharma concerning suffering,” then recites Vasubandhu’s explanation, “the Sūtra-master here explains it thus: in order to show that this receptivity is without outflows, its later homogeneous outflow is adduced as its distinguishing mark; since it can produce the cognition of dharma and is the cause of the cognition of dharma, it gets the name receptivity to the cognition of dharma, as a tree is named from its flower and fruit,” and thereupon puts forward his own view. What is at issue is the ground on which the name is established — Saṅghabhadra fastens it to what is counteracted (the counteragent of the obstruction to the arising of that cognition), Vasubandhu to the later homogeneous result (adducing the later homogeneous outflow as a distinguishing mark). The two accounts are recorded together, and neither is judged to prevail.
The second is the uninterrupted and liberation paths: Saṅghabhadra poses the question, “again, on what ground is the counteragent that cuts off called the uninterrupted path, and the cognition arising at the same time as the acquisition of release from bondage called the path of liberation?”, and then recites, “the Sūtra-master explains: because with regard to the acquisition that cuts off the afflictions there is nothing that can block it, it is named the uninterrupted path; because it has been liberated from the acquisition of the afflictions and arises at the same time as the acquisition of release from bondage, it is named the path of liberation.” Here he merely reports and then sets out separately, and this section records only his citing sentence and its location.
An honest negative proposition. In the passage of the Treatise Revealing the Doctrine corresponding to this fascicle the two characters for “the Sūtra-master” have zero occurrences; yet it does have coverage of the same doctrine (technical terms such as the receptivity to the cognition of dharma concerning suffering all occurring there). ⇒ This is a difference of the explicit and the implicit, and one may not infer from it that the Treatise Revealing the Doctrine says nothing on this passage. All that the negative proposition can prove is one thing: that Saṅghabhadra in this passage of the Treatise Revealing the Doctrine did not use the designation “the Sūtra-master” to name Vasubandhu.
The scarcity of debate in this fascicle is itself a fact. Compared with the other units of this chapter, the places in this fascicle where Saṅghabhadra cites word for word are exceedingly few, and there is no direct refutation. What this fascicle treats is the doctrinal laying out of the foundations of mindfulness, the wholesome roots, and the order of the path of seeing, and not a focus of controversy over Sarvāstivāda tenets — this is recorded as it stands, no judgment being made on its behalf as to why.
Three. The Divergences of Paramārtha’s Old Version
Paramārtha’s Expository Treatise on the Treasury of Abhidharma, in the passage corresponding to this fascicle, forms a system of its own: its chapter name is “Analysis of the Persons of the Fruits of the Noble Path, chapter six,” wholly different from Xuanzang’s “Analysis of the Worthy and the Noble, chapter six,” and Paramārtha divides this chapter into three fascicles where Xuanzang divides it into four. In form, Xuanzang gives “the stanza says / the treatise says,” the whole stanza set out first, whereas Paramārtha gives “the verse says / the explanation says,” embedding the explanation line by line — so that Xuanzang’s sixteen blocks of root stanza in this fascicle appear in Paramārtha’s version as a number of short verses scattered about.
The renderings form a system of their own. Foundation of mindfulness becomes station of mindfulness, conjoined becomes associated, object becomes object-field, the wholesome root of heat becomes the practice of warmth, without outflows becomes without flow, the mind gains concentration becomes having already gained concentration. These differences run through the whole passage and are not occasional.
The most concrete set of systematic differences lies in the names of the persons of the path of seeing. At the causal station Xuanzang has “one who follows through faith” and “one who follows the dharma,” Paramārtha “following in accordance with faith” and “following in accordance with the dharma” — the two graphs inverted; at the fruit station Xuanzang has “one resolute through faith,” Paramārtha “one who attains through faith and delight.” And the one name “one attained through view” within the same set is on the contrary wholly the same in the two versions. ⇒ Within a set of four names three differ and one is wholly the same, which is an exception within a systematic difference of rendering, recorded as it stands.
The two closest passages. The first is the simile of splitting wood with a wedge in the establishing of the name foundation of mindfulness: Xuanzang, “the sense is that it is by the sustaining force of mindfulness that discernment gets to proceed, as in splitting wood with an axe the cleft is held by the force of the wedge” ‖ Paramārtha, “because it is established by the force of mindfulness, as in splitting wood the wedge is firmly held” — the simile agreeing word for word. The second is the establishing of the wholesome root of heat: Xuanzang, “it is the forerunner of the fire of the noble path which can burn the firewood of the afflictions” ‖ Paramārtha, “it can burn the firewood of the afflictions, being before the fire of the four noble paths.” At these two places the two versions have hardly any difference of compass.
Instances of differing compass. In the gloss of the wholesome root of summit, Xuanzang sets out the two explanations “as with the crown of a man” and “as with the summit of a mountain” in the very sentence establishing the name, whereas Paramārtha places the glosses in another sentence; in the counteracting of the four inversions, Xuanzang states it directly in prose while Paramārtha gives the verse first and then explains; in the closing sentence of the fascicle, Xuanzang sets out “not with certainty” first and “and so it is not spoken of” after, while Paramārtha’s order of sentences is just the reverse. ⇒ All are differences of order and not of doctrine, and no judgment of merit is made between the two versions.
Four. Coordinates for Reading Alongside
What it joins to before is Unit 1. The first sentence of this fascicle takes over the two gates of entering cultivation word for word — “thus have been explained the two gates of entering cultivation; by these two gates the mind then gains concentration.” The concentration accomplished by the contemplation of impurity and mindfulness of the breath is the footing of the four foundations of mindfulness of this fascicle; between Unit 1 and Unit 2 there is no break, and they are two stretches upon one line.
What it joins to after is Unit 3. This fascicle closes upon “abiding in a fruit and returning at most seven times,” saying expressly “those in the other stations also have at most seven returning births, yet not with certainty, and so it is not spoken of”; and the next fascicle opens at once upon the approaching and the fruit of once-returning after the cutting off of the afflictions abandoned by cultivation — the blank left by the last sentence of this fascicle is precisely where the next begins.
What it joins to crosswise is the Chapter on the Latent Tendencies. The nine grades of fault and virtue used in the first half of Root 35 of this fascicle rest upon the division of the nine grades of afflictions abandoned by cultivation established in the Chapter on the Latent Tendencies; this fascicle says only “as was already analyzed before, the nine grades of difference among the afflictions of the desire realm abandoned by cultivation — so likewise it should be for the higher levels up to the summit of existence,” and does not establish it afresh, taking over the measure of the earlier chapter directly. If in reading this section the division into nine grades seems to come out of nowhere, go back to the Chapter on the Latent Tendencies and its root is found.
What runs lengthwise through the whole chapter is the word “station.” From the first setting foot and the later advancing of heat, to the three grades low, middling, and high of receptivity, to the first fifteen and the sixteenth of the sixteen minds, to abiding in a fruit and approaching — every establishing of a name and every adjudication of persons in this fascicle has its measure in the station and not in the height of an attainment. This is the most portable measure the chapter affords.
As for the coordinates by which this fascicle might be read alongside the Yogācāra line, no word-for-word anchor with adjudicated warrant has been obtained on this occasion; it is left wanting, awaiting supply, and nothing is cited conjecturally from memory.
四向四果·沙門性The Four Approaches and Four Fruits · The Nature of the Ascetic Life
全文五層 →Full five layers →讀這一卷之前
上一卷把預流講完了——見道十五心之後住果,最多七返生死。這一卷一開口就接上去:「已辯住果未斷修惑名為預流,生極七返。今次應辯斷位眾聖,且應建立一來向果。」一句雙套語,前半收前卷,後半開本卷。三家古德在這裡把科判的刀落在同一處,且所標的序號逐一相同——光記標「此下第二明一來向、果」,寶疏標「下一頌,第二明一來向果」,頌疏標「從此第二,明一來向果」。三家獨立分卷而界線與玄奘全合,可見這一刀是論文自己開的口。
這一卷的骨架其實只有兩件事。第一件是刻度:欲界修惑九品,斷三四品是家家,斷到第五仍是一來向,斷第六成一來果,斷七八品是一間,斷第九成不還果;再往上,斷上二界修惑,從初靜慮一品起到有頂八品止都是阿羅漢向,斷有頂第九品的那一剎那名金剛喻定,它的解脫道與漏盡之得俱起,就是盡智,就成阿羅漢。整卷的位次,全是這一根刻度尺上的點。第二件是體:這些果到底是誰的果?論到卷末才回答——是沙門果;而沙門性就是無漏道本身。八十九果體、五因立四果、世道所得亦名沙門果、婆羅門與梵輪法輪、依何界得——這一章是全卷的收束,也是全品果位面的定盤。
中間夾著兩大段最密的長行:一段講七種不還如何開成九種、又如何合成七善士趣(九百二十九字),一段講阿羅漢向與金剛喻定的三說(九百四十四字)。這兩段是本卷的重心所在,讀的時候要慢。
還有一件事先說在前頭。這一卷是全論並錄異說最頻的段落之一,而論主的處理方式並不一律:有的地方錄了就不判(五淨居唯五之由),有的地方錄了立刻駁(中般兼無餘依、有行無行之分由緣有為無為聖道)。讀本卷要先學會分辨這兩種手法,否則會把論主明明駁掉的說法當成他自己的主張。
一、家家:三個條件缺一不可
〔一之一〕什麼是家家。 先問:預流已經住果了,為什麼還有一個新名字?因為他繼續斷惑,位次動了。論給的定義很嚴——「若三緣具轉名家家」:一由斷惑(斷欲界修惑三品或四品),二由成根(得能治彼的無漏根),三由受生(更受欲有三生或二生)。三個條件是連言,不是選言。光記釋此云「若三緣具轉名家家,隨有所闕不名家家」——缺一個就不算。
易誤處:以為斷了三四品就自動叫家家。不是。斷惑只是第一條;還要成就對治那些惑的無漏根,還要生數落在三生二生這一格。落地上:讀本卷凡遇「若三緣具」四字,先數清楚是哪三緣,再看頌文說了幾個、省了幾個——這是全卷反覆用的一個句式。
〔一之二〕頌為什麼只說兩個條件。 先問:既然三緣缺一不可,頌文為什麼只說「斷欲三四品」與「三二生」,把「成根」漏掉?論自己給了答案:「預流果後說進斷惑,成能治彼諸無漏根。義准已成,故不具說。」——說了『預流之後繼續斷惑』,就已經含著『成就了對治之根』,可以推得出來,不必再列。
那為什麼「三二生」反而要說?論也答了:「以有增進,於所受生或少或無或過此故。」修行有進退,生數不定,可能更少、可能一生也不受、可能更多——正因為不定,才要把「三生二生」這一格標死。易誤處:以為頌文的取捨是為了湊字數。不是——能由義理推得的就省,不能推得的就必說,這是本論頌體的一條通則。落地上:往後凡見頌文與長行不齊,先問『省掉的那一項能不能由前文推出來』。
〔一之三〕為什麼沒有『斷五品的家家』。 這是本節最見刀法的一問。論答:「以斷第五必斷第六,非一品惑能障得果,猶如一間未越界故。」斷了第五品的人,必定接著斷第六品,中間不會插進一次死生——因為單獨一品惑沒有力量障住得果這件事。所引的旁證是「一間」:一間那一位剩一品惑而仍不得不還果,是因為那一品一斷就越出欲界了,界之故才成障。
易誤處:把『一品惑不能障得果』當成通則。它不是通則——第六品不能障,第九品能障,差別在「越界」二字。落地上:這裡藏著本卷刻度尺的原理——真正劃線的不是惑的品數,是界的邊。凡遇『為什麼這裡不立一個位次』,先問『這一步跨過界沒有』。
〔一之四〕天家家與人家家。 論把家家再分兩種:「一天家家,謂欲天趣生三二家而證圓寂,或一天處或二或三」;人家家同理,或一洲或二或三。先問:「家」在這裡是什麼意思?是受生之處的一「戶」——天上受三家二家之生,或人間受三家二家之生。所以「三二家」與「三二生」是同一件事的兩種說法。
光記於論文之外補了一層:「應知天家家者人中得道,人家家者天中得道」——名字所標的是他受生之處,而得道之處恰在另一趣。易誤處:把「天家家」讀成『在天上得道的人』。落地上:法數之名往往標的是果報處而不是修行處,讀時要問一句『這個名是就哪一頭立的』。
〔一之五〕一來向與一來果。 論接著把刻度補齊:斷欲界修惑一品乃至五品,都名一來果向;斷第六品,成一來果——「彼往天上一來人間而般涅槃名一來果,過此以後更無生故」。所以「一來」二字不是含糊的形容,是實指一次往返。論還給了一個異名:「此或名曰薄貪瞋癡,唯餘下品貪瞋癡故。」
先問:為什麼叫「薄」而不叫「斷」?因為九品中只斷了前六品,剩下的三品是下品,所以說薄。易誤處:把薄貪瞋癡當成另一個果位。它就是一來果的異名。落地上:本論常給同一位次兩個名——一個就生數立(一來),一個就惑相立(薄貪瞋癡);兩名並看,位次的內外相就都清楚了。
二、一間:不還向
〔二之一〕一間的三緣。 結構與家家全同:「即一來者進斷餘惑,若三緣具轉名一間」——斷惑(七品或八品)、成根、受生(更受欲有餘一生)。頌文同樣只說第一與第三,「不說成根,義如前釋」。先問:為什麼論要把同一套結構再走一遍?因為位次雖進,法度不變——這正是本論建位次的一貫手法。寶疏於此云「三緣具者名為一間,若闕一、二、三皆非一間」,與光記釋家家之語同一口徑。
易誤處:以為一間是一個新的果。它是不還果之向。落地上:向與果的分界永遠在『那一品斷了沒有』——斷第九品前都是向,斷了就是果。
〔二之二〕一品惑何以能障不還果。 論自設一問:「如何一品惑障得不還果?」答:「由彼若斷便越界故。」並引前文之例:「前說三時業極為障,應知煩惱亦與業同,越彼等流異熟地故。」寶疏為此補一句釋,說這是「不同一來一品不障」,並以業品「三時極障」為喻——同樣是最後一步,因為它跨界,所以獨重。
先問:這與〔一之三〕的『一品惑不能障得果』豈不矛盾?不矛盾——那裡說的是第六品(不越界),這裡說的是第九品(越界)。同一句話在不同的刻度上,判然兩義。 易誤處:把兩處的「一品惑」讀成同一件事。落地上:讀阿毘達磨要養成一個習慣——同樣的詞出現兩次,先確認它掛在哪一個位次上。
〔二之三〕『間』字的訓。 論自訓其名:「間謂間隔,彼餘一生為間隔故,不證圓寂。或餘一品欲修所斷惑為間隔故,不得不還果。」——「間」是隔,所隔的可以就生說(還剩一生),也可以就惑說(還剩一品)。有這一重隔的,名為一間。
先問:兩個講法哪個對?論並列而不擇,因為所指是同一件事的兩面。易誤處:以為訓詁只有一個標準答案。落地上:本論訓名常兼取「時」與「法」兩頭,讀到「或……或……」不必急著選邊。
〔二之四〕先斷後入見諦的那一種人。 論補了一條例外:「先斷三四七八品惑入見諦者,後得果時乃至未修後勝果道,仍不名曰家家一間,未成治彼無漏根故。」先問:他惑也斷了、生數也合,為什麼還不算?因為三緣缺了第二條——他那些惑是在異生位用世俗道斷的,還沒有成就對治它們的無漏根。
易誤處:以為家家、一間只看斷了幾品。落地上:這一條正是「成根」一緣不可省的證據——它平時被頌文省略,卻在這裡獨力劃出界線。凡覺得某一條件是贅語,找一找它在哪個邊界案例上發揮作用。
〔二之五〕不還果與五下結斷。 「若斷第九成不還果,必不還來生欲界故。此或名曰五下結斷。」論隨即補一句誠實話:「雖必先斷或二或三,然於此時總集斷故。」先問:五下分結明明是陸續斷的,為什麼到這裡才叫「五下結斷」?因為到這一刻才總集起來算作斷盡。易誤處:以為五結是這一剎那一起斷的。落地上:「總集斷」是本卷的一個關鍵記帳法,到卷末講五因立四果時還要再用一次(「三總集斷,謂總一得得諸斷故」)——同一個記帳法,前後呼應。
三、七種不還(長行專段之一)
〔三之一〕七種是怎麼數出來的。 論一開口就給總數與分法:「此不還者總說有七,且行色界差別有五:一中般涅槃、二生般涅槃、三有行般涅槃、四無行般涅槃、五者上流。」行色界五種,加行無色四種(合為一類),加現般涅槃一種——五加一加一,成七。
先問:為什麼「行無色者差別有四」卻只算一種?因為那四種是依「生般涅槃」的差別而分的,性質同屬一類。易誤處:把七與九、與四混算成一堆。落地上:本節有三個數(七、九、四),各有各的分法——七是總門,九是行色界的細分,四是行無色的細分;先把三個數各自的分母認清,這一段就不會亂。
〔三之二〕五個名字都是怎麼得來的。 論逐一釋名:中間般涅槃故名中般;生已般涅槃故名生般;由有行、由無行般涅槃故名有行般、無行般;上流故名上流。再逐一給實義:「言中般者,謂往色界住中有位便般涅槃」;「言生般者,謂往色界生已不久便般涅槃,以具勤修速進道故」;「有行般者,謂往色界生已,長時加行不息,由多功用方般涅槃」;「無行般者,謂往色界生已經久,加行懈息不多功用便般涅槃」。
先問:有行與無行差在哪?差在「速進道」的有無——有行是有勤修而無速進,無行是缺勤修而有速進。易誤處:望文生義,以為「有行」是有修行、「無行」是不修行。兩者都是聖者,都必般涅槃,差的只是道之利鈍與功用之多寡。落地上:凡遇一組對舉之名,先找論文給的判準句(這裡是「有速進道、無速進道」),不要靠字面。
〔三之三〕中般所說的涅槃是哪一種。 論插入一組並錄與駁:「此中所說般涅槃者,謂有餘依。有餘師說:亦無餘依。此不應理,彼於捨壽無自在故。」先問:論主憑什麼駁?憑『捨壽不自在』——中有位上的那一位,還做不到自主捨壽,所以不能說他入無餘依。
易誤處:把這一段當成『並錄不判』。它不是——論主錄了反方隨即不許,已經結案。落地上:本卷判斷論主是否結案的標誌很清楚——「此不應理」「此說非理」之後,就不是待決之案了。
〔三之四〕有行無行的先後,與一場被駁掉的解釋。 論再錄一說並駁:「有說:此二有差別者,由緣有為無為聖道,如其次第得涅槃故。此說非理,太過失故。」——有人主張兩者的差別在所緣是有為道還是無為道;論主判為過失太大。
隨後論給出自己認可的次第之理:「然契經中先說無行、後說有行般涅槃者,如是次第與理相應」——因為不必用功用而成辦的,比要用功用才成辦的順當,所以經先說無行。先問:論主為什麼要特地為經文的次第作解?因為有人會問『既然有行在名相上像是更精進,為什麼經反把它排在後面』。易誤處:以為經的次第是隨手排的。落地上:本論解經次第的通則是『就道之利說,不就相之勤說』——這一條在本卷末講法輪五相時還要用。此段之跨帙交涉(眾賢反評論主之駁語)見承衍節。
〔三之五〕上流:向上走的那一位。 論訓其名:「言上流者是上行義,以流與行其義一故。」實義是:從欲界歿往色界生,卻不能就在那裡證圓寂,一定要輾轉往上才般涅槃。再分二類:「即此上流差別有二,由因及果有差別故」——就因說,是靜慮有沒有雜修;就果說,是以色究竟天還是有頂天為極處。
先問:因與果為什麼恰好對應?因為雜修第四靜慮者能生淨居,故極處在色究竟;不雜修者只能味著諸定而上,故極處在有頂。易誤處:以為上流是一種人。它是兩條路。落地上:「由因及果有差別」是本論分類的標準句式——先看修因,再看生果,兩頭一對,類自然分。
〔三之六〕全超、半超、遍歿。 論逐一釋:全超者在欲界已具雜修四靜慮,退失上三靜慮,以初靜慮愛味為緣而生梵眾天;憑先世串習之力又能雜修第四靜慮,從那裡歿就生色究竟——「最初處歿生最後天,頓越中間是全超義」。半超者從梵眾漸次生下淨居,中間能越一處而生色究竟,「超非全故名為半超」。遍歿者「從彼漸次於一切處皆遍受生,最後方能生色究竟,一切處死故名遍歿」。
論在半超條下順帶插一句:「聖必不生大梵天處,僻見處故、一導師故。」光記為此申其所以,云「聖必不生大梵天處,是起戒禁僻見處故。自謂究竟一道師故」。先問:三種的差別在哪?在『越過幾處』——全超越十四處,半超越一處以上而未全,遍歿一處不越。易誤處:把「遍歿」讀成死得多。「歿」在這裡是受生後命終,遍歿即處處都受過一生。 落地上:三名各扣一個動作(頓越、部分越、不越),記動作比記名快。
〔三之七〕不還者不重生曾生處。 論立一條硬規則:「無不還者,於已生處受第二生,由彼於生容求勝進,非等劣故。」並自釋其所以:「即由此故不還義滿,必不還生曾生處故。尚不生本處,況有生於下。」先問:這條規則與「不還」之名有什麼關係?有直接關係——不還之名本就從『不還生下』立,論在這裡把它推到極處:連同一處都不重生,何況更下。
易誤處:以為「不還」只是不還欲界。落地上:一個法數之名,論往往在後文把它的外延推到盡頭;讀到「尚不……況有……」這種句式,就是在推極限。
〔三之八〕不雜修的那一條上流路。 論接著釋第二類:「餘於靜慮無雜修者能往有頂方般涅槃」——他先無雜修,由味著諸定為緣,遍生色界諸處而獨不能往五淨居天;色界命終後於三無色次第生已,最後生有頂才般涅槃。論再給一句總判:「二上流中前是觀行、後是止行,樂慧樂定有差別故。」
先問:為什麼不雜修的就上不了淨居?因為淨居正是雜修五品所感(下一節即說)。易誤處:以為兩條路只是快慢之別。是性質之別——一個樂慧走觀行,一個樂定走止行。 落地上:這一句「樂慧樂定」是全卷少見的性格判語,它解釋了為什麼同是不還,去處會南轅北轍。
〔三之九〕為什麼說『以色究竟與有頂為極處』。 論自設一難:兩類上流在下地就得般涅槃也不違理,那為什麼說他們以那兩處為極?答:「由此過彼無行處故,如預流者極七返生。」先問:這個比喻在說什麼?在說「極」是上限而不是必到——預流最多七返,不是一定要七返。易誤處:把「極處」讀成『必到之處』。落地上:本論凡言「極」,一律是上限義,這一條在讀壽量、讀生數時通用。
〔三之十〕行無色四種與現般涅槃。 論收束七種:「行無色者差別有四,謂在欲界離色界貪,從此命終生於無色……由生般涅槃有差別故,此并前五成六不還。復有不行色無色界,即住於此能般涅槃,名現般涅槃,并前六為七。」先問:現般涅槃為什麼也算不還?因為他已斷五下結而不生欲界,只是連色無色也不去,就在此身般涅槃。易誤處:以為「不還」必定要往上生。落地上:七種之中最後這一種,正說明「不還」定義的正面是『不再來』,不是『必上去』。
四、九種:三種各分三種
〔四之一〕九是怎麼開出來的。 論答得極簡:「即行色界五種不還總立為三,各分三種故成九種。」三是中般、生般、上流;有行般與無行般都收進生般裡(下文自說「此皆生已得般涅槃,是故並應名為生般」)。先問:五怎麼會變成三?因為換了一個分母——七與五是就『般涅槃之處與方式』分,三是就「時位」分。
易誤處:以為九是五加四或別的加法。落地上:凡見同一組法忽然換了個數目,先問『分母換了沒有』。
〔四之二〕分三所依的三個速度。 論給出分法:中般分三,是「速、非速、經久得般涅槃,由三火星喻所顯故」;生般分三,是連有行、無行算在一起;上流分三,是超、半超等有差別。而三組一律「皆由速、非速、經久得般涅槃故,更互相望無雜亂失」。
先問:為什麼要強調「無雜亂失」?因為三組用的是同一把尺(快慢),若不聲明,讀者會疑心中般之「速」與上流之「超」是兩回事。易誤處:把三火星喻當作只屬中般的裝飾。它是全節的量尺。 落地上:論文於此只說「由三火星喻所顯」而不出喻之詳,這一節可與瑜伽行系之逐一舉喻對讀,見承衍節。
〔四之三〕業、惑、根三門。 論給出三分的因:「由業惑根有差別故,有速、非速、經久不同。」再逐門配:就業說,是造增長「順起」「順生」「順後」三業之別;就惑說,是下中上品煩惱現行之別;就根說,是上中下根之別。最後細分:「謂初二三由惑根別各成三種,非由業異;後三亦由順後受業有差別故分成三種。」
先問:為什麼中般與生般不由業分?因為那兩類的生處已定,差別落在惑與根上;唯有上流要輾轉多生,才由順後受業分。易誤處:以為三門平均分配到九種。不是——前六由惑根,後三兼由業。 落地上:這是本卷最見分寸的一段——同一組因,在不同的類上權重不同;讀法數的因門,要逐類看它實際起了多少作用。
五、七善士趣:九為什麼只說七
〔五之一〕論主自設的第一問。 論自問:「若爾,何故諸契經中,佛唯說有七善士趣?」自答:「中、生各三,上流為一,經依此立七善士趣。有上流法故名上流,由此義同且立為一。」——中般三、生般三、上流一,合七。上流雖有三種,因為都有「上流」這個法,義同,姑且合為一。光記於此明標為論主自設問答,並釋其為「釋上兩句」。
先問:為什麼偏偏上流可以合、中生不可以合?因為中般三種與生般三種在「處」與「時」上實有分位之異,而上流三種同是一路向上,義同。易誤處:以為七與九有一個對錯。兩個數各有分母:九是就業惑根細分,七是就善士之義立名。 落地上:一法多數,先問『這個數是用來作什麼的』。
〔五之二〕第二問:為什麼只有這七種算善士。 論再自問:「何獨依此立善士趣,不依所餘有學聖者?」答:「趣是行義,所餘有學皆行善業無差別故。唯此七種皆行善業不行惡業,餘則不然。又唯七種行往上界不復還來,餘則不爾。」
先問:既然其餘有學也行善,為什麼不算?因為「行善」不足以揀別,要『行善且不行惡』,再加『往而不還』,兩條合起來才是這七種的獨有相。易誤處:以為「善士」是褒貶之詞。它是一個界定嚴密的法數名,兩個判準缺一不可。落地上:凡遇一個看似平常的名相被立為法數,先找論給的揀別條件——通常不止一條。
〔五之三〕第三問:經裡另有一個『善士』的定義怎麼辦。 論自舉一難:契經說「云何善士?謂若成就有學正見」——照這個說法,一切有學都是善士了。論答得很細:其餘有學若「就異門」說,也可以說有善士之性,因為他們對五種惡已得畢竟不作的律儀,不善煩惱也多已斷;但是「立善士趣不就異門,約唯行善不行惡故,唯託勝因往上界故」。
先問:這是不是自相矛盾?不是——同一個詞在兩個門下有寬狹二義:就「性」說寬,一切有學可稱;就「趣」立名說狹,唯此七種。易誤處:見經論用詞不齊就急著調和或判優劣。落地上:本論處理經文不齊的標準手法是「分門」——先問『這句是就哪一門說的』,多數不齊當下就解。此段之三疏標法互異見承衍節。
六、經生的聖者:不往餘界·不練根·不退
〔六之一〕已在欲界受過生的聖者。 論立:「若在聖位經欲界生,必不往生色無色界,由彼證得不還果已,定於現身般涅槃故。」——他若進到不還,就必在現身了結,不會再往上界受生。至於色界經生的聖者,「容有上生無色界義,如行色界極有頂者」。
先問:欲界與色界的經生聖者為什麼待遇不同?因為欲界經生者道已極熟,一得不還就現身般涅槃;色界經生者本就在上流的路上。易誤處:把「經生」當成一種果位。它是一種履歷——曾經受過生的聖者。落地上:本節所立的一切限制,都繫在這一句履歷上。
〔六之二〕天帝釋那句話怎麼講。 論引一則經證之疑:「然天帝釋作如是言:曾聞有天名色究竟,我後退落當生於彼。」帝釋既已得預流,怎麼會說自己將生色究竟?論引釋通者作答:「毘婆沙師作如是釋:彼由不了對法相故、為令喜故,佛亦不遮。」
光記於此補出論文所未詳的因緣,說帝釋是五衰相現而來歸世尊,佛為說法而得預流果,其後才有這番發願之語。先問:佛既知其誤,為何不遮?答有二層:帝釋不了達對法之相,且遮之無益而令其不喜。易誤處:以為佛不遮就是默許其說為正。不遮是應機,不是印可。 落地上:讀經中人物之語,先問『這句是佛說,還是經中人說而佛未遮』——二者分量不同。
〔六之三〕不許練根與退。 論自問自答:「何緣不許經欲界生及上生聖者有練根并退?以必無故。何緣必無?經生習根極成熟故,及得殊勝所依止故。」
先問:「以必無故」不是同語反覆嗎?不是——論隨即追問「何緣必無」,給出兩個實因:根已極熟、依止已勝。易誤處:以為前一答是搪塞。論的問答常是兩級:先斷事實,再出理由。 落地上:遇到看似循環的答語,往下讀一句,理由多半就在後面。
〔六之四〕為什麼有學未離欲就沒有中般。 論再自問自答:「何緣有學未離欲貪無中有中般涅槃者?以彼聖道未淳熟故、未易能令現在前故、所有隨眠非極劣故。」隨後論文自標第二重釋通:「毘婆沙者作如是釋:諸欲界法極難越故、彼尚有餘多所作故」——所餘之事有三:應進斷不善與無記二煩惱、應進得第二第三沙門果、應總越三界之法;而「住中有位無如是能」。
先問:兩重解釋衝突嗎?不衝突——前一重就道與惑說,後一重就所剩之事說,一內一外。易誤處:把第二重當成疏家所加。它是論文本身明標的第二重釋,非後人所補。落地上:本論長行常先出自解、再引本宗之師補釋,二者並存即是完整答案。
七、雜修靜慮
〔七之一〕先修哪一個。 論答:「諸欲雜修四靜慮者,必先雜修第四靜慮,以彼等持最堪能故、諸樂行中彼最勝故。」先問:為什麼不從初靜慮起?因為第四靜慮的等持最堪任,又是諸樂行中最勝。易誤處:以為修學一律由淺入深。這裡恰是先取最勝者為門。 落地上:凡遇次第與常識相反處,論必給理由——找那個「以……故」。
〔七之二〕怎樣算修成。 論給出一個極細的剎那次第:先入第四靜慮,多念無漏相續現前,引生多念有漏,再多念無漏;如是旋還而後後漸減,到最後二念無漏、二念有漏、二念無漏,名「雜修定加行成滿」;再減到一念無漏、一念有漏、一念無漏,「如是有漏中間剎那前後剎那無漏雜故,名雜修定根本圓成」。論還配了一個對應:「前二剎那似無間道,第三剎那似解脫道。」
先問:加行成滿與根本圓成差在哪?差在中間有漏是二念還是一念——減到一念,才叫圓成。易誤處:以為「雜修」是把有漏無漏混在一起修。不是——是無漏、有漏、無漏三心相次現前,以無漏夾住有漏。落地上:這一段是全卷唯一逐剎那描述修相的文字,讀時把『三、六、九、十二、十五』那組數字(見下節)一併記住,兩節本是一事。
〔七之三〕為什麼要雜修。 論列三緣:「一為受生、二為現樂、三為遮止起煩惱退。」再逐位配:不還之中利根者為現法樂及生淨居,鈍根者兼為遮退(「彼畏退故」);阿羅漢之中利根者為現法樂,鈍根者兼為遮防起煩惱退。論還補一句所以:「如是雜修令味相應等持遠故」——雜修能把味著之定推遠。
先問:同一件事為什麼利鈍所為不同?因為鈍根有退的可能,多一層防護的需要。易誤處:以為三緣人人具足。是隨位隨根而取。 落地上:本論凡列數緣,往往接著分配到人,這一步不可略過——緣是總說,分配才是實義。
八、五淨居唯五
〔八之一〕五品雜修感五淨居。 論答:「由雜熏修第四靜慮有五品故,淨居唯五。」五品是「下、中、上上、勝上、極品」;其心數是三、六、九、十二、十五——「此中初品,三心現前便得成滿,謂初無漏,次起有漏,後起無漏。第二品六,第三品九,第四品十二,第五品十五。」論再補一句機理:「應知此中無漏勢力熏修有漏令感淨居。」
先問:為什麼是三的倍數?因為一組雜修的最小單位就是三心(無漏、有漏、無漏),五品即一組到五組。易誤處:把五品當成五種不同的定。是同一種定的五個熏修分量。 落地上:五品與五處一一相感,是本論『因量決定果處』的一個乾淨樣本——數目對得上,義理才立得住。
〔八之二〕另一家的說法。 論末錄一說:「有餘師言:由信等五次第增上感五淨居。」——由信、進、念、定、慧五根依次增上,感得五個淨居。先問:論主取哪一個?論文並列而未加駁。易誤處:見有二說就推定後說被否。本卷判斷是否被否,看有沒有「此不應理」一類的判語;這裡沒有。落地上:與〔三之三〕〔三之四〕兩處對照著讀,論主的兩種手法(並錄/立駁)就一目了然了。
九、身證
〔九之一〕身證之名怎麼立。 論答:「有滅定得名得滅定,即不還者若於身中有滅定得轉名身證。謂不還者由身證得似涅槃法故名身證。」先問:什麼叫「滅定得」?是「得」這個法——得到滅盡定的那一個得。有這個得,就名得滅定。
易誤處:以為身證是另一個果位。它是不還果上的一個異名,因得滅定而轉稱。落地上:本論立名的常法是『於某位上得某法,即於彼位轉一名』——家家、一間、薄貪瞋癡、五下結斷、身證,全是同一種造名法。
〔九之二〕為什麼叫『身』證。 論自設問:「如何說彼但名身證?」自答:「以心無故、依身生故。」——滅盡定是無心之定,證它的時候心已不行,所存者唯身,故就身立名。光記於此明標「問」字,而以「以心無故、依身生故」為論主自答。
論主隨後又出一解:「理實應言,彼從滅定起,得先未得,有識身寂靜,便作是思:此滅盡定最為寂靜、極似涅槃。如是證得身之寂靜,故名身證。由得及智現前證得身寂靜故。」先問:兩解差在哪?前解就定中無心說,後解就出定後之所得與所思說。易誤處:以為後解否定前解。是「理實應言」——更精確的一層說法。 落地上:凡見「理實應言」四字,那是論主自出的定說,分量重於前文的通釋。此解引起的跨帙對辯見承衍節。
〔九之三〕十八有學為什麼不列身證。 論自問自答:「契經說有十八有學。何緣於中不說身證?依因無故。」再自釋「依因」:「謂諸無漏三學及果,依彼差別立有學故。滅定非學亦非學果,故不約成彼說有學差別。」
先問:這個理由的骨頭在哪?在『有學之差別是依三學及其果立的』——滅盡定既非學、亦非學果,就不在這張名單的分類軸上。易誤處:以為身證不入十八有學是因為位次不夠。不是位次問題,是分類軸問題。 落地上:一個法之所以不入某張表,往往不是因為它劣,而是因為它不在那張表的分母裡——這是讀一切法數表的通則。
〔九之四〕細分成一萬二千九百六十。 論順勢把不還的細相推到極處:就根成三、就地成四、就種性成六、就處成十六、就地離染成三十六;四門合建(處、種性、離染、根),則六乘九得五十四,十六乘五十四得八百六十四,再乘三倍得二千五百九十二;五種合計,「積數合成一萬二千九百六十」。論還補一個記帳約定:「諸離下地九品染者,即說名為上地具縛,為成一一地離染數等故。」
先問:算這麼細有什麼用?用在顯『麁相如是,細分無盡』——位次是可以無限細分的,而修證之實不在數上。易誤處:陷進算式而忘了論說這段的緣起(「不還差別麁相如是,若細分析數成多千」)。落地上:驗算之法就在論文自身——五十四乘十六得八百六十四,再乘三得二千五百九十二,二千五百九十二乘五得一萬二千九百六十;首尾一扣,數就不會記錯。
十、阿羅漢向與金剛喻定(長行專段之二)
〔十之一〕阿羅漢向的起訖。 論立:「即不還者進斷色界及無色界修所斷惑,從斷初定一品為初,至斷有頂八品為後,應知轉名阿羅漢向。」先問:為什麼止於有頂第八品?因為第九品之斷屬於果,不屬於向。頌疏於此云「得不還者,從斷初定一品為初,至斷有頂八品為後,名阿羅漢向,趣阿羅漢果故」,與論文全合。
易誤處:以為上二界修惑也像欲界那樣分成幾個果位。上二界只有一個向、一個果,中間不再立位。落地上:欲界九品分出兩果一向,上二界七十二品只成一向一果——位次的密疏,繫於界之要害而不繫於惑之多寡。
〔十之二〕金剛喻定為什麼獨得此名。 論答:「斷有頂惑第九無間道亦說名為金剛喻定,一切隨眠皆能破故、先已破故。」隨即補一句最要緊的限定:「不破一切實有,能破一切功能。」——不是說它實際破盡了一切(前面的惑早已破過),是說它有能破一切的功能。再給一句比較:「諸能斷惑無間道中,此定相應最為勝故。」
光記釋此云「金剛喻定。如世金剛能破一切、此定亦爾、能破一切惑。故」。先問:那句限定為什麼要緊?因為若不加,就成了『到最後一剎那才把一切惑一齊破掉』,與前面的次第斷惑相違。易誤處:正是把它讀成一次破盡。落地上:譬喻永遠有其所取之分——取的是「能破」之功能,不是「已破」之事實;讀一切譬喻先問『所取者何分』。
〔十之三〕智行緣別的第一說:五十二。 論列第一說:金剛喻定通依九地,就智、行相、所緣之別,未至地攝有五十二。其算法是:苦類智、集類智緣有頂苦集各四行相,得八;滅法智、道法智各四行相,得八;滅類智緣八地之滅各四行相,得三十二;道類智緣八地之道總四行相,得四——八加八加三十二加四,正得五十二。論並釋末一項之所以:「以治八地類智品道同類相因必總緣故。」再列他地之數:中間靜慮與四靜慮同五十二,空處二十八,識處二十四,無所有處二十——因為無色無法智,也無緣下地之滅類智。
先問:為什麼無色三地遞減?因為所緣之地愈上愈少。易誤處:把五十二當成一個要背的數。它是一組可以逐項驗算的和。 落地上:本論凡出大數,多半可分項復算——先分項,再加總,數就活了。
〔十之四〕第二說與第三說。 第二說:道類智緣八地之道也各別有四行相,比第一說增二十八,故未至地攝八十種;他地依例遞推(空處四十、識處三十二、無所有處二十四)。第三說:滅類智緣八地之滅有別緣與總緣,各四行相,比第一說增一百一十二,故未至地攝一百六十四;他地依例(空處五十二、識處三十六、無所有處二十四)。論末以一句收之:「若就種性根等分別,更成多種,如理應思。」
先問:三說差在哪一處?全差在「別緣」與「總緣」的取捨——第一說道類智唯總緣,第二說改為別緣,第三說滅類智兼取別總。易誤處:把三說當成三種不同的定。是同一定的三種計數法。 落地上:增數是可驗的——八十減五十二得二十八,一百六十四減五十二得一百一十二,論文自己標出這兩個增數,正是它留給讀者的驗算鑰匙。光記標此段為「總有三說」而列而不裁,寶疏則另有裁向,見承衍節。
〔十之五〕盡智與無學之成。 論接:「此定既能斷有頂地第九品惑,能引此惑盡得俱行盡智令起。」再定其位:「金剛喻定是斷惑中最後無間道所生,盡智是斷惑中最後解脫道,由此解脫道與諸漏盡得最初俱生故名盡智。」盡智一生,「便成無學阿羅漢果」。
先問:金剛喻定與盡智是一是二?是二——一是無間道,一是解脫道,前後相次。易誤處:把兩者混作一事。落地上:無間道斷、解脫道證,這一對在本論通用;本卷末講沙門果八十九時還要用同一對來分性與果。
〔十之六〕『無學』與『阿羅漢』二名之由。 論釋無學:「為得別果所應修學,此無有故,得無學名。」釋阿羅漢:「即此唯應作他事故、諸有染者所應供故,依此義立阿羅漢名。」先問:兩名各就哪一頭立?無學就『無所更學』立,阿羅漢就『應作他事、應受供養』立——一遮一表。易誤處:以為兩名同義重出。落地上:本論立名常成對——一個遮其所無,一個表其所有,兩名並讀,位次的全貌才出來。
〔十之七〕有學之名與異生之揀。 論自問:「前來所辯四向三果皆名有學,何緣前七得有學名?」答:「為得漏盡,常樂學故。」學要有三:增上戒、增上心、增上慧,以戒定慧為體。有人難:異生也該名有學。論答:「不爾,未如實見知諦理故、彼容後時失正學故」,並引佛語「學所應學、學所應學,我唯說此名有學者」以明善逝重說「學」字之意,是為顯「學正所學無有退失」。
先問:異生所缺的是什麼?兩件——未如實見諦,且可能失去正學。易誤處:以為凡在修學的都算有學。「有學」是見諦以上的位名。 落地上:經文重字之處往往有義,本論解經常從重字入手;這是一個乾淨的樣本。
〔十之八〕住本性時何以仍名有學。 論再自問:「聖者住本性,如何名有學?」答:「學意未滿故。如行者暫息,或學法得常隨逐故。」並界定學法與無學法:「學法云何?謂有學者無漏有為法。無學法云何?謂無學者無漏有為法。」
先問:不在用功時算不算學?算——因為學的意願未滿,且學法之得恆隨。易誤處:把「學」等同於現前的加行。落地上:位次繫於「得」與「意」,不繫於當下有沒有在用功——這一條在讀本論一切位名時通用。
〔十之九〕涅槃為何不名學亦不名無學。 論兩問兩答:不名學,「無學異生亦成就故」;不名無學,「有學異生亦成就故」。先問:這兩個理由為什麼形式相同?因為「學」「無學」是就人立的名,而涅槃三種人都成就,所以兩邊都掛不上。易誤處:以為涅槃因為太高而不入位。是因為它不揀人,所以不入以人為軸的分類。 落地上:又一次證明——一個法不入某表,是分母的問題(與〔九之三〕同一道理)。
〔十之十〕八聖與五事。 論收束:「如是有學及無學者,總成八聖補特伽羅,行向住果各有四故。」但隨即校正:「名雖有八事唯有五,謂住四果及初果向,以後三果向不離前果故。」並註明適用範圍:「此依漸次得果者說。若倍離欲、全離欲者住見道中,名為一來、不還果向,非前果攝。」
先問:八與五哪個是實?名有八、事有五——因為後三果之向就是前一果之人,不另成一事。易誤處:以為八與五矛盾。名與事兩軸,各有各的數。 落地上:本論常在給出一個整齊的數後立刻校正其實數,讀時要把「名/事」「總/別」兩層分開記。
十一、由何道離何地染
〔十一之一〕有頂唯由無漏離。 論立:「唯無漏道離有頂染,非有漏道。」三個理由:「此上更無世俗道故、自地不能治自地故、自地煩惱所隨增故。」再抽出一條通則:「若彼煩惱於此隨增,此必不能治彼煩惱。若此力能對治於彼,則彼於此必不隨增,故自地道不治自地。」至於餘八地,「通由二道,世出世道俱能離故」。
先問:三個理由是三件事還是一件事?前一個是事實(有頂之上無世俗道可借),後兩個是同一條原理的正反兩面。易誤處:把『自地不治自地』當成一句口號。它有明確的機制——隨增。 落地上:本論凡出通則,多半緊接著給正反二式(「若……則……;若……則……」),這一對句式就是它的證明格式。
〔十一之二〕離繫得有幾種。 論立:「諸有學聖用有漏道離下八地修斷染時,能具引生二離繫得。用無漏道離彼亦然,由二種道同所作故。」
論隨即錄一家異解並駁之。有餘師以「有捨無漏得,煩惱不成故」為證,說無漏道離染時也必生有漏離繫得——否則轉根時頓捨鈍聖道,上惑之離繫應皆不成,就要重成煩惱。論主判曰:「此證非理。」理由是:那位聖者縱使沒有有漏斷得,也不會成就上地煩惱——並舉二例,一是分離有頂而轉根時,二是異生上生時不成下惑。
先問:論主與有餘師的結論相同嗎?相同——都許二離繫得;所爭的是『用什麼來證』。易誤處:以為論主否定了「二得」。他否定的是那個證法,不是那個結論。 落地上:論爭之中,結論同而論證異的情形極多;讀時先問『所爭者是宗還是因』。
〔十一之三〕義准而得的兩條。 論以「義准」補足全表:異生用有漏道唯引有漏斷得;聖者用無漏道離見所斷惑及有頂修惑時,唯引無漏斷得。先問:這兩條為什麼不必另立正文?因為由前文的判準可以推出。易誤處:把「義准」之文當成次要。它是表的補格,缺了表就不完整。 落地上:讀本論凡見「義准已成」「義准自成」,要主動把那一格補進表裡。
〔十一之四〕哪一地之道離哪一地之染。 論立:無漏道若未至攝,「能離欲界乃至有頂」;靜慮中間、四靜慮、三無色所攝的,「隨其所應各能離自及上地染。不離下,已離故」。有漏道則「一切唯能離次下地,非自地等」,三個理由:自地煩惱所隨增、勢劣、(上地)已離。
先問:未至定為什麼獨能通離一切地?因為它是最下的無漏依地,上無所礙。易誤處:以為越高的定能離越多的染。恰恰相反——愈上者所能離愈少,因為下地已離。 落地上:這一節與〔十一之一〕合看,全論的離染表就齊了:縱軸是能依之地,橫軸是所離之地,有漏只能往下一格,無漏可以通貫。
〔十一之五〕解脫道是不是也在近分。 論自問自答:無間道皆近分攝,解脫道則不然。「諸道所依近分有八,謂四靜慮、無色下邊。所離有九,謂欲、八定。初三近分離下三染,第九解脫現在前時,或入根本或即近分。上五近分各離下染,第九解脫現在前時,必入根本非即近分。」
理由極細:「近分根本等捨根故、下三靜慮近分根本受根異故。」——上五地的近分與根本同是捨受,故必入根本;下三靜慮的近分是捨受而根本是喜樂受,受既不同,轉入有難,故容許停在近分。論還補兩句:「有不能入,轉入異受少艱難故、離下染時必欣上故」,「若受無異,必入根本」。
先問:分界為什麼恰在下三與上五之間?就因為受根同異。易誤處:以為這是一條約定。它有實因——受之異同。 落地上:凡遇一條看似武斷的分界線,找論給的那個「故」字;本論的分界幾乎沒有無因者。
〔十一之六〕世俗道緣什麼、作什麼行相。 論立:「世俗無間及解脫道,如次能緣下地上地,為麁苦障及靜妙離。」無間道緣自次下地諸有漏法,作麁、苦、障三行相之隨一;解脫道緣次上地諸有漏法,作靜、妙、離三行相之隨一。三名各有訓:「非寂靜故說名為麁」;「由大劬勞方能越故、非美妙故。說名為苦,由多麁重能違害故」;「非出離故。說名為障,由此能礙越自地故,如獄厚壁能障出離」。靜妙離三者「翻此應釋」。
先問:為什麼無間道緣下、解脫道緣上?因為斷時要厭下,證時要欣上——一厭一欣,恰是出離的兩腳。易誤處:把六個行相當成六種心理形容。它們是有嚴格所緣的觀行——三個緣下、三個緣上。落地上:「如獄厚壁」一喻是全節最好記的一句——障不是外來的阻力,是自地本身的厚度。此節之二譯譯名差見承衍節。
十二、盡智之後
〔十二之一〕不動與非不動。 論立:「不動種性諸阿羅漢,盡智無間起無生智,非更有盡智無學正見生。除不動法餘阿羅漢,盡智無間有盡智生,或即引生無學正見非無生智,後容退故。」
先問:為什麼非不動者不起無生智?因為無生智是『知其不復更生』之智,而他還容有退,說不出這句話。易誤處:以為無生智只是盡智的加強版。兩智所斷定的事不同——一個斷「已盡」,一個斷「不復生」。 落地上:位次之名多半可以逆推出它所斷定的內容;讀到一個智名,先問『它斷定了什麼』。
〔十二之二〕不動者有沒有正見。 論自設一問:「前不動種性無正見生耶?」答:「有正見生,而不說者,一切應果皆有此故。」——不是沒有,是因為一切應果都有,所以不必在差別處說。「謂不動法無生智後有無生智起,或無學正見。」
先問:為什麼『共有的』反而不說?因為頌文所辨的是差別。易誤處:見某位次下沒有列某法,就推定它沒有。落地上:論文之所以不說,可能是「無」,也可能是『共有故不必別說』——這兩種要靠上下文分辨,本節正好給了一個明例。
十三、沙門性與沙門果
〔十三之一〕沙門性是什麼。 論答得極乾脆:「諸無漏道是沙門性,懷此道者名曰沙門,以能勤勞息煩惱故。」並引經為證:「以能勤勞息除種種惡不善法」,乃至「故名沙門」。光記於此訓其名云「沙門此云勤息,以能勤勞息煩惱故」——勤與息二字,正扣論文的「勤勞」與「息」。
先問:沙門性是人還是法?是法——是無漏道本身;懷此道的人才叫沙門。易誤處:把「沙門」讀成一種身分或衣相。在本論裡它是果位之名,判準只有一條:有沒有無漏道。 落地上:全卷四向四果講到這裡才落到體上——前面是刻度,這裡是尺子本身。
〔十三之二〕異生為什麼不是真沙門。 論答:「異生不能無異究竟趣涅槃故,非真沙門。」先問:「異」指什麼?指趣向上的岔路——他所趣的未必真是涅槃,或雖趣而不究竟。易誤處:以為這是貶抑之詞。是判準之語——沙門性既是無漏道,異生無之,自然不入。落地上:本論的一切『非真某某』,都應當回頭找那個定義句;定義一對,判語自明。
〔十三之三〕八十九是怎麼算的。 論立:「有為無為是沙門果。契經說此差別有四,理實就位有八十九,皆解脫道擇滅為性。」算法是:斷見所斷惑有八無間道、八解脫道;斷修所斷惑有八十一無間道、八十一解脫道——八加八十一,得八十九。
再分性與果:「諸無間道唯沙門性,諸解脫道亦是沙門有為果體,是彼等流、士用果故。一一擇滅唯是沙門無為果體,是彼離繫、士用果故。」頌疏於此立一雙關之訓云「息惡義邊名沙門性,與無間道為等流果邊名沙門果」——同一個解脫道,就息惡說是性,就等流說是果。
先問:為什麼無間道只是性而不是果?因為它在斷,還沒有證。易誤處:把八十九當成八十九個果位。是八十九個解脫道與相應的擇滅。落地上:性與果的分際,全在無間道與解脫道那一刀——這一刀在〔十之五〕已經立過,此處是它的收成。
〔十三之四〕為什麼經只說四果。 論答:「若斷道位具足五因,佛於經中建立為果。」五因是:一捨曾道(捨先得的果道與向道),二得勝道(得果所攝的殊勝道),三總集斷(總一得得諸斷),四得八智(四法智四類智),五能頓修十六行相。「於四果位皆具五因,餘位不然,故佛不說。」
先問:五因之中哪一個最能揀別?「總集斷」與「得八智」最硬——只有在果位上才有那一個總得,也只有在那時才四法四類齊備。易誤處:以為四果是就修行感受立的。它是就這五個可檢的條件立的。 落地上:第三因「總集斷」與〔二之五〕的「五下結斷」用的是同一個記帳法——論在前面埋的伏筆,到這裡結賬。光記與寶疏於「餘位」之界有異,見承衍節。
〔十三之五〕世俗道得的兩果何以也算。 論自設一難:「若唯淨道是沙門性,有漏道力所得二果,如何亦是沙門果攝?」答有二層。第一層:「此果非唯以世俗道所得擇滅為斷果性,兼以見道所得擇滅於中相雜總成一果,同一果道得所得故。」並引經為證——一來果是「斷三結薄貪瞋癡」,不還果是「斷五下結」;三結正是見道所斷,可見其中確有無漏所得之分。第二層:「又世俗道所得擇滅,無漏斷得所任持故,由此力所持退不命終故,亦得名為沙門果體。」
先問:兩層理由的分工是什麼?第一層說『其中本有無漏之分』,第二層說『其存續靠無漏之得任持』。光記為第一層下一句斷語:「以少從多名沙門果。」易誤處:以為世俗道也能算沙門性。不能——性唯無漏;能算的是果。 落地上:性與果可以不同源——這是本節最要緊的一句,也是全章唯一的例外處理。
十四、婆羅門·梵輪·法輪
〔十四之一〕三個異名。 論立:真沙門性「經亦說名婆羅門性,以能遣除諸煩惱故」;「即此亦說名為梵輪,是真梵王力所轉故」;佛「與無上梵德相應,是故世尊獨應名梵」,並引經證「佛亦名梵、亦名寂靜、亦名清涼」。
先問:三個名各就哪一義立?婆羅門就『遣除煩惱』立,梵輪就「真梵所轉」立,梵就「無上梵德」立。光記訓「梵」字云「梵此云淨」。易誤處:以為這是佛教借用外道之名。論給的理由全在義上——能遣煩惱故、真梵所轉故,不在名的出處上。落地上:一名之立,先問『論給的所以是什麼』;三疏於「婆羅門」一名之訓恰好互異,見承衍節。
〔十四之二〕法輪為什麼只是見道。 論立:「即於此中唯依見道,世尊有處說名法輪。如世間輪有速等相,見道似彼故名法輪。」五相是:「謂見諦道速疾行故、有捨取故、降未伏故、鎮已伏故、上下轉故,具此五相似世間輪。」
先問:五相是怎麼配上去的?速疾對輪之轉快,捨取對輪之前後接地,降未伏、鎮已伏對輪之碾伏,上下轉對輪之迴旋。易誤處:把譬喻讀成修辭。這裡是逐相對配的,五相一一有實指。 落地上:本論用喻的規矩是『先出所喻之相,再逐相對配』——凡見一喻,先數它列了幾相。
〔十四之三〕另一種配法。 論錄一異說:「尊者妙音作如是說:如世間輪有輻等相,八支聖道似彼名輪。謂正見、正思惟、正勤、正念似世輪輻,正語、正業、正命似轂,正定似輞,故名法輪。」
先問:兩說差在哪?前說取輪之「用」(速、捨取、降伏、迴轉),此說取輪之「體」(輻、轂、輞)。頌文以「由速等似輪,或具輻等故」把兩說都收進去了。易誤處:以為兩說互斥。頌文的「或」字正是並存之標。 落地上:一個喻可以就用取、也可以就體取;本論兩存而不判,讀者也不必代為選邊。此說之二譯異稱見承衍節。
〔十四之四〕怎麼知道法輪唯是見道。 論自問自答:「憍陳那等見道生時,說名已轉正法輪故。」——經上是在憍陳那等見道生起時才說「已轉法輪」,故知所指是見道。光記於憍陳那之名訓云「阿若多此云已解」。
先問:這是什麼樣的證?是教證,而且是就『說法輪之語何時出現』取的。易誤處:以為這是推理。它是文證。 落地上:本論立宗常兼用理證與教證,此處是純教證的樣本——證據的類型不同,反駁的方式也不同。
〔十四之五〕三轉十二行相。 論釋:「此苦聖諦,此應遍知,此已遍知,是名三轉。即於如是一一轉時,別別發生眼智明覺,說此名曰十二行相。」並補一句:「如是三轉十二行相諦諦皆有,然數等故但說三轉十二行相,如說二法七處善等。」
先問:三乘四不是十二嗎,為什麼還說每諦皆有?因為每一諦都有三轉,每轉發四事,所以實數是十二轉四十八行;只因每諦之數相等,就舉一諦之數以該之。易誤處:把十二行相算成三轉乘四諦。十二是三轉乘四事(眼智明覺)。頌疏於「眼智明覺」四字有逐字之配,見承衍節。落地上:遇到法數對不上,先問『這個數是舉一該餘,還是實總』。
〔十四之六〕論主自己的一難與收束。 論錄毘婆沙師以三轉配三道(見道、修道、無學道)之說,隨即自難:「若爾,三轉十二行相非唯見道,如何可說唯於見道立法輪名?」自結:「是故唯應即此三轉十二行相所有法門名為法輪,可應正理。」
先問:這算不算推翻前文?不算——前文說『見道似輪故名法輪』是就相似立名,此處說「法門名為法輪」是就轉他相續立名,兩者所據不同。論隨即釋「轉」字:「由此法門往他相續令解義故。或諸聖道皆是法輪,於所化生身中轉故。於他相續見道生時,已至轉初故名已轉。」易誤處:以為論主與毘婆沙師之說必居其一。論給了一個更寬的界說,把兩者都安頓了。 落地上:「轉」字的實義是『進入他人的相續』——法輪之所以是輪,因為它動到別人身上去了,這是全章最要緊的一句。頌疏於此另有部派之標,見承衍節。
十五、依何界得
〔十五之一〕前三果與第四果。 論立:「前三但依欲界身得,得阿羅漢依三界身。」先問:為什麼阿羅漢可以在三界得?因為那時見道之事早已辦畢,所餘唯斷修惑,上界身也能辦。易誤處:以為果位愈高愈須殊勝之身。恰相反——愈前者所須之緣愈嚴。 落地上:這一節是全卷的收束,它把前面所有位次收回到「身」這一個條件上。
〔十五之二〕第三果為什麼也不能依上得。 論先鬆一步:「前之二果未離欲故,非依上得理且可然」——前二果的人本就未離欲,說他不在上界得,不成問題。難處在第三果:他已離欲,何以不能在上界得?論答:「由理教故。」
理是:「依上界身無見道故,非離見道已離欲者可有超證不還果義。」——超越證不還,必須有見道;上界既無見道,超證就無從說起。先問:這一步的關節在哪?在「超證」二字——先離欲的人入見道時可直得不還果,這叫超證;而超證的前提是見道。易誤處:以為第三果不依上得是因為離欲不足。是因為見道不在上界。 落地上:本節之答不在『他夠不夠格』,而在『那個工序在不在那裡』。
〔十五之三〕上界為什麼沒有見道。 論給三因:「且無色中無正聞故」;「又彼界中不緣下故,色界異生著勝定樂」;「又無苦受不生厭故,非無有厭能得見道」。
先問:三因各針對哪一界?第一因針對無色(無聞),第二因針對色界(著定樂而不緣下),第三因通於上二界(無苦受故不生厭)。頌疏於第三因申其所以云「夫入見道,要須厭苦,色界無厭苦,著定樂故」。易誤處:把三因平均攤到二界。它們各有所主。 落地上:見道之所須,論在這裡反過來標出了三樣——聞、緣下、厭;順著讀是欠缺,逆著讀就是條件。
〔十五之四〕教證。 論引經:「有五補特伽羅,此處通達彼處究竟,所謂中般乃至上流。」再釋其關鍵詞:「此通達言唯目見道,是證圓寂初加行故。由此見道上界定無。」
先問:這句經怎麼就證成了?因為經明說「此處通達彼處究竟」——通達(見道)在此處(欲界),究竟(般涅槃)在彼處(上界);若上界有見道,經不會這樣分派。易誤處:把「通達」讀成證果。論已標定:通達唯指見道。 落地上:教證之力全在關鍵詞的界定上——論每引一經,必先定其詞,這一句是全卷最後一個、也是最乾淨的示範。整卷至此收束:從家家的三緣到見道所依之身,一根刻度尺量到頭,而尺子本身就是那句「諸無漏道是沙門性」。
承衍:三疏之鏡
以上是本卷論文自身之義。此下另立一節,收四事:三疏之判釋與互異、眾賢之破與補、真諦舊譯之異、可對讀之座標。鏡非論,只是換一種讀法看同一段文;並錄不判,各還其位。
一、三疏互異之處
一部在本卷完全缺席的疏。 本卷的疏有一個明白的缺口:神泰疏是殘本,現存七卷之中屬賢聖品的只有一卷,而那一卷自標所釋為論卷二十五——正是下一卷。本卷(論卷二十四)沒有泰疏可繫。這是逐目核過現存卷次之後的結論,不是檢索未盡;據實標闕,不以他卷之文充之。
七善士趣的問答結構,三家各補一層。 這是本卷三疏合觀最見效的一段。光記標出第一層——論主自設問答(「若爾何故……佛唯說有七善士趣」,並標為「問及頌答」)。寶疏補標第二層——把論文「何獨依此立善士趣,不依所餘有學聖者」科為問,把「趣是行義」以下科為答,這是光記未另立科之處。頌疏又補第三層——另設「何故須、斯二果不立七善士趣名」之問答。三家合起來,這一段的問答鏈才完整。誰的標法較完整,本節不判;唯錄三家標法之異。
有行無行先後之取向:光記獨下判語。 論文只說「然契經中先說無行、後說有行般涅槃者,如是次第與理相應」,並未自道所朋。光記則先標破意,說論主所破者是「中、生般等亦緣有為,無為斷惑,亦應名為有行,無行」,隨即逕判「論主意朋經部,所以印可」。⇒ 論文自身無此標籤,這是光記之判。寶疏、頌疏於此未標。並錄不判。
中般之定義:寶疏逕採眾賢釋。 光記於中般自作解釋,寶疏則在釋「言中般者」一句時直接引《順正理論》之文為釋。這是寶疏體例的一貫特徵——遇有眾賢已釋之處,往往逕採而不另撰。此事本身即可注意:同為俱舍之疏,而取材之向不同。並錄不判。
金剛喻定三說:光記列而不裁,寶疏引正理裁第三為正。 光記標論文此段「總有三說,此即初師」,逐一科判而不作取捨。寶疏則明設一問「三說中何說為正」,並引《順正理論》答之,裁第三師(一百六十四種)為正。⇒ 論文自身未落判語(只說「若就種性根等分別,更成多種,如理應思」)。寶疏之裁是疏家之裁,非本論之定論。並錄不判。
五因立四果的適用範圍:寶疏獨補練根。 論文說「於四果位皆具五因,餘位不然」。光記順文而解,並自出一段「見惑易斷,總立一果。修惑難斷,別立三果」的所以。寶疏則另開一格,說「唯此四位及練根者,有此五因,餘位無也,由此練根亦名得果」——把練根位也算進具五因之列。⇒ 論文未及練根。此為寶疏獨補,並錄不判。
婆羅門一名之訓:三家三樣。 光記於此無音義之訓(只訓「梵」字為「淨」)。寶疏訓為「淨行」,並引《順正理論》另出一義說「寂默冲虛蕭然名梵」。頌疏則訓為「淨志」,並自為之會通說「與勤息義同也」——把婆羅門之訓拉回沙門之訓上去。⇒ 淨行/淨志/無訓,三家互異,唯錄不判。
法輪唯見道抑通三道:頌疏獨標部派。 論文自難自結,說「是故唯應即此三轉十二行相所有法門名為法輪」,而未標此義出於何宗。頌疏則逕以部派標之,說「若依經部,法輪非唯見道」。⇒ 論文自身未作此標。光記、寶疏於此皆未標部派。並錄不判。
頌疏於論文所無之數與配。 兩處可注意:一是法輪五相之第一相下,頌疏自注「言速疾者,十五剎那也」,給出論文所無的數;二是「別別發生眼智明覺」一句下,頌疏逐字配之,說「於見道中法忍名眼,法智名智,類忍名明,類智名覺」。二者皆為疏家之補,非論文所有,讀時宜別其層次。
用字之異。 「種性」一詞,光記與寶疏作「種姓」,頌疏作「種性」;底本此處另有異讀之校記(性/姓)。此屬用字,非義理,照錄不改。
二、眾賢之破與補釋
眾賢兩部論在此品的品名不作「分別賢聖品」——《順正理論》作「辯賢聖品第六」,《顯宗論》作「辯賢聖品第七」(品號後移)。以俱舍之品名去搜,永遠找不到。
第一場:有行無行先後之諍,眾賢反評論主之駁語。 論主在本卷駁一異說(有行無行之別在緣有為無為聖道)曰「此說非理,太過失故」。眾賢於同一處先自申一段辨析,繼而逐字牒出那個異說,隨即反評論主之駁語,說「經主所難有大過失,為已善通此義雖等,而彼各有差別位故」,末以經文兩存收之——有經先說無行,也有經先說有行,時既無異,隨說無違;而他自己則以「有行可尊故我先說」為序。
這一場要辨明層次:世親所評的是那個異說,眾賢所評的是世親的評語,二者不在同一層。眾賢並不是重立那個異說,而是為它代作善通,並自出經證說明先後兩存俱不相違。二重互評,並錄不判。三疏於此皆未引及眾賢的這一層覆評。
第二場:身證定義之諍,三層俱全。 論主於身證得名之由自出一解,說「理實應言,彼從滅定起,得先未得,有識身寂靜」云云——強調的是出定後那一刻。眾賢逐字牒之,並評曰「今謂彼從滅定起位,雖得先未得有識身寂靜,而非唯彼」位方得身證之名——他主張身證之名應通入定前後二時,不限於起定一刻。末後他回護頌文本身的簡略措辭,說「是故前說於理為勝,舉後邊故唯作是言:得滅定不還轉」名為身證——意思是頌文只標「得滅定」三字,已經賅攝二時,不必另立新解。
所爭者是身證得名的時分。這是本卷對辯材料最完整的一段,三層俱在。三疏皆未引及。並錄不判。
一段不是破而是補的材料。 眾賢於身證一節的鄰接處,補出了論文所略的經證全文——世尊告給孤獨長者,福田有二,有學十八、無學唯九,並全列十八有學之目(預流向、預流果、一來向、一來果、不還向……)。論文只說「契經說有十八有學」而未列其目,眾賢補全了它。頌疏於同節也引「福田有二,謂有學十八、無學有九」之脈絡,二者可以互證。這是承取而非反破,誌錄之。
《顯宗論》獨有的第四說。 金剛喻定的智行緣別,俱舍與《順正理論》都只列三說(五十二、八十、一百六十四)。《顯宗論》於同節另補一說並自駁之——「尊者妙音作如是說:金剛喻定總有十三,謂斷有頂見修」斷惑無間道攝十三剎那,隨即說「此亦不然,以四類忍前八無間道非極上品故」。⇒ 此說不見於本卷論文,也不見於《順正理論》對應段,是《顯宗論》獨有的補充。唯錄立說與所在,不判優劣。
一條誠實的負命題。 以「經主」二字明標世親的句子,在本卷範圍內於《順正理論》全枚舉得兩條(即上列兩場),於《顯宗論》同範圍則零命中。但這只能證一件事:《顯宗論》在本卷沒有用「經主」這個標名去點世親的名。不能由此推出本卷《顯宗論》無對辯——事實上它另補了上面那個第四說。標名之零命中,不等於無對辯。
三、真諦舊譯之異
真諦本此品題作「分別聖道果人品」,全品分三卷,而玄奘分四卷——卷數既不同,卷界就不可能逐一重合,本卷所對之段正橫跨真諦的兩卷。加上品名譯法全異,以玄奘的詞去搜真諦本必定落空;跨本比對只能取場景結構。
譯名自成一系。 無漏根作無流根、一來果作斯陀含、不還作阿那含、中般涅槃等四名一律簡作中滅生滅有行滅無行滅、全超半超遍歿作超出半超出遍退、色究竟天存音寫作阿迦尼師吒、現般涅槃作現法般涅槃、未至定作非至定、離繫得作滅離至得、金剛喻定作金剛譬三摩提、不動種性作不壞法。設問的虛詞也成一系——玄奘作「何緣」,真諦作「云何」。
兩處最見譯法分途的例。 其一是「一間」的訓詁:玄奘訓「間」為間隔,就時之隔說;真諦訓為「障義」,就所障說。同一個字,兩種訓詁角度,而所指的事實同一(尚餘一生未盡)。其二是七善士趣:玄奘作「善士趣」,真諦作「賢聖行」——這是本卷貫穿最廣的一個術語譯名差,兩譯全不相涉。
五淨居五品的名,兩譯全異而次第對應。 玄奘作下、中、上上、勝上、極品;真諦作軟、中、上、上中、上上。逐位對應是:奘之第三「上上」對諦之第三「上」,奘之第四「勝上」對諦之第四「上中」,奘之第五「極品」對諦之第五「上上」。開合幾同而譯字系統迥異,並錄存目,不強解其所本。
一處結構性的開合差。 離繫得的那一場諍論,玄奘以一個半頌「聖二離八修,各二離繫得」總攝,而把「有餘師釋」以下的往復全放在長行裡;真諦則把這一場諍論編進偈頌本身,作四段偈句逐句嵌釋。同一場諍,一個置於長行、一個置於頌面——這不是義理之歧,是譯例本身之差。並錄不判。
世道行相三名,兩譯全異。 玄奘作麁、苦、障與靜、妙、離;真諦作麁重、逼惱、厚壁與寂靜、美妙、出離。有趣的是「厚壁」——玄奘把它放在長行的譬喻裡(「如獄厚壁能障出離」),真諦則逕以「厚壁」為行相之名。同一意象,一個作喻、一個作名。
沙門性一名的兩種取法。 玄奘取義譯,作「沙門性」「沙門果」;真諦存音寫,全篇作「沙門若」「沙門若果」。八十九這個數,玄奘逕言八十九,真諦作「一減九十」——所指同一,表法不同。佛之梵名亦然:玄奘義譯作「梵」,真諦存音寫。
同一人而二譯異稱。 說「輻等」那一位,玄奘作「尊者妙音」,真諦作「大德瞿沙」。本卷依場景逕對應,唯錄不判。
離染道一節的對位。 離染道一節(有頂唯無漏、離繫得、未至道、近分解脫、世道行相)在真諦本起於其卷十八之首,以「有學人由何道得離欲」領起,逐偈與玄奘正四十七至正五十相對——逐條的頁錨見本子考據目九。
四、可對讀之座標
本卷所立者,是一根從家家到阿羅漢的刻度尺,與一句「諸無漏道是沙門性」的體。這兩樣在瑜伽行一系都有可逐字對讀的段落。
三火星喻,彼系出而此系略。 本卷說中般分三,「由三火星喻所顯故」,而喻的本身論文從略。瑜伽行系之根本論於同一法逐一舉喻——第一種如小札火的微星纔舉即滅,第二種如鐵摶鋌鎚鍛時星流未下便滅,第三種如熱鐵椎鍛星流下未至地即滅。三喻扣三速,正是本卷所省的那一節。一間的定義兩系也全合。
金剛喻定,同名而所繫之科不同。 本卷把金剛喻定繫在阿羅漢向之終(斷有頂第九品惑的無間道)。瑜伽行系之根本論則把它繫在『修習如所得道』之圓滿相上,說有學的金剛喻定到究竟故修得圓滿。同一定名,一個標它斷什麼,一個標它成什麼。
阿羅漢與捨藏識名。 本卷以金剛喻定引盡智而成無學。唯識一系用同一個定作第八識捨「阿賴耶」名的界——說阿羅漢位方究竟捨,並自為之寬其所攝,明言此中所說的阿羅漢通攝三乘無學果位;於末那相應之惑,則說金剛喻定現前時頓斷其種而成阿羅漢。⇒ 『金剛喻定是最後一斷』這一準,兩系不改;所斷之體則異——本卷繫之於有頂第九品惑,唯識繫之於煩惱障種與末那相應之惑。而「阿羅漢」一名的外延也不同:本卷唯就聲聞果說,唯識明言通攝三乘。同一個名、同一把刀,兩代所斷之物不同——這是本卷最可對讀的一處。
至於取用之向,唯誌錄二系之逐字所立,不代作會通。
Before Reading This Fascicle
The previous fascicle finished with the stream-enterer — after the fifteen minds of the path of seeing he abides in the fruit, and at most returns through birth and death seven times. This fascicle takes that up in its very first breath: “it has already been made out that one who abides in the fruit and has not yet abandoned the defilements abandoned by cultivation is named the stream-enterer, born at most seven times over; now it must next be made out who among the noble ones stand in the stage of abandoning, and first the approach to and the fruit of once-returning are to be established.” One paired formula, the first half gathering up the previous fascicle and the second opening this one. The three ancient masters let the knife of their outlines fall in the very same place here, and the ordinal each marks is one and the same — Puguang marks “below, the second, explaining the approach to and the fruit of once-returning,” Fabao marks “the stanza below, the second, explaining the approach to and the fruit of once-returning,” Yuanhui marks “from here the second, explaining the approach to and the fruit of once-returning.” The three divide their fascicles independently and their boundary agrees throughout with Xuanzang’s: one can see that this cut was opened by the treatise itself.
The skeleton of this fascicle is really only two things. The first is a graduated scale: of the nine grades of defilement abandoned by cultivation in the desire realm, abandoning the third and fourth is family-to-family, abandoning up to the fifth is still the approach to once-returning, abandoning the sixth makes the fruit of once-returning, abandoning the seventh and eighth is one-interval, abandoning the ninth makes the fruit of non-returning; and higher up, abandoning the defilements abandoned by cultivation in the two upper realms, from the first grade of the first absorption to the eighth grade at the summit of existence is all the approach to arhatship, and the single moment that abandons the ninth grade at the summit of existence is named the vajra-like concentration — its path of liberation arising together with the acquisition of the exhaustion of the outflows is the knowledge of exhaustion, and one becomes an arhat. Every stage in the whole fascicle is a point upon this one ruler. The second is an entity: whose fruits, after all, are these fruits? The treatise answers only at the end of the fascicle — they are the fruits of the ascetic life; and the nature of the ascetic life is just the path without outflows itself. The eighty-nine entities of the fruit, the five causes by which four fruits are established, the fruits of the ascetic life obtained even by the mundane path, brahminhood and the wheel of Brahmā and the wheel of Dharma, and in dependence upon which realm they are obtained — this chapter is the gathering-in of the whole fascicle, and the settled board of the whole chapter’s side of the fruits.
Set between them are two of the densest passages of prose commentary: one on how the seven kinds of non-returner open out into nine and gather into the seven destinies of good men (nine hundred twenty-nine characters), and one on the approach to arhatship and the three accounts of the vajra-like concentration (nine hundred forty-four characters). These two passages are where the weight of this fascicle rests, and one should read them slowly.
There is one more thing to say first. This fascicle is among the passages in the whole treatise that most frequently record divergent accounts alongside, and the author’s handling of them is not uniform: in some places he records and passes no judgment (why the Pure Abodes are only five), in others he records and refutes at once (that attaining parinirvāṇa in the interval extends also to the nirvāṇa without remainder; that the difference of with and without exertion lies in taking the conditioned or the unconditioned noble path as object). In reading this fascicle one must first learn to tell these two hands apart, or one will take for the author’s own position an account he has plainly refuted.
I. Family-to-Family: Not One of the Three Conditions May Be Wanting
〔1.1〕What family-to-family is. First ask: the stream-enterer already abides in his fruit; why has he a new name? Because he goes on abandoning defilement, and his stage has moved. The definition the treatise gives is strict — “if the three conditions are complete he is renamed family-to-family”: first by abandoning defilement (abandoning the third or fourth grade of the defilements of the desire realm abandoned by cultivation), second by achieving the faculties (obtaining the faculties without outflows that counteract them), third by undergoing birth (yet to undergo three or two of the existences of the desire realm). The three conditions are conjoined, not disjoined. Puguang explains this, saying “if the three conditions are complete he is renamed family-to-family; wherever any is wanting he is not named family-to-family” — let one be missing and it does not count.
The easy error: to suppose that abandoning the third or fourth grade makes one family-to-family automatically. It does not. Abandoning defilement is only the first item; one must also have achieved the faculties without outflows that counteract those defilements, and the number of births must fall in the slot of three births or two. In practice: whenever in reading this fascicle you meet the four words “if the three conditions are complete,” first count out which three conditions they are, and then see how many the stanza states and how many it leaves out — this is a sentence-pattern the whole fascicle uses again and again.
〔1.2〕Why the stanza states only two conditions. First ask: since not one of the three conditions may be wanting, why does the stanza state only “abandoning the third or fourth grade of the desire realm” and “three births or two,” leaving out “achieving the faculties”? The treatise gives the answer itself: “after the fruit of stream-entry it says ‘goes on abandoning defilement,’ and the achieving of the several faculties without outflows that counteract them follows by implication and is already established; therefore it is not fully stated.” — Say “after stream-entry he goes on abandoning defilement,” and the achieving of the counteracting faculties is already contained within it, and can be drawn out; it need not be listed.
Then why must “three births or two” be stated after all? The treatise answers this too: “because there is advance, and as to the births he undergoes they may be fewer, or none, or more than this.” In practice there is advance and retreat and the number of births is not fixed — it may be fewer, he may undergo none at all, it may be more; and just because it is not fixed, the slot “three births or two” must be nailed down. The easy error: to think that what the stanza keeps and drops is a matter of filling out the count of characters. It is not — what can be drawn out by implication is dropped, and what cannot be drawn out must be stated; this is a general rule of the treatise’s stanza form. In practice: hereafter, whenever the stanza and the prose commentary do not tally, first ask whether the item left out can be drawn out from what precedes.
〔1.3〕Why there is no “family-to-family by abandoning the fifth grade.” This is the question in this section where the knife-work shows most. The treatise answers: “because when the fifth is abandoned the sixth must be abandoned, and one grade of defilement cannot obstruct the obtaining of a fruit, as with one-interval, since he has not yet crossed out of the realm.” One who has abandoned the fifth grade must go on to abandon the sixth, and no death and birth is inserted in between — because one single grade of defilement has no power to obstruct the matter of obtaining a fruit. The corroborating instance adduced is “one-interval”: that one has a single grade of defilement remaining and yet does not obtain the fruit of non-returning, because the moment that grade is abandoned he crosses out of the desire realm — it is because of the realm that it becomes an obstruction.
The easy error: to take “one grade of defilement cannot obstruct the obtaining of a fruit” for a general rule. It is not a general rule — the sixth grade cannot obstruct, the ninth grade can, and the difference lies in the two words “crossing the realm.” In practice: here lies the principle of this fascicle’s graduated scale — what really draws the lines is not the number of grades of defilement but the edge of a realm. Whenever you meet “why is no stage established here?”, first ask whether this step crosses a realm.
〔1.4〕Divine family-to-family and human family-to-family. The treatise divides family-to-family further into two kinds: “first, divine family-to-family, who within the destiny of the gods of the desire realm undergoes birth in three or two families and realizes perfect quiescence, whether in one heavenly place or in two or three”; human family-to-family is the same, whether in one continent or in two or three. First ask: what does “family” mean here? It is one “household” among the places of birth — birth in three families or two among the gods, or in three families or two among men. So “three or two families” and “three or two births” are two ways of saying one and the same thing.
Puguang adds a layer beyond the text of the treatise: “it should be known that the divine family-to-family obtains the path among men, and the human family-to-family obtains the path among the gods” — the name marks the place where he undergoes birth, while the place where he obtains the path is precisely the other destiny. The easy error: to read “divine family-to-family” as “one who obtains the path in the heavens.” In practice: the name of a numbered set of dharmas often marks the place of retribution rather than the place of practice, and in reading one must ask which end the name is established from.
〔1.5〕The approach to and the fruit of once-returning. The treatise then fills in the graduations: abandoning one grade up to five grades of the defilements of the desire realm abandoned by cultivation is all named the approach to the fruit of once-returning; abandoning the sixth grade makes the fruit of once-returning — “he goes up to the heavens once and comes back to the human world once and attains parinirvāṇa, and is named the fruit of once-returning; after this once there is no further birth.” So the words “once-returning” are not a vague description but a real indication of one round-trip. The treatise also gives another name: “this may also be called thin in greed, hatred, and delusion, because only the low grades of greed, hatred, and delusion remain.”
First ask: why “thin” and not “abandoned”? Because of the nine grades only the first six have been abandoned, and the three that remain are of the low grade, and so it is said to be thin. The easy error: to take “thin in greed, hatred, and delusion” for another fruit-stage. It is just another name for the fruit of once-returning. In practice: the treatise often gives one and the same stage two names — one established from the number of births (once-returning), one from the aspect of the defilements (thin in greed, hatred, and delusion); read the two names together and the inner and outer marks of the stage are both clear.
II. One-Interval: The Approach to Non-Returning
〔2.1〕The three conditions of one-interval. The structure is wholly the same as with family-to-family: “it is that once-returner who goes on abandoning the remaining defilements; if the three conditions are complete he is renamed one-interval” — abandoning defilement (the seventh or eighth grade), achieving the faculties, and undergoing birth (yet to undergo the one remaining existence of the desire realm). The stanza likewise states only the first and the third, and “achieving the faculties is not stated, the sense being as explained before.” First ask: why does the treatise walk the same structure through a second time? Because though the stage has advanced the rule has not changed — and this is the treatise’s consistent method in establishing stages. Fabao says here that “when the three conditions are complete he is named one-interval; if one, two, or three are wanting he is not one-interval,” speaking in the same voice as Puguang on family-to-family.
The easy error: to suppose one-interval is a new fruit. It is the approach to the fruit of non-returning. In practice: the boundary between approach and fruit is always at “whether that grade has been abandoned” — before the ninth grade is abandoned it is all approach, and once abandoned it is fruit.
〔2.2〕How one grade of defilement can obstruct the fruit of non-returning. The treatise poses the question itself: “how can one grade of defilement obstruct the obtaining of the fruit of non-returning?” Answer: “because if it is abandoned one thereupon crosses out of the realm.” And it adduces the instance from before: “it was said above that action of the three times is what most obstructs; it should be known that the defilements are like action in this, because it crosses over the homogeneous level and the maturation level of that realm.” Fabao adds a sentence of explanation here, saying that this is “not like the one grade with once-returning that does not obstruct,” and takes the “utmost obstruction of the three times” from the Chapter on Action for a simile — it is likewise the last step, and because it crosses a realm it alone weighs heavy.
First ask: does this not contradict 〔1.3〕, “one grade of defilement cannot obstruct the obtaining of a fruit”? It does not — there the sixth grade was spoken of (which does not cross a realm), here the ninth (which does). One and the same sentence, upon different graduations, means two flatly different things. The easy error: to read the two occurrences of “one grade of defilement” as one and the same matter. In practice: in reading Abhidharma one must form the habit that when the same word appears twice, one first makes sure which stage it hangs upon.
〔2.3〕The gloss on the word “interval.” The treatise glosses its own name: “interval means an interval that intervenes; because that one remaining birth becomes an interval, he does not realize perfect quiescence. Or because one remaining grade of the defilements of the desire realm abandoned by cultivation becomes an interval, he does not obtain the fruit of non-returning.” — “Interval” is what intervenes, and what intervenes may be spoken of from the side of birth (one birth still remaining) or from the side of defilement (one grade still remaining). One who has this single interval is named one-interval.
First ask: which of the two accounts is right? The treatise sets them side by side and chooses neither, because what they point at is two faces of one and the same matter. The easy error: to suppose that a gloss has only one correct answer. In practice: the treatise’s glossing of names often takes both ends, “time” and “dharma,” together; when you come upon “either . . . or . . . ,” do not hurry to pick a side.
〔2.4〕The kind of person who abandons first and enters upon seeing the truths afterward. The treatise adds an exception: “one who abandons the third and fourth or the seventh and eighth grades of defilement and then enters upon seeing the truths is, when he afterwards obtains the fruit and until he has cultivated the path of the later and superior fruit, still not called family-to-family or one-interval, because he has not achieved the faculties without outflows that counteract them.” First ask: his defilements are abandoned and his number of births tallies; why does he still not count? Because the second of the three conditions is wanting — those defilements of his were abandoned by a mundane path while he was still an ordinary being, and he has not yet achieved the faculties without outflows that counteract them.
The easy error: to suppose that family-to-family and one-interval look only at how many grades have been abandoned. In practice: this passage is exactly the proof that the condition of “achieving the faculties” cannot be dropped — ordinarily the stanza leaves it out, and yet here it alone draws the boundary. Whenever some condition seems to you a redundancy, look for the border case where it does its work.
〔2.5〕The fruit of non-returning and the abandoning of the five lower fetters. “If he abandons the ninth grade he becomes the fruit of non-returning, because he certainly does not come back to be born in the desire realm. This may also be called one who has abandoned the five lower fetters.” The treatise adds at once an honest sentence: “although two or three must certainly have been abandoned first, at this time they are gathered together and abandoned all at once.” First ask: the five lower fetters are plainly abandoned one after another; why is it only here that he is called “one who has abandoned the five lower fetters”? Because it is only at this moment that they are gathered together and reckoned as abandoned to exhaustion. The easy error: to suppose the five fetters are abandoned all together in this single moment. In practice: “gathering the abandonments together” is a key way of keeping the ledger in this fascicle, and it will be used once more at the end of the fascicle when the five causes for establishing four fruits are treated (“third, gathering the abandonments together, namely because by one single acquisition one obtains the several abandonments”) — one and the same ledger-method, answering across the fascicle.
III. The Seven Kinds of Non-Returner (the First of the Two Long Prose Passages)
〔3.1〕How the seven kinds are counted out. The treatise gives the total and the manner of division in its first breath: “this non-returner is said in sum to be of seven kinds; and first, the differences of those who proceed to the form realm are five: first, attaining parinirvāṇa in the interval; second, upon birth; third, with exertion; fourth, without exertion; fifth, going upstream.” Five who proceed to the form realm, plus the four who proceed to the formless (taken as one class), plus attaining parinirvāṇa in the present life — five and one and one make seven.
First ask: why do “the differences of those who proceed to the formless realm being four” count as only one? Because those four are divided according to the differences of “attaining parinirvāṇa upon birth,” and in nature belong to one class. The easy error: to reckon seven, nine, and four together into one heap. In practice: this section has three numbers (seven, nine, four), each with its own manner of division — seven is the general gate, nine is the fine division of those who proceed to the form realm, and four is the fine division of those who proceed to the formless; make out the denominator of each of the three numbers first, and this passage will not confuse you.
〔3.2〕How each of the five names is arrived at. The treatise glosses them one by one: attaining parinirvāṇa in the interval, hence named in the interval; attaining parinirvāṇa upon having been born, hence named upon birth; attaining parinirvāṇa with exertion and without exertion, hence named with exertion and without exertion; flowing upward, hence named going upstream. Then it gives the real sense of each: “the one said to attain parinirvāṇa in the interval is he who, going to the form realm, attains parinirvāṇa while abiding in the stage of intermediate existence”; “the one said to attain parinirvāṇa upon birth is he who, going to the form realm and being born, attains parinirvāṇa before long, because he is furnished with the diligent cultivation and the path of swift advance”; “the one attaining parinirvāṇa with exertion is he who, going to the form realm and being born, does not let his preparatory effort rest for a long time and attains parinirvāṇa only by much exertion”; “the one attaining parinirvāṇa without exertion is he who, going to the form realm and being born, after a long while lets his preparatory effort slacken and rest and attains parinirvāṇa without much exertion.”
First ask: where do with exertion and without exertion differ? In the presence or absence of “the path of swift advance” — with exertion is having the diligent cultivation and not the swift advance, without exertion is lacking the diligent cultivation and having the swift advance. The easy error: to take the words at face value and suppose “with exertion” means practicing and “without exertion” not practicing. Both are noble ones and both must attain parinirvāṇa; what differs is only the keenness or dullness of the path and the amount of exertion. In practice: whenever you meet a pair of names set over against each other, look for the sentence in the treatise that gives the criterion (here, “having the path of swift advance” and “not having it”), and do not rely on the surface of the words.
〔3.3〕Which nirvāṇa is meant in the case of attaining parinirvāṇa in the interval. The treatise inserts a recording and a refutation: “the parinirvāṇa spoken of here is the one with remainder. Some other masters say: it extends to the one without remainder as well. This is unreasonable, because that one has no mastery over the casting off of his life.” First ask: on what does the author refute? On “no mastery over the casting off of life” — that one, in the stage of intermediate existence, cannot yet cast off his life at will, and so it cannot be said that he enters the nirvāṇa without remainder.
The easy error: to take this passage for a case of “recording without adjudication.” It is not — the author records the opposing side and disallows it at once; the case is closed. In practice: the mark by which one judges in this fascicle whether the author has closed a case is quite clear — after “this is unreasonable” or “this account is unreasonable,” it is no longer a case awaiting decision.
〔3.4〕The order of with and without exertion, and an explanation that gets refuted. The treatise records another account and refutes it: “some say: the difference between these two is that they take the conditioned and the unconditioned noble path as object and obtain nirvāṇa in that order. This account is unreasonable, for the fault is too sweeping.” — Someone holds that the difference between the two lies in whether the object is the conditioned or the unconditioned path; the author adjudges the fault too sweeping.
Thereafter the treatise gives the principle of the order it does allow: “yet that the sūtras state without exertion first and with exertion after — such an order accords with principle” — because what is accomplished without having to use exertion goes more smoothly than what is accomplished only by using exertion, and so the sūtra states without exertion first. First ask: why does the author take the trouble to explain the sūtra’s order? Because someone will ask why, if “with exertion” looks the more diligent in name, the sūtra puts it last. The easy error: to suppose the sūtra’s order was set down at random. In practice: the treatise’s general rule in explaining the order of a sūtra is to speak from the keenness of the path and not from the aspect of diligence — and this rule will be used again at the end of the fascicle in treating the five marks of the wheel of Dharma. The cross-treatise engagement over this passage (Saṅghabhadra’s counter-assessment of the author’s refutation) is in the section of further resonances.
〔3.5〕Going upstream: the one who walks upward. The treatise glosses the name: “the one said to go upstream has the sense of proceeding upward, for flowing and proceeding are one in sense.” The real sense is: he dies out of the desire realm and is born into the form realm, yet cannot realize perfect quiescence there, but must be born ever higher by stages before attaining parinirvāṇa. Then it divides him into two classes: “this one who goes upstream differs in two ways, because cause and result differ” — as to cause, whether he has the mixed cultivation in the meditative absorptions; as to result, whether Akaniṣṭha or the summit of existence is his utmost place.
First ask: why do cause and result correspond just so? Because one who mixedly cultivates the fourth absorption can be born in the Pure Abodes, and so his utmost place is Akaniṣṭha; one who does not can only relish the several absorptions as he rises, and so his utmost place is the summit of existence. The easy error: to suppose that going upstream is one kind of person. It is two roads. In practice: “because cause and result differ” is the treatise’s standard sentence-pattern for classification — look first at the cause cultivated, then at the fruit born into; set the two ends against each other and the classes fall out of themselves.
〔3.6〕The full leap, the half leap, and dying everywhere. The treatise glosses them one by one: the one making the full leap has already cultivated the four absorptions mixedly while in the desire realm, falls away from the upper three absorptions, and by the relish of the first absorption as condition is born into the Brahmakāyika Heaven; by the force of what he practiced repeatedly in his former life he is again able to cultivate the fourth absorption mixedly, and dying from there he is born in Akaniṣṭha — “dying out of the very first place and born into the very last heaven, leaping over the middle at one stroke: this is the sense of the full leap.” The one making the half leap is born by stages from the Brahmakāyika Heaven down into the Pure Abodes, and in the middle can leap over one place and be born in Akaniṣṭha, “and because he leaps but not fully he is named half leap.” The one who dies everywhere “from there by stages undergoes birth everywhere in every place, and only at the last is able to be born in Akaniṣṭha; because he has died in every place he is named dying everywhere.”
Under the head of the half leap the treatise inserts a sentence in passing: “a noble one is certainly not born in the place of the Mahābrahmā Heaven, because it is a place of wrong views, and because of the single teacher.” Puguang sets out the reason for this, saying “a noble one is certainly not born in the place of the Mahābrahmā Heaven, because it is a place where the wrong view of clinging to rules and observances arises, and because he calls himself the one final teacher of the path.” First ask: where do the three kinds differ? In “how many places are leapt over” — the full leap leaps fourteen places, the half leap leaps one or more but not all, and dying everywhere leaps none. The easy error: to read “dying everywhere” as dying a great many times. “Dying” here is the ending of life after a birth has been undergone, and dying everywhere means having undergone one birth in every place. In practice: each of the three names fastens upon an action (leaping all, leaping part, leaping none), and remembering the actions is quicker than remembering the names.
〔3.7〕The non-returner is not born twice in a place where he has been born. The treatise sets down a hard rule: “there is no non-returner who undergoes a second birth in a place where he has already been born, for as regards birth he always seeks what is superior and not what is equal or inferior.” And it explains its own ground: “it is by this that the sense of non-returning is complete, for he certainly does not come back to be born in a place where he has been born; not being born even in his own place, how much less will he be born below.” First ask: what has this rule to do with the name “non-returning”? Everything — the name of non-returning was established from “not coming back to be born below,” and the treatise here pushes it to the limit: he is not born twice even in the same place, still less anywhere lower.
The easy error: to suppose “non-returning” means only not returning to the desire realm. In practice: the treatise often pushes the extension of a numbered dharma’s name to its limit later in the text; when you read a construction like “not even . . . , how much less . . . ,” a limit is being pressed.
〔3.8〕The road of going upstream without the mixed cultivation. The treatise goes on to explain the second class: “the rest, who have no mixed cultivation in the meditative absorptions, can go to the summit of existence and there attain parinirvāṇa” — having no prior mixed cultivation, and taking the relish of the several absorptions as his condition, he dies from here and is born everywhere throughout the places of the form realm, only he cannot go to the five Pure Abode heavens; after the end of his life in the form realm he is born in order through the three formless spheres, and at the last is born at the summit of existence and there attains parinirvāṇa. Then the treatise gives an overall adjudication: “of the two who go upstream, the former is of the practice of contemplation and the latter of the practice of stilling, because they differ in delighting in discernment and in absorption.”
First ask: why can he who has no mixed cultivation not reach the Pure Abodes? Because the Pure Abodes are precisely what the five grades of mixed cultivation draw down (as the next section says). The easy error: to suppose the two roads differ only in speed. They differ in nature — the one delighting in discernment walks the practice of contemplation, the other delighting in absorption walks the practice of stilling. In practice: this sentence, “delighting in discernment, delighting in absorption,” is one of the few judgments of temperament in the whole fascicle, and it explains why two who are alike non-returners should end in places poles apart.
〔3.9〕Why it is said that “Akaniṣṭha and the summit of existence are their utmost places.” The treatise sets an objection to itself: it does not contravene principle that the two who go upstream should attain parinirvāṇa in a lower level, so why is it said that they take those two places as their utmost? Answer: “because beyond those there is no place to proceed to, as the stream-enterer is born at most seven times over.” First ask: what is this simile saying? That “utmost” is an upper limit and not a place that must be reached — the stream-enterer returns at most seven times, and it is not that he must return seven times. The easy error: to read “utmost place” as “the place he must reach.” In practice: wherever the treatise says “utmost,” it always has the sense of an upper limit, and this holds when reading of lifespans and of numbers of births as well.
〔3.10〕The four who proceed to the formless realm, and attaining parinirvāṇa in the present life. The treatise gathers up the seven kinds: “the differences of those who proceed to the formless realm are four, namely that while in the desire realm they have become free of craving for the form realm and at the end of life here are born into the formless . . . because they are divided by the differences of attaining parinirvāṇa upon birth; these with the five above make six non-returners. And there is one who proceeds neither to the form nor to the formless realm but abiding here is able to attain parinirvāṇa, named attaining parinirvāṇa in the present life; with the six above this makes seven.” First ask: why does attaining parinirvāṇa in the present life also count as a non-returner? Because he has abandoned the five lower fetters and is not born in the desire realm; only he does not go to the form or the formless either, but attains parinirvāṇa in this very body. The easy error: to suppose that “non-returning” must involve being born upward. In practice: this last of the seven kinds shows precisely that the positive side of the definition of “non-returning” is “not coming back,” not “necessarily going up.”
IV. The Nine Kinds: Three Kinds Each Divided into Three
〔4.1〕How the nine are opened out. The treatise answers with the utmost brevity: “the five non-returners who proceed to the form realm are established in sum as three, each divided into three, and so there come to be nine kinds.” The three are attaining parinirvāṇa in the interval, upon birth, and going upstream; with exertion and without exertion are both gathered into upon birth (as the text below says of itself, “these all attain parinirvāṇa after being born, and so all should be named upon birth”). First ask: how do five come to be three? Because the denominator has changed — seven and five are divided by “the place and manner of attaining parinirvāṇa,” while three is divided by “the position in time.”
The easy error: to suppose the nine come from five plus four or some other addition. In practice: whenever one and the same set of dharmas suddenly takes a different number, first ask whether the denominator has been changed.
〔4.2〕The three speeds upon which the division into three rests. The treatise gives the manner of division: attaining parinirvāṇa in the interval divides into three, being “attaining parinirvāṇa swiftly, not swiftly, and after a long time, as displayed by the simile of the three sparks”; attaining parinirvāṇa upon birth divides into three by reckoning with exertion and without exertion together with it; going upstream divides into three because the leap, the half leap, and the rest differ. And all three sets alike “attain parinirvāṇa swiftly, not swiftly, and after a long time, so that set over against one another they are not confounded.”
First ask: why is it stressed that they are “not confounded”? Because all three sets use the same ruler (fast and slow), and without the declaration a reader would suspect that the “swiftness” of attaining parinirvāṇa in the interval and the “leap” of going upstream were two different things. The easy error: to take the simile of the three sparks as an ornament belonging to attaining parinirvāṇa in the interval alone. It is the measuring-rod of the whole section. In practice: the treatise says here only “as displayed by the simile of the three sparks” and does not bring out the simile in detail; this section may be read alongside the Yogācāra lineage’s giving of the three similes one by one — see the section of further resonances.
〔4.3〕The three gates of action, defilement, and faculty. The treatise gives the cause of the threefold division: “because action, defilement, and faculty differ, there are the differences of swift, not swift, and long in coming.” Then it fits each gate: as to action, the difference of having done and increased the three actions “to be experienced upon their raising,” “in the next life,” and “in a later life”; as to defilement, the difference in the active presence of the low, middle, and high grades; as to faculty, the difference of the high, middle, and low. And at last the fine division: “the first two and the third: the first two are each constituted as three by the differences of defilement and faculty, and not by a difference of action; the latter three are divided into three by the difference of action to be experienced in a later life.”
First ask: why are attaining parinirvāṇa in the interval and upon birth not divided by action? Because for those two classes the place of birth is already settled and the difference falls upon defilement and faculty; only one who goes upstream must be born again and again by stages, and so is divided by action to be experienced in a later life. The easy error: to suppose the three gates are apportioned evenly over the nine kinds. They are not — the first six are by defilement and faculty, the latter three by action besides. In practice: this is the passage of nicest measure in the fascicle — one and the same set of causes carries different weight upon different classes; in reading the gate of causes of a numbered set of dharmas, one must look class by class to see how much work it actually does.
V. The Seven Destinies of Good Men: Why Nine Are Stated as Seven
〔5.1〕The author’s first self-posed question. The treatise asks itself: “if that is so, why in the sūtras does the Buddha say there are only seven destinies of good men?” And answers itself: “three in the interval and three upon birth, with going upstream as one — the sūtra establishes the seven destinies of good men in accordance with this. Because they have the dharma of going upstream they are named going upstream, and because in this the sense is the same they are for the time being established as one.” — Three in the interval, three upon birth, one going upstream, making seven. Though going upstream is of three kinds, since all have the dharma of “going upstream,” the sense being the same, they are provisionally gathered into one. Puguang marks this expressly as the author posing and answering a question to himself, and explains it as “explaining the two lines above.”
First ask: why is it just going upstream that may be gathered, and not those in the interval and upon birth? Because the three kinds in the interval and the three upon birth really differ in stage as to “place” and “time,” whereas the three who go upstream are alike upon one road going upward, and their sense is the same. The easy error: to suppose that one of seven and nine must be wrong. The two numbers have two denominators: nine is the fine division by action, defilement, and faculty; seven is a name established by the sense of a good man. In practice: where one dharma has several numbers, first ask what this number is for.
〔5.2〕The second question: why only these seven count as good men. The treatise asks itself again: “why are the destinies of good men established in accordance with these alone, and not in accordance with the other noble ones in training?” Answer: “destiny has the sense of proceeding; the other ones in training all practice wholesome action without difference. These seven alone all practice wholesome action and do not practice evil action, while the others are not so. And these seven alone proceed to the upper realms and do not come back again, while the others are not so.”
First ask: since the other ones in training also practice the good, why do they not count? Because “practicing the good” is not enough to mark them off; one needs “practicing the good and not the evil,” and “going and not returning” besides — the two together are the mark peculiar to these seven. The easy error: to take “good man” for a term of praise or blame. It is the name of a numbered dharma defined with strictness, and neither of its two criteria may be wanting. In practice: whenever an ordinary-looking term is set up as a numbered dharma, look for the marking-off conditions the treatise gives — usually there is more than one.
〔5.3〕The third question: what to do with the sūtra’s other definition of “good man.” The treatise raises an objection itself: a sūtra says, “what is a good man? He who has achieved the right view of one in training” — on that account every one in training would be a good man. The treatise answers with great nicety: the other ones in training, spoken of “by another gate,” may also be said to have the nature of good men, since with respect to the five evils they have obtained the discipline of never doing them, and their unwholesome defilements are for the most part abandoned; but “the destiny of a good man is not established by that other gate; it is established by practicing only the good and not the evil, and by relying only upon a superior cause to go to the upper realms.”
First ask: is this not a contradiction? It is not — one and the same word has a wide and a narrow sense under two gates: spoken of by “nature” it is wide, and every one in training may be so called; established as a name by “destiny” it is narrow, and only these seven. The easy error: to hurry to reconcile or to rank when sūtra and treatise do not use a word alike. In practice: the treatise’s standard method with unevenness in the sūtras is “dividing by gates” — first ask which gate the sentence speaks from, and most unevenness resolves on the spot. The divergent markings of the three commentaries on this passage are in the section of further resonances.
VI. The Noble Ones Who Have Undergone Birth: Not Going to Another Realm · Not Sharpening the Faculties · Not Falling Back
〔6.1〕The noble one who has already undergone birth in the desire realm. The treatise establishes: “if one in the noble stage has undergone birth in the desire realm, he certainly does not go on to be born in the form or the formless realm, because having realized the fruit of non-returning he is settled upon attaining parinirvāṇa in the present body.” — If he advances to non-returning he must finish in the present body, and will not be born again into an upper realm. As for the noble one who has undergone birth in the form realm, “the principle of his being born up into the formless is admitted, as with one who proceeds to the form realm and goes at the extreme to the summit of existence.”
First ask: why are the noble ones who have undergone birth in the desire and in the form realm treated differently? Because one who has undergone birth in the desire realm has a path ripened to the extreme and, as soon as he obtains non-returning, attains parinirvāṇa in the present body; while one who has undergone birth in the form realm is already upon the road of going upstream. The easy error: to take “having undergone birth” for a fruit-stage. It is a record of history — a noble one who has undergone birth before. In practice: every restriction this section sets down hangs upon that one line of history.
〔6.2〕How that sentence of Śakra’s is to be taken. The treatise adduces a doubt from the testimony of scripture: “yet Śakra, lord of the gods, spoke thus: I have heard that there are gods named Akaniṣṭha, and when I afterwards fall away I shall be born there.” Śakra had already obtained stream-entry; how could he say he would be born in Akaniṣṭha? The treatise adduces one who explains it through, by way of answer: “the Vaibhāṣika masters explain thus: because he did not comprehend the marks of the Abhidharma; and to make him glad, the Buddha did not forbid him.”
Puguang here brings out the occasion the treatise does not detail, saying that Śakra came to take refuge in the World-Honored One when the five marks of decay appeared, and that the Buddha preached the dharma for him and he obtained the fruit of stream-entry, and only afterwards did he utter this vow. First ask: the Buddha knew his error; why did he not forbid it? The answer has two layers: Śakra did not comprehend the marks of the Abhidharma, and forbidding him would have profited nothing and made him unglad. The easy error: to suppose that the Buddha’s not forbidding was a tacit endorsement of the saying as correct. Not forbidding is meeting the occasion, not approving. In practice: in reading the words of persons in a sūtra, first ask whether the sentence is the Buddha’s, or spoken by someone in the sūtra and not forbidden by the Buddha — the two carry different weight.
〔6.3〕The sharpening of the faculties and falling back not allowed. The treatise asks and answers itself: “why is it not allowed that noble ones who have undergone birth in the desire realm and who are born upward should have the sharpening of the faculties and falling back? Because they certainly have neither. And why certainly not? Because the faculties they have practiced after undergoing birth are ripened to the utmost, and because they have obtained a superior support to depend upon.”
First ask: is “because they certainly have neither” not a mere repetition? It is not — the treatise at once presses on with “and why certainly not?” and gives two real causes: the faculties are ripened to the utmost, and the support is already superior. The easy error: to take the former answer for an evasion. The treatise’s questions and answers are often in two grades: first the fact is settled, then the reason is brought out. In practice: when you meet an answer that looks circular, read one sentence further and the reason will usually be there.
〔6.4〕Why one in training not yet free of craving has no attaining parinirvāṇa in the interval. The treatise again asks and answers itself: “why is it that one in training not yet free of craving for desire has no attaining parinirvāṇa within the intermediate existence? Because his noble path is not yet ripened through, because he cannot yet easily make it present, and because the latent tendencies he has are not of the feeblest.” Thereafter the text of the treatise marks a second explaining through of its own: “the Vaibhāṣika masters explain thus: because the dharmas of the desire realm are the hardest of all to cross over, and because he still has many other things to do” — and the things remaining are three: he should still go on abandoning the two defilements, unwholesome and indeterminate; he should still go on obtaining the second and third fruits of the ascetic life; and he should still cross over the dharmas of the three realms all together — while “abiding in the stage of intermediate existence there is no such capability.”
First ask: do the two explanations conflict? They do not — the first speaks from the path and the defilements, the second from what remains to be done; one inward, one outward. The easy error: to take the second for something added by a commentator. It is a second explanation expressly marked in the text of the treatise itself, not a later supplement. In practice: the prose commentary of this treatise often gives its own explanation first and then adduces a supplementary explanation by masters of its own school, and the two standing together are the complete answer.
VII. The Mixed Cultivation of the Meditative Absorptions
〔7.1〕Which is cultivated first. The treatise answers: “whoever would cultivate the four meditative absorptions mixedly must cultivate the fourth absorption mixedly first, because that concentration is the most capable, and because among the several practices of ease it is the most excellent.” First ask: why not begin from the first absorption? Because the concentration of the fourth absorption is the most capable of bearing the work, and it is also the most excellent among the practices of ease. The easy error: to suppose that training always goes from the shallow to the deep. Here it is precisely the most excellent that is taken first, as the door. In practice: wherever the order runs contrary to common sense, the treatise always gives the reason — look for that “because.”
〔7.2〕How it counts as accomplished. The treatise gives an extremely fine order of moments: first he enters the fourth absorption and many thought-instants without outflows are present in succession, which draw forth many with outflows, and again many without outflows; turning about in this way the later stretches grow shorter by degrees, until at last two thought-instants without outflows, two with outflows, and two without outflows, which is named “the completion of the preparatory effort of the concentration of mixed cultivation”; then reduced to one without outflows, one with outflows, one without outflows, “and thus, the middle moment with outflows being mixed in by the moments without outflows before and after, it is named the completion of the fundamental of the concentration of mixed cultivation.” The treatise also fits a correspondence to it: “the first two moments are like the uninterrupted path, the third moment like the path of liberation.”
First ask: where do the completion of the preparatory effort and the completion of the fundamental differ? In whether the middle stretch with outflows is two thought-instants or one — reduced to one, it is called the completion. The easy error: to suppose “mixed cultivation” means cultivating what has outflows and what has not all mingled together. It does not — three minds, without outflows, with outflows, without outflows, are present one after another, the one without outflows clamping the one with outflows between. In practice: this passage is the only place in the fascicle that describes the marks of cultivation moment by moment, and in reading it one should hold in mind along with it that set of numbers “three, six, nine, twelve, fifteen” (see the next section), for the two sections are one matter.
〔7.3〕Why the mixed cultivation is undertaken. The treatise lists three conditions: “first, for the sake of birth; second, for the sake of ease in the present; third, for the sake of blocking a falling back into the arising of the defilements.” Then it fits them stage by stage: of non-returners, those of keen faculties do it for ease in the present dharma and for birth in the Pure Abodes, and those of dull faculties also for blocking a falling back (“because they fear falling back”); of arhats, those of keen faculties for ease in the present dharma, and those of dull faculties also for guarding against a falling back into the arising of the defilements. The treatise adds a further reason: “cultivating mixedly in this way makes the concentration associated with relish remote” — the mixed cultivation pushes the absorption that is relished away.
First ask: why do the keen and the dull do the same thing for different reasons? Because the dull have the possibility of falling back, and so need one further layer of guarding. The easy error: to suppose all three conditions belong to everyone. They are taken according to stage and to faculty. In practice: wherever the treatise lists a number of conditions, it commonly goes on to apportion them among persons, and this step must not be skipped — the conditions are the general statement, and the apportioning is the real sense.
VIII. The Pure Abodes Are Only Five
〔8.1〕Five grades of mixed cultivation draw down five Pure Abodes. The treatise answers: “because the mixed perfuming and cultivating of the fourth meditative absorption has five grades, the Pure Abodes are only five.” The five grades are “the low, the middle, the high-high, the surpassing-high, and the utmost,” and their counts of minds are three, six, nine, twelve, and fifteen — “herein for the first grade three minds present suffice for its completion, namely first without outflows, next raising one with outflows, and after that one without outflows. The second grade has six, the third nine, the fourth twelve, the fifth fifteen.” The treatise adds a sentence on the mechanism: “it should be known that here the force of what is without outflows perfumes and cultivates what has outflows and makes it draw down the Pure Abodes.”
First ask: why are they multiples of three? Because the smallest unit of one round of mixed cultivation is just three minds (without outflows, with outflows, without outflows), and the five grades are one round up to five rounds. The easy error: to take the five grades for five different absorptions. They are five measures of perfuming and cultivating in one and the same absorption. In practice: the one-to-one drawing of five places by five grades is a clean specimen of the treatise’s principle that “the measure of the cause settles the place of the result” — the numbers must tally before the doctrine will stand.
〔8.2〕The account of another party. At the end the treatise records one account: “some other masters say: by the dominance in order of the five, confidence and the rest, the five Pure Abodes are drawn down.” — By the dominance in order of the five faculties, confidence, diligence, mindfulness, concentration, and discernment, the five Pure Abodes are drawn down. First ask: which does the author take? The text of the treatise sets them side by side and adds no refutation. The easy error: to conclude from the presence of two accounts that the latter is denied. What decides whether it is denied in this fascicle is whether there is a sentence of judgment such as “this is unreasonable”; and here there is none. In practice: read this alongside 〔3.3〕 and 〔3.4〕 and the author’s two hands (recording alongside, and setting up a refutation) are plain at a glance.
IX. The Bodily Witness
〔9.1〕How the name bodily witness is established. The treatise answers: “to have the acquisition of the absorption of cessation is called having obtained the absorption of cessation; it is that non-returner who, if within his body there is the acquisition of the absorption of cessation, is renamed the bodily witness. That is, the non-returner witnesses by his body a dharma resembling nirvāṇa, and so is named the bodily witness.” First ask: what is “the acquisition of the absorption of cessation”? It is the dharma “acquisition” — the acquisition of having obtained the absorption of cessation. Having this acquisition is called having obtained the absorption of cessation.
The easy error: to suppose the bodily witness is another fruit-stage. It is another name upon the fruit of non-returning, the designation turning because he has obtained the absorption of cessation. In practice: the treatise’s regular way of establishing names is “upon a certain stage a certain dharma is obtained, and upon that very stage the name is turned” — family-to-family, one-interval, thin in greed, hatred, and delusion, one who has abandoned the five lower fetters, the bodily witness, are all the same manner of name-making.
〔9.2〕Why he is called the “bodily” witness. The treatise poses a question to itself: “why is he said to be named the bodily witness alone?” And answers itself: “because mind is absent, and because it arises in dependence upon the body.” — The absorption of cessation is an absorption without mind, and at the time of witnessing it mind is no longer proceeding, so that what remains is the body alone, and the name is established from the body. Puguang here marks the word “question” expressly, and takes “because mind is absent, and because it arises in dependence upon the body” for the author’s own answer.
The author thereafter brings out one further explanation: “speaking as the principle really is, one should say: he rises from the absorption of cessation and obtains what he had not obtained before, the quiescence of a body possessed of consciousness, and thereupon thinks thus: this absorption of cessation is the most quiescent of all, utterly resembling nirvāṇa. Witnessing thus the quiescence of the body, he is named the bodily witness; it is because the acquisition and the cognition are present that the quiescence of the body is witnessed.” First ask: where do the two explanations differ? The former speaks from the absence of mind within the absorption, the latter from what is obtained and thought after rising from it. The easy error: to suppose the latter denies the former. It is “speaking as the principle really is” — a further and more exact layer of statement. In practice: wherever you see the words “speaking as the principle really is,” that is a settled statement brought out by the author himself, and it weighs more than the general explanation before it. The cross-treatise engagement raised by this explanation is in the section of further resonances.
〔9.3〕Why the bodily witness is not listed among the eighteen in training. The treatise asks and answers itself: “the sūtras say there are eighteen in training; why is the bodily witness not stated among them? Because the cause depended upon is wanting.” And it glosses “the cause depended upon” for itself: “namely the three trainings without outflows and their fruit, in dependence upon whose differences those in training are established. Since the absorption of cessation is neither a training nor the fruit of a training, the differences among those in training are not stated with respect to achieving it.”
First ask: where is the bone of this reason? In “the differences among those in training are established in dependence upon the three trainings and their fruit” — and since the absorption of cessation is neither a training nor the fruit of a training, it is not upon the axis of classification of that list. The easy error: to suppose the bodily witness fails to enter the eighteen in training because his stage is not high enough. It is not a question of stage but of the axis of classification. In practice: that a dharma fails to enter a given table is often not because it is inferior but because it is not in that table’s denominator — this is a general rule for reading every table of numbered dharmas.
〔9.4〕The fine division into twelve thousand nine hundred sixty. The treatise takes the occasion to push the fine marks of the non-returner to the extreme: by faculty it comes to three, by level to four, by lineage to six, by place to sixteen, by freedom from the defilement of a level to thirty-six; establishing them by the four gates together (place, lineage, freedom from defilement, faculty), six times nine gives fifty-four, sixteen times fifty-four gives eight hundred sixty-four, multiplied threefold gives two thousand five hundred ninety-two; and the five kinds reckoned together, “the accumulated number comes to twelve thousand nine hundred sixty.” The treatise adds a convention of the ledger: “whoever is freed from the nine grades of defilement of a lower level is said to be named bound by all the bonds of the upper level, so that the counts of freedom from defilement of every level may come out even.”
First ask: what use is reckoning so finely? Its use is in displaying that “such is the coarse aspect, and the fine division is without end” — the stages may be divided without limit, while the reality of realization does not lie in the numbers. The easy error: to sink into the arithmetic and forget the occasion on which the treatise speaks the passage (“the differences of the non-returner in their coarse aspect are as stated; analyzed finely the number comes to many thousands”). In practice: the method of verifying the reckoning is in the text of the treatise itself — fifty-four times sixteen gives eight hundred sixty-four, times three gives two thousand five hundred ninety-two, and two thousand five hundred ninety-two times five gives twelve thousand nine hundred sixty; the two ends clasp, and the numbers will not be misremembered.
X. The Approach to Arhatship and the Vajra-like Concentration (the Second of the Two Long Prose Passages)
〔10.1〕Where the approach to arhatship begins and ends. The treatise establishes: “it is that non-returner who goes on abandoning the defilements abandoned by cultivation in the form and formless realms; from the abandoning of the first grade of the first absorption up to the abandoning of the eighth grade at the summit of existence, he should be known to be renamed the approach to arhatship.” First ask: why does it stop at the eighth grade of the summit of existence? Because the abandoning of the ninth grade belongs to the fruit and not to the approach. Yuanhui says here, “the non-returner, from the abandoning of the first grade of the first absorption up to the abandoning of the eighth grade at the summit of existence, is named the approach to arhatship, because he proceeds toward the fruit of arhatship,” agreeing throughout with the text of the treatise.
The easy error: to suppose that the defilements abandoned by cultivation in the two upper realms are divided into several fruit-stages as in the desire realm. The two upper realms have one approach and one fruit only, with no further stage set up in between. In practice: the nine grades of the desire realm yield two fruits and one approach, while the seventy-two grades of the two upper realms make only one approach and one fruit — the density or sparseness of the stages hangs upon the vital point of the realm, and not upon the quantity of the defilements.
〔10.2〕Why the vajra-like concentration alone gets this name. The treatise answers: “the ninth uninterrupted path that abandons the defilement of the summit of existence is also said to be named the vajra-like concentration, because it is able to break every latent tendency, and because it has already broken them before.” And it adds at once the most crucial qualifier: “it does not break every really existent thing; it is able to break every capability.” — It is not that it actually broke every defilement (the earlier defilements had long since been broken), but that it has the capability of breaking them all. Then it gives a comparison: “among the uninterrupted paths able to abandon defilement, the one associated with this concentration is the most excellent.”
Puguang explains this, saying “the vajra-like concentration: as a worldly vajra can break everything, so is this concentration, able to break every defilement. Hence.” First ask: why does that qualifier matter? Because without it the passage would say that “only in the last moment are all the defilements broken at once,” which contravenes the graduated abandoning that precedes. The easy error: this is precisely to read it as a breaking of all at once. In practice: a simile always has its own portion that is taken — what is taken here is the capability of “being able to break,” not the fact of “having broken”; in reading any simile, first ask which portion is taken.
〔10.3〕The first account of the differences of cognition, mode of apprehension, and object: fifty-two. The treatise sets out the first account: the vajra-like concentration extends to a dependence upon nine levels, and by the differences of cognition, mode of apprehension, and object, that gathered under access concentration has fifty-two. The reckoning is: the subsequent cognitions concerning suffering and concerning origination take the suffering and origination of the summit of existence as object with four modes of apprehension each, making eight; the cognitions of dharma concerning cessation and concerning the path have four modes of apprehension each, making eight; the subsequent cognition concerning cessation takes the cessation of the eight levels as object with four modes of apprehension each, making thirty-two; the subsequent cognition concerning the path takes the path of the eight levels as object with four modes of apprehension in all, making four — eight and eight and thirty-two and four give exactly fifty-two. And the treatise explains the ground of the last item: “because the paths of the class of subsequent cognition that counteract the eight levels are causes of one another as of one class, and must take them all together as object.” Then it lists the numbers of the other levels: the intermediate absorption and the four absorptions the same fifty-two, the sphere of space twenty-eight, the sphere of consciousness twenty-four, the sphere of nothingness twenty — because in the formless there is no cognition of dharma, nor any subsequent cognition concerning cessation taking a lower level’s cessation as object.
First ask: why do the three formless levels diminish in turn? Because the higher one goes the fewer are the levels taken as object. The easy error: to take fifty-two for a number to be memorized. It is a sum that can be verified item by item. In practice: wherever the treatise brings out a large number, it can usually be reckoned again by its items — divide into items, then add, and the number comes alive.
〔10.4〕The second and third accounts. The second account: the subsequent cognition concerning the path also has four modes of apprehension severally for the path of each of the eight levels, exceeding the first account by twenty-eight, so that access concentration gathers eighty kinds, the other levels being reckoned accordingly (the sphere of space forty, the sphere of consciousness thirty-two, the sphere of nothingness twenty-four). The third account: the subsequent cognition concerning cessation takes the cessation of the eight levels as object both severally and all together, with four modes of apprehension each, exceeding the first account by one hundred twelve, so that access concentration gathers one hundred sixty-four, the other levels accordingly (the sphere of space fifty-two, the sphere of consciousness thirty-six, the sphere of nothingness twenty-four). The treatise closes with a sentence: “if one analyzes by lineage, faculty, and the rest, still more kinds come to be; this should be pondered out as principle requires.”
First ask: where exactly do the three accounts differ? Wholly in the taking or leaving of “severally as object” and “all together as object” — in the first account the subsequent cognition concerning the path takes them only all together, in the second it takes them severally, in the third the subsequent cognition concerning cessation takes them both severally and all together. The easy error: to take the three accounts for three different concentrations. They are three ways of counting one and the same concentration. In practice: the excess numbers can be checked — eighty less fifty-two gives twenty-eight, and one hundred sixty-four less fifty-two gives one hundred twelve; the treatise itself marks out these two excesses, and they are just the key to the reckoning that it leaves the reader. Puguang marks this passage as “three accounts in all” and lists them without adjudicating, while Fabao has an adjudication of his own — see the section of further resonances.
〔10.5〕The knowledge of exhaustion and the completing of one beyond training. The treatise goes on: “since this concentration is able to abandon the ninth grade of defilement at the level of the summit of existence, it can draw forth the knowledge of exhaustion that proceeds along with the acquisition of the exhaustion of those defilements.” Then it settles its position: “the vajra-like concentration is the last uninterrupted path among those that abandon defilement; the knowledge of exhaustion is the last path of liberation among those that abandon defilement; because this path of liberation arises together with the acquisition of the exhaustion of the several outflows for the first time, it is named the knowledge of exhaustion.” The knowledge of exhaustion once arisen, “one becomes the fruit of the arhat beyond training.”
First ask: are the vajra-like concentration and the knowledge of exhaustion one or two? Two — the one an uninterrupted path, the other a path of liberation, following one upon the other. The easy error: to confound the two as one matter. In practice: the uninterrupted path abandons and the path of liberation realizes — this pair is used throughout the treatise; and at the end of this fascicle, in treating the eighty-nine fruits of the ascetic life, the same pair will be used again to divide nature from fruit.
〔10.6〕How the two names “beyond training” and “arhat” arise. The treatise glosses “beyond training”: “the things he should train in for the sake of obtaining a further fruit are for him no longer, and so he obtains the name beyond training.” It glosses “arhat”: “because he should now only do what benefits others, and because all who have defilement should make offerings to him, the name arhat is established in accordance with this sense.” First ask: from which end is each of the two names established? “Beyond training” from “there being nothing further to train in,” and “arhat” from “doing what benefits others and being worthy of offerings” — the one blocking, the other displaying. The easy error: to suppose the two names are synonyms doubled. In practice: the treatise commonly establishes names in pairs — one blocking what is absent, one displaying what is present; read the two names together and the whole aspect of the stage comes out.
〔10.7〕The name “in training” and the marking off of the ordinary being. The treatise asks itself: “the four approaches and three fruits made out above are all named in training; why do these first seven obtain the name in training?” Answer: “because for the sake of obtaining the exhaustion of the outflows they constantly delight in training.” Trainings must be three: the higher discipline, the higher mind, the higher discernment, with discipline, concentration, and discernment for their entity. Someone objects: an ordinary being too should be named in training. The treatise answers: “not so, because he has not seen and known the principle of the truths as it really is, and because it is admitted that he may at a later time lose the right training,” and it adduces the Buddha’s words, “training in what should be trained in, training in what should be trained in — such a one alone do I call one in training,” to bring out that the Well-Gone One’s saying the word “training” twice over is to display “training in what is rightly to be trained in without falling away.”
First ask: what is it that the ordinary being lacks? Two things — he has not seen the truths as they really are, and he may lose the right training. The easy error: to suppose that whoever is training counts as one in training. “In training” is the name of a stage from the seeing of the truths upward. In practice: where a word is repeated in a sūtra there is commonly a sense in it, and the treatise regularly enters upon its explanation of a sūtra by way of the repeated word; this is a clean specimen.
〔10.8〕Why one abiding in his intrinsic state is still named in training. The treatise asks itself again: “when a noble one abides in his intrinsic state, how is he named in training?” Answer: “because the intention to train is not yet fulfilled, like a traveler resting a while; or because the dharmas of training constantly follow after him.” And it defines the dharmas of training and of one beyond training: “what are the dharmas of training? The dharmas without outflows and conditioned of one in training. What are the dharmas of one beyond training? The dharmas without outflows and conditioned of one beyond training.”
First ask: does one count as training when he is not at his effort? He does — because the intention to train is not yet fulfilled, and because the acquisition of the dharmas of training constantly follows him. The easy error: to equate “training” with the preparatory effort presently before one. In practice: a stage hangs upon “acquisition” and upon “intention,” and not upon whether one is at his effort at this moment — and this holds in reading every name of a stage in the treatise.
〔10.9〕Why nirvāṇa is named neither training nor beyond training. The treatise puts two questions and gives two answers: it is not named training, “because one beyond training and an ordinary being achieve it as well”; it is not named beyond training, “because one in training and an ordinary being achieve it as well.” First ask: why are the two reasons of the same form? Because “training” and “beyond training” are names established with respect to persons, and nirvāṇa is achieved by all three kinds of person, so that it can be hung upon neither side. The easy error: to suppose that nirvāṇa fails to enter the stages because it is too lofty. It is because it does not mark persons off that it does not enter a classification whose axis is persons. In practice: once again it is proved that a dharma’s failing to enter a given table is a matter of the denominator (the same principle as 〔9.3〕).
〔10.10〕The eight noble ones and the five entities. The treatise gathers up: “thus those in training and those beyond training come in all to eight noble pudgalas, because proceeding upon an approach and abiding in a fruit are each of four.” But it corrects itself at once: “although the names are eight the entities are only five, namely abiding in the four fruits and the approach to the first fruit, because the approaches to the latter three fruits are not apart from the preceding fruit.” And it marks out the range of application: “this is said with regard to one who obtains the fruits in due order. If one doubly free of craving or wholly free of craving abides within the path of seeing, he is named the approach to the fruit of once-returning or of non-returning, and is not gathered under the preceding fruit.”
First ask: which of eight and five is real? The names are eight and the entities five — because the approach to each of the latter three fruits is just the person of the preceding fruit, and does not make a further entity. The easy error: to suppose eight and five contradict each other. Name and entity are two axes, each with its own number. In practice: the treatise often gives a tidy number and immediately corrects its real count, and in reading one must keep the two layers of “name and entity” and of “general and particular” apart.
XI. By What Path the Defilement of What Level Is Left Behind
〔11.1〕The summit of existence is left behind by the path without outflows alone. The treatise establishes: “only the path without outflows frees one from the defilement of the summit of existence, and not a path with outflows.” Three reasons: “because above this there is no further mundane path; because a level cannot counteract that level itself; because the defilements of that very level increase by attachment here.” Then it draws out a general rule: “if those defilements increase by attachment with respect to this, this certainly cannot counteract those defilements; if this has the power to counteract those, then those certainly do not increase by attachment with respect to this; therefore the path of a level does not counteract that level.” As for the other eight levels, “they extend to the two paths, since both the mundane and the supramundane path can free one from them.”
First ask: are the three reasons three matters or one? The first is a fact (above the summit of existence there is no mundane path to borrow), and the latter two are the two faces, positive and negative, of one and the same principle. The easy error: to take “a level does not counteract that level” for a slogan. It has a definite mechanism — increase by attachment. In practice: wherever the treatise brings out a general rule it usually gives at once the two forms, positive and negative (“if . . . then . . . ; if . . . then . . .”), and that paired construction is its form of proof.
〔11.2〕How many acquisitions of release from bondage there are. The treatise establishes: “when the several noble ones in training by a path with outflows become free of the defilement abandoned by cultivation in the lower eight levels, they can draw forth both acquisitions of release from bondage in full; becoming free of them by a path without outflows is likewise, because what the two paths do is the same.”
The treatise then records the divergent explanation of one party and refutes it. Some other masters take “there is a casting off of the acquisition without outflows and yet the defilements are still not achieved” for their proof, saying that when one becomes free of defilement by a path without outflows an acquisition of release from bondage with outflows must arise as well — for otherwise, when at the sharpening of the faculties the dull noble paths are cast off all at once, the release from bondage in respect of the upper defilements would all be unachieved, and those defilements would have to be achieved over again. The author adjudges: “this proof is unreasonable.” The reason is that that noble one, even without an acquisition of abandonment with outflows, would still not achieve the defilements of the upper levels — and he adduces two instances, one of sharpening the faculties after becoming separated from the summit of existence, and one of an ordinary being not achieving the lower defilements when born upward.
First ask: are the conclusions of the author and of those other masters the same? They are the same — both allow the two acquisitions of release from bondage; what is at issue is “what is to be used as proof.” The easy error: to suppose the author denies the “two acquisitions.” What he denies is that manner of proof, not that conclusion. In practice: in disputes it very often happens that the conclusion is shared and the argument differs; in reading one should first ask whether what is at issue is the thesis or the reason.
〔11.3〕The two items obtained by implication. The treatise fills out the whole table by “implication”: an ordinary being using a path with outflows draws forth only an acquisition of abandonment with outflows; a noble one, when by a path without outflows he becomes free of the defilements abandoned by seeing and of the defilements abandoned by cultivation at the summit of existence, draws forth only an acquisition of abandonment without outflows. First ask: why need these two not be set up as main text? Because they can be drawn out from the criterion given above. The easy error: to take the text of “implication” for something secondary. It is a filled-in cell of the table, and without it the table is not complete. In practice: in reading this treatise, wherever you see “it is already established by implication” or “it follows of itself by implication,” you should of your own accord fill that cell into the table.
〔11.4〕By the path of which level the defilement of which level is left behind. The treatise establishes: a path without outflows, if gathered under access concentration, “can free one from the desire realm up to the summit of existence”; those gathered under the intermediate absorption, the four absorptions, and the three formless spheres, “each according as it fits can free one from the defilement of its own and of the upper levels; not from the lower, because those are already left behind.” A path with outflows, on the other hand, “can all of it free one only from the level next below, and not from its own level and the rest,” for three reasons: the defilements of its own level increase by attachment here, its force is feeble, and (the upper levels) are already left behind.
First ask: why can access concentration alone free one from every level? Because it is the lowest level upon which the path without outflows depends, and above it there is nothing in the way. The easy error: to suppose that the higher the absorption the more defilements it can free one from. Quite the contrary — the higher one goes the fewer it can free one from, because the lower levels are already left behind. In practice: read this section together with 〔11.1〕 and the whole treatise’s table of freedom from defilement is complete: the vertical axis is the level depended upon, the horizontal the level freed from; what has outflows can go only one cell downward, while what is without outflows can run through them all.
〔11.5〕Whether the path of liberation too is at the neighboring stage. The treatise asks and answers itself: the uninterrupted paths are all gathered under the neighboring stage, but the paths of liberation are not. “The neighboring stages upon which the paths depend are eight, namely the four meditative absorptions and the lower edges of the formless spheres. Those freed from are nine, namely the desire realm and the eight absorptions. When the first three neighboring stages free one from the defilement of the lower three, at the moment when the ninth path of liberation is present one either enters the fundamental absorption or remains at the neighboring stage. When the five neighboring stages above each free one from the lower defilement, at the moment when the ninth path of liberation is present one must enter the fundamental absorption and not remain at the neighboring stage.”
The reason is very fine: “because the neighboring stage and the fundamental absorption are equal in the faculty of equanimity; because the neighboring stages and the fundamental absorptions of the lower three absorptions differ in the faculty of feeling.” — The neighboring stages and the fundamental absorptions of the upper five levels are alike the feeling of equanimity, and so one must enter the fundamental absorption; the neighboring stages of the lower three absorptions have the feeling of equanimity while their fundamental absorptions have the feelings of joy and pleasure, and since the feelings differ the turning is difficult, and so remaining at the neighboring stage is allowed. The treatise adds two sentences: “some are unable to enter, because turning into a different feeling is somewhat difficult; yet at the time of freeing oneself from the lower defilement one must be delighting in what is above,” and “if the feelings do not differ, one must enter the fundamental absorption.”
First ask: why does the boundary fall just between the lower three and the upper five? Precisely because of the sameness or difference of the faculty of feeling. The easy error: to suppose this is a convention. It has a real cause — the sameness or difference of feeling. In practice: whenever you meet a boundary line that looks arbitrary, look for that “because” the treatise gives; the treatise’s boundaries are almost never without a cause.
〔11.6〕What the mundane path takes as object, and what modes of apprehension it makes. The treatise establishes: “the mundane uninterrupted and liberation paths can take, in that order, the lower level and the upper level as object, making coarseness, suffering, and obstruction, and calm, sublimity, and escape.” The uninterrupted paths take as object the dharmas with outflows of the level next below their own, making any one of the three modes of apprehension of coarseness, suffering, and obstruction; the liberation paths take as object the dharmas with outflows of the level next above, making any one of the three modes of apprehension of calm, sublimity, and escape. All three names have their gloss: “because it is not quiescent it is said to be named coarse”; “because it can be crossed over only by great toil, and because it is not sublime, it is said to be named suffering, since it has much coarse heaviness able to do harm”; “because it is not a going forth it is said to be named obstruction, since it can obstruct one’s crossing out of one’s own level, as the thick wall of a prison obstructs going out.” As for calm, sublimity, and escape, they are “to be explained by reversing this.”
First ask: why do the uninterrupted paths take the lower and the liberation paths the upper as object? Because at the time of abandoning one must be disgusted with what is below, and at the time of realizing one must delight in what is above — one disgust and one delight, which are exactly the two feet of going forth. The easy error: to take the six modes of apprehension for six psychological descriptions. They are contemplative practices with strictly determined objects — three taking the lower, three the upper. In practice: the simile “like the thick wall of a prison” is the most memorable sentence in the section — an obstruction is not a resistance from outside but the very thickness of one’s own level. The divergence of the two translations’ renderings in this section is in the further resonances.
XII. After the Knowledge of Exhaustion
〔12.1〕The unshakable and the not unshakable. The treatise establishes: “for the several arhats of the unshakable lineage, after the knowledge of exhaustion the knowledge of non-arising arises with nothing intervening, and there arises no further knowledge of exhaustion or right view of one beyond training. For the other arhats apart from those of the dharma of the unshakable, after the knowledge of exhaustion a knowledge of exhaustion arises, or else the right view of one beyond training is drawn forth, and not the knowledge of non-arising, because it is admitted that they may afterwards fall back.”
First ask: why does the knowledge of non-arising not arise for one not of the unshakable? Because the knowledge of non-arising is the cognition that “they will not arise again,” and since it is still admitted that he may fall back, he cannot say that sentence. The easy error: to suppose the knowledge of non-arising is merely a strengthened knowledge of exhaustion. The two cognitions determine different matters — the one determines “already exhausted,” the other “will not arise again.” In practice: the name of a stage can usually be read backward into the content it determines; when you read the name of a cognition, first ask what it has determined.
〔12.2〕Whether the unshakable have right view. The treatise sets itself a question: “does no right view arise for those of the unshakable lineage spoken of above?” Answer: “right view does arise, only it was not stated, because every worthy fruit has this.” — It is not that he has none; it is that since every worthy fruit has it, it need not be stated. “That is, for one of the dharma of the unshakable, after the knowledge of non-arising a knowledge of non-arising arises, or the right view of one beyond training.”
First ask: why is what is “held in common” the very thing not stated? Because what the stanza is making out is the differences. The easy error: to conclude, from a dharma not being listed under some stage, that the stage does not have it. In practice: the treatise’s not stating something may mean “it has it not,” and may mean “it is held in common and so need not be stated separately” — the two must be told apart from the context, and this section gives a clear instance.
XIII. The Nature of the Ascetic Life and the Fruits of the Ascetic Life
〔13.1〕What the nature of the ascetic life is. The treatise answers with the utmost directness: “the several paths without outflows are the nature of the ascetic life; one who bears this path is named an ascetic, because he is able to strive and to still the defilements.” And it adduces a sūtra for testimony: “because he is able to strive and to still away the several evil and unwholesome dharmas,” down to “therefore he is named an ascetic.” Puguang glosses the name here, saying “ascetic here means striving and stilling, because he is able to strive and to still the defilements” — the two words striving and stilling fasten exactly upon the treatise’s “strive” and “still.”
First ask: is the nature of the ascetic life a person or a dharma? A dharma — the path without outflows itself; it is the one who bears this path who is called an ascetic. The easy error: to read “ascetic” as a social condition or a matter of robes. In this treatise it is the name of a fruit-stage, with only one criterion: whether there is a path without outflows. In practice: the four approaches and four fruits of the whole fascicle come down to the entity only here — before this it was the graduations, and here it is the ruler itself.
〔13.2〕Why an ordinary being is not a true ascetic. The treatise answers: “because an ordinary being cannot proceed with finality toward nirvāṇa without a different destination, he is not a true ascetic.” First ask: what does “different” refer to? To a fork in what he proceeds toward — what he proceeds toward may not really be nirvāṇa, or he may proceed toward it and not with finality. The easy error: to take this for a term of disparagement. It is a sentence of criterion — the nature of the ascetic life being the path without outflows, and the ordinary being having none, he naturally does not come in. In practice: for every “not a true such-and-such” in the treatise one should turn back and find the defining sentence; match the definition and the judgment is plain.
〔13.3〕How the eighty-nine are reckoned. The treatise establishes: “the conditioned and the unconditioned are the fruits of the ascetic life; the sūtras say the differences of these are four, but speaking as the marks really are and reckoning by stage they are eighty-nine, all having the paths of liberation and the cessations through discernment for their nature.” The reckoning is: for abandoning the defilements abandoned by seeing there are eight uninterrupted paths and eight paths of liberation; for abandoning the defilements abandoned by cultivation there are eighty-one uninterrupted paths and eighty-one paths of liberation — eight and eighty-one give eighty-nine.
Then it divides nature from fruit: “the several uninterrupted paths are only the nature of the ascetic life, and not its fruit; the several paths of liberation are also the entity of the conditioned fruit of the ascetic life, being their homogeneous result and result of human effort. Each single cessation through discernment is only the entity of the unconditioned fruit of the ascetic life, being their result of release from bondage and result of human effort.” Yuanhui sets up a double-edged gloss here, saying “on the side of the sense of stilling evil it is named the nature of the ascetic life; on the side of being the homogeneous result of the uninterrupted path it is named a fruit of the ascetic life” — one and the same path of liberation is nature as regards stilling evil and fruit as regards homogeneity.
First ask: why is the uninterrupted path only nature and not fruit? Because it is abandoning, and has not yet realized. The easy error: to take the eighty-nine for eighty-nine fruit-stages. They are eighty-nine paths of liberation with their corresponding cessations through discernment. In practice: the parting of nature and fruit lies wholly at that one cut between the uninterrupted path and the path of liberation — the cut was set up already at 〔10.5〕, and here is its harvest.
〔13.4〕Why the sūtras state only four fruits. The treatise answers: “if a stage of the path of abandoning is complete in the five causes, the Buddha in the sūtras establishes it as a fruit.” The five causes are: casting off the path once obtained (casting off the path of the fruit and of the approach obtained before), obtaining a superior path (obtaining the superior path gathered under the fruit), gathering the abandonments together (by one single acquisition obtaining the several abandonments), obtaining the eight cognitions (the four cognitions of dharma and the four subsequent cognitions), and being able to cultivate the sixteen modes of apprehension all at once. “At the stages of the four fruits the five causes are all complete, and at the other stages they are not, and therefore the Buddha does not state them.”
First ask: which of the five causes marks off most sharply? “Gathering the abandonments together” and “obtaining the eight cognitions” are the hardest — only at a fruit-stage is there that single gathering acquisition, and only then are the four of dharma and the four subsequent complete. The easy error: to suppose that the four fruits are established from the felt experience of practice. They are established from these five checkable conditions. In practice: the third cause, “gathering the abandonments together,” uses the same ledger-method as “abandoning the five lower fetters” in 〔2.5〕 — what the treatise buried earlier is settled here. Puguang and Fabao differ upon the boundary of “the other stages”; see the further resonances.
〔13.5〕Why the two fruits obtained by a mundane path also count. The treatise sets itself an objection: “if the pure path alone is the nature of the ascetic life, how are the two fruits obtained by the force of a path with outflows also gathered under the fruits of the ascetic life?” The answer has two layers. First: “this fruit does not have for the nature of its fruit of abandoning only the cessation through discernment obtained by the mundane path; it takes in besides the cessation through discernment obtained upon the path of seeing, mixed among them, and the whole makes one fruit, because they are obtained by one and the same acquisition of the path of the fruit.” And it adduces a sūtra for testimony — the fruit of once-returning is “abandoning the three fetters and being thin in greed, hatred, and delusion,” and the fruit of non-returning “abandoning the five lower fetters”; the three fetters are just what is abandoned upon the path of seeing, so that a portion obtained without outflows really is contained therein. Second: “again, the cessation through discernment obtained by a mundane path is upheld by the acquisition of abandonment without outflows, and because upheld by that force he does not die even when he falls back, it too obtains the name of the entity of a fruit of the ascetic life.”
First ask: how do the two layers of reason divide their work? The first says “there is really a portion without outflows within it,” the second says “its continuance rests upon being upheld by an acquisition without outflows.” Puguang sets a sentence of judgment under the first layer: “the lesser follows the greater, and it is named a fruit of the ascetic life.” The easy error: to suppose that a mundane path too can count as the nature of the ascetic life. It cannot — the nature is without outflows alone; what can count is the fruit. In practice: nature and fruit may have different sources — this is the most crucial sentence in the section, and the one exceptional handling in the whole chapter.
XIV. Brahminhood · the Wheel of Brahmā · the Wheel of Dharma
〔14.1〕The three other names. The treatise establishes: the true nature of the ascetic life “is also said in the sūtras to be named the nature of brahminhood, because it can drive away the several defilements”; “this same is also said to be named the wheel of Brahmā, because it is turned by the power of the true Brahmā king”; the Buddha “is endowed with the unsurpassed quality of Brahmā, and so the World-Honored One alone should be named Brahmā,” with the sūtra adduced for testimony, “the Buddha is also named Brahmā, also named quiescent, also named cool.”
First ask: from which sense is each of the three names established? Brahminhood from “driving away the defilements,” the wheel of Brahmā from “being turned by the true Brahmā,” Brahmā from “the unsurpassed quality of Brahmā.” Puguang glosses the word “Brahmā,” saying “Brahmā here means pure.” The easy error: to suppose this is Buddhism borrowing the names of the non-Buddhists. The reasons the treatise gives lie wholly in the sense — because it drives away defilement, because it is turned by the true Brahmā — and not in where the name came from. In practice: when a name is established, first ask what reason the treatise gives; and the three commentaries’ glosses of the name “brahmin” happen to diverge — see the further resonances.
〔14.2〕Why the wheel of Dharma is the path of seeing alone. The treatise establishes: “within this, in dependence upon the path of seeing alone, the World-Honored One in some places says it is named the wheel of Dharma. As a wheel of the world has the marks of swiftness and the rest, the path of seeing resembles it and so is named the wheel of Dharma.” The five marks are: “because the path of seeing the truths proceeds swiftly; because it lets go and takes up; because it subdues what is not yet subdued; because it presses down what is already subdued; because it turns about upward and downward — being complete in these five marks it is like a wheel of the world.”
First ask: how are the five marks fitted on? Swiftness answers to the wheel’s quick turning, letting go and taking up to the wheel’s leaving and meeting the ground before and behind, subduing what is not yet subdued and pressing down what is subdued to the wheel’s crushing, and turning about upward and downward to the wheel’s revolution. The easy error: to read the simile as rhetoric. Here it is fitted mark for mark, and each of the five marks has a real referent. In practice: the treatise’s rule in using a simile is “first bring out the marks of what is likened, then fit them mark by mark” — whenever you meet a simile, first count how many marks it lists.
〔14.3〕Another way of fitting it. The treatise records a divergent account: “the Venerable Ghoṣa says thus: as a wheel of the world has the marks of spokes and the rest, the eightfold noble path resembles it and is named a wheel. That is, right view, right thought, right diligence, and right mindfulness are like the spokes of a worldly wheel; right speech, right action, and right livelihood are like the hub; right concentration is like the rim; and therefore it is named the wheel of Dharma.”
First ask: where do the two accounts differ? The former takes the wheel’s “function” (swiftness, letting go and taking up, subduing, revolving), this one its “body” (spokes, hub, rim). The stanza takes both accounts in with “because in swiftness and the rest it resembles a wheel, or because it is complete with spokes and the rest.” The easy error: to suppose the two accounts exclude each other. The word “or” in the stanza is precisely the mark of their standing together. In practice: one simile may be taken from its function or from its body; the treatise lets both stand without judging, and the reader need not choose a side for it either. The differing designation of this master in the two translations is in the further resonances.
〔14.4〕How it is known that the wheel of Dharma is the path of seeing alone. The treatise asks and answers itself: “because when the path of seeing arose for Kauṇḍinya and the rest, it was said that the true wheel of Dharma had been turned.” — It is at the arising of the path of seeing for Kauṇḍinya and the rest that scripture says “the wheel of Dharma has been turned,” and hence it is known that what is meant is the path of seeing. Puguang glosses the name Kauṇḍinya, saying “Ājñāta here means ‘he has understood,’ and Kauṇḍinya is as said before.”
First ask: what kind of proof is this? It is a proof from teaching, and taken moreover from “when the words about turning the wheel of Dharma appear.” The easy error: to suppose this is an inference. It is a proof from the text. In practice: the treatise commonly uses proof from principle and proof from teaching together in establishing a thesis, and this is a specimen of pure proof from teaching — the type of evidence differing, the manner of refuting it differs too.
〔14.5〕The three turnings and twelve modes of apprehension. The treatise explains: “this is the noble truth of suffering, this should be fully comprehended, this has been fully comprehended — these are named the three turnings. And at the moment of each single turning there arise separately and severally the eye, the cognition, the clear knowing, and the awakening, and this is said to be named the twelve modes of apprehension.” And it adds: “such three turnings and twelve modes of apprehension belong to every truth; yet because the numbers are equal, only three turnings and twelve modes of apprehension are stated, as one says the two dharmas and the seven-place skill and the like.”
First ask: is not three times four twelve? Then why is it said that every truth has them? Because every truth has three turnings and each turning gives rise to four things, so that the real count is twelve turnings and forty-eight modes of apprehension; it is only because the count is equal for every truth that the count of one truth is raised to cover the rest. The easy error: to reckon the twelve modes of apprehension as three turnings times four truths. The twelve are three turnings times four things (eye, cognition, clear knowing, awakening). Yuanhui has a word-for-word fitting of the four words “eye, cognition, clear knowing, awakening” — see the further resonances. In practice: when the numbers of a set of dharmas will not tally, first ask whether the number raises one to cover the rest, or is a real total.
〔14.6〕The author’s own objection and his gathering-up. The treatise records the Vaibhāṣika masters’ fitting of the three turnings to the three paths (of seeing, of cultivation, and beyond training), and at once objects to itself: “if that is so, the three turnings and twelve modes of apprehension are not the path of seeing alone; how can it be said that the name of the wheel of Dharma is established upon the path of seeing alone?” And concludes for itself: “therefore one should only say that it is just the whole body of dharma-teaching belonging to these three turnings and twelve modes of apprehension that is named the wheel of Dharma; this accords with correct principle.”
First ask: does this overturn what went before? It does not — what went before, “the path of seeing resembles a wheel and so is named the wheel of Dharma,” was a name established from resemblance, while here “the body of dharma-teaching is named the wheel of Dharma” is a name established from turning within another’s continuum; the two rest on different grounds. The treatise then glosses the word “turning”: “because by this body of dharma-teaching it goes into another’s continuum and makes him understand the sense. Or all the noble paths are the wheel of Dharma, because they turn within the body of one to be trained. When the path of seeing arises in another’s continuum it has reached the first step of turning, and so is named already turned.” The easy error: to suppose that of the author’s account and the Vaibhāṣika masters’ one must be right. The author has given a wider definition that houses them both. In practice: the real sense of the word “turning” is “entering into the continuum of another” — the wheel of Dharma is a wheel because it has moved onto somebody else, and this is the most crucial sentence in the chapter. Yuanhui has a further school-marking here — see the further resonances.
XV. In Dependence upon Which Realm They Are Obtained
〔15.1〕The first three fruits and the fourth. The treatise establishes: “the first three are obtained in dependence upon a body of the desire realm alone; the obtaining of arhatship is in dependence upon bodies of the three realms.” First ask: why can arhatship be obtained in all three realms? Because by then the business of the path of seeing has long been done, and what remains is only the abandoning of the defilements abandoned by cultivation, which a body of an upper realm can also accomplish. The easy error: to suppose that the higher the fruit-stage the more excellent the body it requires. Quite the contrary — the earlier the stage the stricter the condition it requires. In practice: this section is the gathering-in of the whole fascicle, and it draws every stage that has gone before back to the single condition of “body.”
〔15.2〕Why the third fruit too cannot be obtained in dependence upon an upper realm. The treatise first gives a step: “the first two fruits, not having become free of craving for desire, are reasonably enough not obtained in dependence upon an upper realm” — those of the first two fruits are of themselves not yet free of craving for desire, and to say that they do not obtain their fruit in an upper realm raises no difficulty. The difficulty is with the third fruit: he is already free of craving for desire; why can he not obtain it in an upper realm? The treatise answers: “by principle and by the testimony of teaching.”
The principle is: “because in dependence upon a body of an upper realm there is no path of seeing; and it is not that one who has become free of craving for desire before leaving the path of seeing may have the principle of realizing the fruit of non-returning by leaping.” — Realizing non-returning by leaping requires the path of seeing; and since there is no path of seeing in the upper realms, there is no realizing it by leaping to speak of. First ask: where is the joint of this step? In the two words “realizing by leaping” — one who has become free of craving beforehand may upon entering the path of seeing obtain the fruit of non-returning directly, and this is called realizing by leaping; and the precondition of realizing by leaping is the path of seeing. The easy error: to suppose the third fruit is not obtained in an upper realm because his freedom from craving is insufficient. It is because the path of seeing is not in the upper realms. In practice: the answer of this section does not lie in whether he is qualified, but in whether that process is there at all.
〔15.3〕Why there is no path of seeing in the upper realms. The treatise gives three causes: “because within the formless there is no right hearing”; “and because within that realm one does not take a lower level as object, the ordinary beings of the form realm being attached to the pleasure of the superior absorptions”; “and because there is no feeling of suffering and so no disgust arises, and without disgust one cannot obtain the path of seeing.”
First ask: at which realm is each of the three causes aimed? The first at the formless (no hearing), the second at the form realm (attached to the pleasure of absorption and not taking a lower level as object), the third holding for both upper realms (no feeling of suffering and so no disgust). Yuanhui sets out the reason under the third cause, saying “to enter the path of seeing one must be disgusted with suffering; in the form realm there is no disgust with suffering, because one is attached to the pleasure of absorption.” The easy error: to spread the three causes evenly over the two realms. Each has its own object. In practice: what the path of seeing requires the treatise here marks out in reverse, in three items — hearing, taking what is below as object, and disgust; read forward they are lacks, and read backward they are the conditions.
〔15.4〕The testimony of teaching. The treatise adduces a sūtra: “there are five pudgalas who penetrate here and reach finality there, namely those who attain parinirvāṇa in the interval up to those who go upstream.” Then it glosses the key word: “this word penetrate refers to the path of seeing alone, because it is the first preparatory effort for realizing perfect quiescence. By this, the path of seeing is certainly absent in the upper realms.”
First ask: how does this sūtra prove the point? Because the sūtra says expressly “penetrate here and reach finality there” — the penetrating (the path of seeing) is here (the desire realm), and the finality (attaining parinirvāṇa) is there (the upper realms); had the upper realms a path of seeing, the sūtra would not have apportioned them so. The easy error: to read “penetrate” as realizing a fruit. The treatise has fixed it: penetrating refers to the path of seeing alone. In practice: the force of a proof from teaching lies wholly in the fixing of the key word — for every sūtra the treatise adduces it first fixes the word, and this sentence is the last and the cleanest demonstration of it in the fascicle. The whole fascicle is thereby gathered in: from the three conditions of family-to-family to the body upon which the path of seeing depends, one graduated scale has been measured to its end, and the ruler itself is that one sentence, “the several paths without outflows are the nature of the ascetic life.”
Further Resonances: The Mirror of the Three Commentaries
The foregoing is the sense of this fascicle’s own text. Below is a separate section gathering four matters: the adjudications and divergences of the three commentaries, Saṅghabhadra’s refutations and supplements, the divergences of Paramārtha’s earlier translation, and coordinates for parallel reading. A mirror is not the treatise; it is only another way of reading one and the same passage. All are recorded alongside without adjudication, each restored to its own place.
1. Where the Three Commentaries Diverge
One commentary wholly absent from this fascicle. The commentaries upon this fascicle have one plain gap: Shentai’s commentary is a fragmentary text, and of the seven fascicles surviving only one belongs to the Chapter on the Worthy and the Noble, and that one marks itself as expounding fascicle twenty-five of the treatise — precisely the next fascicle. This fascicle (fascicle twenty-four of the treatise) has no Shentai to hang upon. This is a conclusion reached after checking the surviving fascicles item by item, and not a failure of searching; the want is marked as it stands, and is not supplied from the text of another fascicle.
The question-and-answer structure of the seven destinies of good men: each of the three adds a layer. This is the passage where reading the three commentaries together tells most in this fascicle. Puguang marks out the first layer — the author posing and answering a question to himself (“if that is so, why . . . does the Buddha say there are only seven destinies of good men,” marked as “the question, and the stanza answering it”). Fabao marks out a second layer besides — taking the treatise’s “why are the destinies of good men established in accordance with these alone, and not in accordance with the other noble ones in training” as the question and “destiny has the sense of proceeding” and what follows as the answer, which is a division Puguang did not separately set up. Yuanhui adds a third layer — setting up a further question and answer, “why are the two fruits of stream-entry and once-returning not established as destinies of good men.” The three together make the chain of question and answer in this passage complete. Which marking is the more complete this section does not adjudge; it records only the divergence of the three houses’ markings.
The inclination as to the order of with and without exertion: Puguang alone hands down a judgment. The text of the treatise says only that “the sūtras state attaining parinirvāṇa without exertion first and with exertion after, and such an order accords with principle,” and does not say for itself whose party it takes. Puguang first marks the intent of the refutation, saying that what the author refutes is that “attaining parinirvāṇa in the interval and upon birth also take the conditioned as object, and abandon defilement by the unconditioned, and ought likewise to be named with exertion and without exertion,” and then adjudges outright, “the author’s intent inclines to the Sautrāntikas, and therefore he approves it.” ⇒ The text of the treatise itself carries no such label; this is Puguang’s adjudication. Fabao and Yuanhui mark nothing here. Recorded without adjudication.
The definition of attaining parinirvāṇa in the interval: Fabao takes Saṅghabhadra’s explanation directly. Puguang makes his own explanation of attaining parinirvāṇa in the interval, while Fabao, in explaining the sentence “the one said to attain parinirvāṇa in the interval,” cites the text of the Treatise Conforming to Correct Principle directly for his explanation. This is a consistent feature of Fabao’s form — where Saṅghabhadra has already explained something, he often takes it directly rather than composing another explanation of his own. The fact itself is worth noting: though both are commentaries upon the Kośa, the direction from which they take their material differs. Recorded without adjudication.
The three accounts of the vajra-like concentration: Puguang lists without adjudicating, Fabao cites the Correct Principle and adjudges the third correct. Puguang marks the passage “three accounts in all, this being the first master,” and divides them one by one without making a choice. Fabao expressly sets a question, “among the three accounts which is correct?”, and cites the Treatise Conforming to Correct Principle in answer, adjudging the third master (one hundred sixty-four kinds) correct. ⇒ The text of the treatise itself hands down no judgment (saying only, “if one analyzes by lineage, faculty, and the rest, still more kinds come to be; this should be pondered out as principle requires”). Fabao’s adjudication is a commentator’s adjudication, not the settled doctrine of the treatise. Recorded without adjudication.
The range of the five causes that establish four fruits: Fabao alone adds the sharpening of the faculties. The text of the treatise says, “at the stages of the four fruits the five causes are all complete, and at the other stages they are not.” Puguang explains along with the text, and brings out for himself a passage on the reason, “the defilements abandoned by seeing are easily abandoned, and one fruit is established for them in sum; the defilements abandoned by cultivation are hard to abandon, and three fruits are established for them separately.” Fabao, on the other hand, opens a cell of his own, saying “by this text of the treatise, only these four stages and one who sharpens his faculties have these five causes, and the other stages have them not; and by this the sharpening of the faculties is also named obtaining a fruit” — reckoning the stage of sharpening the faculties too among those complete in the five causes. ⇒ The text of the treatise does not touch upon the sharpening of the faculties. This is Fabao’s own supplement, recorded without adjudication.
The gloss on the name “brahmin”: three houses, three ways. Puguang has here no gloss of sound and sense (glossing only the word “Brahmā” as “pure”). Fabao glosses it as “pure conduct,” and cites the Treatise Conforming to Correct Principle for a further sense besides, saying “silent, void, and unmoved is named Brahmā.” Yuanhui glosses it as “pure aspiration,” and reconciles it for himself, saying “it is the same in sense as striving and stilling” — drawing the gloss of brahmin back to the gloss of ascetic. ⇒ Pure conduct, pure aspiration, and no gloss: the three houses diverge, and this is recorded without adjudication.
Whether the wheel of Dharma is the path of seeing alone or extends to the three paths: Yuanhui alone marks a school. The text of the treatise objects to itself and concludes for itself, saying “therefore one should only say that it is just the whole body of dharma-teaching belonging to these three turnings and twelve modes of apprehension that is named the wheel of Dharma,” and does not mark from which school the sense comes. Yuanhui, on the other hand, marks it by school outright, saying “if one follows the Sautrāntikas, the wheel of Dharma is not the path of seeing alone.” ⇒ The text of the treatise itself makes no such marking. Neither Puguang nor Fabao marks a school here. Recorded without adjudication.
Yuanhui’s numbers and fittings not in the text of the treatise. Two places are worth noting: first, under the first of the five marks of the wheel of Dharma, Yuanhui notes for himself that “by ‘swift’ is meant the fifteen moments,” giving a number the text of the treatise has not; second, under the sentence “there arise separately and severally the eye, the cognition, the clear knowing, and the awakening,” he fits it word by word, saying “within the path of seeing, the receptivity to dharma is named the eye, the cognition of dharma the cognition, the subsequent receptivity the clear knowing, and the subsequent cognition the awakening.” Both are supplements of a commentator and not in the text of the treatise, and in reading one should keep the layers distinct.
A divergence of orthography. For the word “lineage,” Puguang and Fabao write one character and Yuanhui another; and the base text here has besides a collation note of a variant reading (the two characters in question). This belongs to orthography and not to doctrine, and is recorded as it stands without alteration.
2. Saṅghabhadra’s Refutations and Supplementary Explanations
The chapter titles of Saṅghabhadra’s two treatises in this chapter are not “Analysis of the Worthy and the Noble” — the Treatise Conforming to Correct Principle has “Adjudication of the Worthy and the Noble, chapter six,” and the Treatise Revealing the Doctrine “Adjudication of the Worthy and the Noble, chapter seven” (the chapter number moved back). Search with the Kośa’s chapter title and you will never find them.
The first engagement: the dispute over the order of with and without exertion, in which Saṅghabhadra assesses the author’s refutation in return. The author in this fascicle refutes a divergent account (that the difference of with and without exertion lies in taking the conditioned or the unconditioned noble path as object), saying “this account is unreasonable, for the fault is too sweeping.” Saṅghabhadra, at the same place, first sets out an analysis of his own, then cites that divergent account word for word, then assesses the author’s refutation in return, saying “what the Sūtra-master objects has a great fault; for though the sense here has been well explained through and they are thus far equal, yet they each have a differing stage.” And at the last he closes with the standing of both in scripture — some sūtras state without exertion first and some state with exertion first; the time being no different, there is no contradiction whichever is stated; while for himself he takes “with exertion being the more honorable, I state it first” for his order.
The layers of this engagement must be made out: what Vasubandhu assesses is that divergent account, and what Saṅghabhadra assesses is Vasubandhu’s assessment; the two are not on the same layer. Saṅghabhadra is not re-establishing that divergent account, but explaining it well on its behalf, and bringing out scriptural testimony of his own to show that either order is without contradiction. Two layers of mutual assessment, recorded alongside without adjudication. None of the three commentaries cites this layer of Saṅghabhadra’s counter-assessment.
The second engagement: the dispute over the definition of the bodily witness, with all three layers present. The author, upon the ground of the name bodily witness, brings out an explanation of his own, saying “speaking as the principle really is, one should say: he rises from the absorption of cessation and obtains what he had not obtained before, the quiescence of a body possessed of consciousness,” and so on — what he stresses is that one moment after rising from the absorption. Saṅghabhadra cites it word for word and assesses it, saying “now I say that at the stage of rising from the absorption of cessation, though he obtains the quiescence, not obtained before, of a body possessed of consciousness, yet it is not only at that” stage that the name of bodily witness is obtained — he holds that the name of bodily witness should extend to both times, before and after entering the absorption, and is not limited to the one moment of rising from it. At the last he defends the brief wording of the stanza itself, saying “therefore the former statement is the better in principle; raising the latter limit, it says only: a non-returner who has obtained the absorption of cessation is renamed” the bodily witness — meaning that the stanza’s marking only the three words “obtained the absorption of cessation” already takes in both times, and no new explanation need be set up.
What is at issue is the division of time at which the name bodily witness is obtained. This is the most complete stretch of material for the cross-treatise engagement in this fascicle, all three layers being present. None of the three commentaries cites it. Recorded without adjudication.
A stretch of material that is not a refutation but a supplement. Saṅghabhadra, in the passage adjoining the section on the bodily witness, supplies in full the scriptural testimony the treatise abridged — the World-Honored One addressing the householder Anāthapiṇḍada that the fields of merit are two, the eighteen in training and the nine beyond training, and listing in full the items of the eighteen in training (the approach to stream-entry, the fruit of stream-entry, the approach to once-returning, the fruit of once-returning, the approach to non-returning . . .). The text of the treatise says only “the sūtras say there are eighteen in training” without listing the items, and Saṅghabhadra fills them out. Yuanhui too, in the same section, cites the context “the fields of merit are two, namely the eighteen in training and the nine beyond training,” and the two may be used to corroborate each other. This is a taking-up and not a counter-refutation, and is recorded here.
A fourth account peculiar to the Treatise Revealing the Doctrine. For the differences of cognition, mode of apprehension, and object of the vajra-like concentration, both the Kośa and the Treatise Conforming to Correct Principle list only three accounts (fifty-two, eighty, and one hundred sixty-four). The Treatise Revealing the Doctrine in the same section supplies a further account and refutes it itself — “the Venerable Ghoṣa says thus: the vajra-like concentrations are thirteen in all, namely the uninterrupted paths abandoning the defilements abandoned by seeing and by cultivation” at the summit of existence, thirteen moments in all — and then says, “this too is not so, since the eight uninterrupted paths before the four subsequent receptivities are not of the utmost grade.” ⇒ This account is found neither in the text of this fascicle nor in the corresponding passage of the Treatise Conforming to Correct Principle, and is a supplement peculiar to the Treatise Revealing the Doctrine. Its establishment and its place are recorded only, without adjudication of merit.
One honest negative proposition. Sentences that mark Vasubandhu expressly by the two words “the Sūtra-master” are, within the range of this fascicle, fully enumerated in the Treatise Conforming to Correct Principle at two (the two engagements above), and in the Treatise Revealing the Doctrine within the same range at zero. But this proves one thing only: that the Treatise Revealing the Doctrine does not, within this fascicle, use the designation “the Sūtra-master” to point at Vasubandhu by name. It cannot be inferred from this that the Treatise Revealing the Doctrine has no engagement in this fascicle — in fact it supplied that fourth account above. A zero result for a designation is not the same as no engagement.
3. The Divergences of Paramārtha’s Earlier Translation
Paramārtha’s text titles this chapter “Analysis of the Persons of the Path and Fruit of the Noble Ones,” and divides the whole chapter into three fascicles where Xuanzang divides it into four — the counts of fascicles differing, their boundaries cannot possibly coincide one by one, and the passage matched to this fascicle straddles two of his. Add that the chapter title is rendered wholly otherwise, and a search of Paramārtha’s text with Xuanzang’s words is bound to come up empty; comparison across the two texts can only be made by the structure of the scene.
The renderings form a system of their own. For faculties without outflows he has faculties without flow; for the fruit of once-returning, sakṛdāgāmin; for non-returner, anāgāmin; for the four names of attaining parinirvāṇa in the interval and the rest, uniformly the abridged extinction in the interval, extinction upon birth, extinction with exertion, extinction without exertion; for the full leap, half leap, and dying everywhere, leaping out, half leaping out, and retreating everywhere; for Akaniṣṭha he keeps the transcription; for attaining parinirvāṇa in the present life, attaining parinirvāṇa in the present dharma; for access concentration, the concentration of non-attainment; for the acquisition of release from bondage, the attainment of separation through extinction; for the vajra-like concentration, the vajra-simile samādhi; for the unshakable lineage, the dharma that is not broken. The particle of interrogation too forms a system — Xuanzang has “on what ground,” Paramārtha “how is it.”
Two instances where the two ways of translating part most visibly. The first is the gloss upon “one-interval”: Xuanzang glosses “interval” as an intervening interval, speaking from the interval of time; Paramārtha glosses it as “the sense of obstruction,” speaking from what is obstructed. One and the same character, two angles of glossing, while the fact pointed at is the same (one birth still remaining unspent). The second is the seven destinies of good men: Xuanzang has “destinies of good men,” Paramārtha “the practice of the worthy and the noble” — this is the most pervasive divergence of technical rendering in the fascicle, the two translations having nothing whatever in common here.
The names of the five grades of the Pure Abodes: the two translations differ wholly while corresponding in order. Xuanzang has low, middle, high-high, surpassing-high, and utmost; Paramārtha has soft, middle, high, high-middle, and high-high. The correspondence stage by stage is: Xuanzang’s third, “high-high,” to Paramārtha’s third, “high”; Xuanzang’s fourth, “surpassing-high,” to Paramārtha’s fourth, “high-middle”; Xuanzang’s fifth, “utmost,” to Paramārtha’s fifth, “high-high.” The opening and gathering are nearly the same while the systems of rendering-characters are far apart; both are recorded and left standing, and what they rest upon is not forced to an explanation.
One structural divergence of opening and gathering. For that dispute over the acquisitions of release from bondage, Xuanzang gathers it under one and a half lines of stanza, “a noble one by the two paths freed from the eight abandoned by cultivation, each two acquisitions of release from bondage,” and puts the whole exchange from “the explanation of some other masters” onward into the prose commentary; Paramārtha, on the other hand, works this dispute into the verse itself, in four passages of verse explained line by line. One and the same dispute, the one placing it in the prose and the other upon the face of the verse — this is not a divergence of doctrine but a divergence of the form of translating. Recorded without adjudication.
The three names of the modes of apprehension of the mundane path differ wholly in the two translations. Xuanzang has coarseness, suffering, and obstruction, and calm, sublimity, and escape; Paramārtha has coarse heaviness, oppression, and the thick wall, and quiescence, beauty, and going forth. What is interesting is “the thick wall” — Xuanzang puts it into the simile in the prose commentary (“as the thick wall of a prison can obstruct going out”), while Paramārtha takes “the thick wall” outright for the name of the mode of apprehension. One and the same image, taken by the one as a simile and by the other as a name.
Two ways of taking the name of the nature of the ascetic life. Xuanzang takes the rendering by sense, giving the nature of the ascetic life and the fruits of the ascetic life; Paramārtha keeps the transcription, having throughout the transcribed term and the fruit of the transcribed term. As for the number eighty-nine, Xuanzang says eighty-nine outright while Paramārtha has “ninety less one” — what is pointed at is the same and the manner of stating it differs. So too with the Buddha’s name Brahmā: Xuanzang renders by sense, and Paramārtha keeps the transcription.
One and the same person designated differently in the two translations. For the one who speaks of “spokes and the rest,” Xuanzang has “the Venerable Ghoṣa,” Paramārtha “the Bhadanta Qusha.” This fascicle matches them directly by the structure of the scene, recording without adjudication.
The alignment of the section on the path that frees from defilement. The section on the path that frees from defilement (the summit of existence freed by the path without outflows alone, the acquisitions of release from bondage, the path of access concentration, liberation at the neighboring stage, the modes of apprehension of the mundane path) begins in Paramārtha’s text at the head of his fascicle eighteen, opening with “by what path does one in training become free of craving,” and its verses correspond one by one with Xuanzang’s Roots 47 through 50 — the page anchors of each item are in item nine of this unit’s apparatus.
4. Coordinates for Parallel Reading
What this fascicle establishes is a graduated scale from family-to-family up to the arhat, and the entity given in the one sentence “the several paths without outflows are the nature of the ascetic life.” Both of these have passages in the Yogācāra lineage that may be read alongside them word for word.
The simile of the three sparks, brought out in that lineage and abridged in this. This fascicle says that attaining parinirvāṇa in the interval divides into three, “as displayed by the simile of the three sparks,” while the simile itself the text of the treatise abridges. The root treatise of the Yogācāra lineage gives the similes one by one for the same dharma — the first kind like the tiny spark of a small splinter of fire that perishes as soon as it is raised; the second like the stream of sparks from an iron ingot hammered white-hot, which is extinguished before it falls; the third like the stream of sparks from that hot iron beaten, which perishes before it reaches the ground. Three similes fastening upon three speeds, exactly the passage this fascicle leaves out. The definition of one-interval also agrees fully in the two systems.
The vajra-like concentration: the same name hung upon a different outline. This fascicle hangs the vajra-like concentration at the end of the approach to arhatship (the uninterrupted path abandoning the ninth grade of defilement at the summit of existence). The root treatise of the Yogācāra lineage, on the other hand, hangs it upon the mark of the completion of “cultivating the path as it has been obtained,” saying that because the vajra-like concentration of one in training reaches finality, his cultivation is completed. One and the same name of a concentration, the one marking what it abandons and the other what it completes.
The arhat and the casting off of the name of the store-consciousness. This fascicle has the vajra-like concentration draw forth the knowledge of exhaustion and so complete one beyond training. The Consciousness-Only lineage uses the same concentration as the boundary at which the eighth consciousness casts off the name ālaya — saying that it is finally cast off at the stage of the arhat, and widening for itself what it takes in, stating expressly that the arhat here spoken of takes in the fruit-stages beyond training of all three vehicles; and as for the defilements associated with manas, it says that when the vajra-like concentration is present their seeds are abandoned all at once and one becomes an arhat. ⇒ The standard that “the vajra-like concentration is the last abandoning” is unaltered in the two systems; the entity abandoned, however, differs — this fascicle hangs it upon the ninth grade of defilement at the summit of existence, and Consciousness-Only upon the seeds of the obstruction of the defilements and the defilements associated with manas. And the extension of the one name “arhat” differs too: this fascicle speaks of it only as the fruit of the śrāvaka, while Consciousness-Only states expressly that it takes in all three vehicles. One and the same name, one and the same knife, and what the two ages cut is different — this is the place in this fascicle most open to parallel reading.
As for the direction in which they are to be taken up, what each of the two systems establishes is recorded word for word only, and no reconciliation is made on their behalf.
六種種性·七聖·菩提分法The Six Kinds of Lineage · The Seven Noble Persons · The Factors of Awakening
全文五層 →Full five layers →讀這一卷之前
上一卷把四向四果講到阿羅漢為止,這一卷一開口就翻轉一個習慣的印象——證了阿羅漢,並不等於人人一模一樣。論文的第一句承接得極緊:「如前所說,不動應果初盡智後起無生智。諸阿羅漢如預流等有差別不?」。這一問把整卷的門打開了:阿羅漢之中有六種種性,有的須待時節因緣才能入定,有的隨欲現前;有的可能退,有的必定不退。
三家古德在這裡把科判的刀落在同一處,而且序號逐字相同。光記標「此下第五明六種種姓。就中,一明六阿羅漢;二明六姓先後;三明從姓、果退;四明學、凡種姓;五明三退不同;六明退果時相;七明練根不同;八明無學九人」;頌疏作「從此第五,明六種性,就中八:一明六阿羅漢、二明六性先後、三明從性果退、四明學凡種性、五明三退不同、六明退果時相、七明練根不同、八明無學九人」——與光記幾乎一字不差;寶疏則把前三科併作一科而成六科:「已下大文第五明六種姓。一明六種羅漢;二明六種學、凡;三明三種退別;四明六退果時等;五明練根不同;六明九種無學」。三家獨立分卷而卷界與玄奘全同,可見這一刀不是後人硬切的。
這一卷還有一件本部書裡少見的事:神泰疏現存七卷之中,唯有卷十七屬於賢聖品,而它恰好整卷覆蓋這一卷的內容——卷首自標「自下第四有七行半頌明六種種性。於中初一行半頌有明阿羅漢」,卷末釋完厭離四句就收卷。所以這是全書第一個四家俱在的單元;下文凡有四家並列處,都特別標明。
要先說在前頭的是:本卷篇幅最長的一段長行,不是講法數,而是一場往復——阿羅漢果究竟有退無退。這一段裡經部、上座、分別論師與有部本宗四家意見不同,論主自己也明白表了態,末了卻仍以「毘婆沙師定作是說:阿羅漢果亦有退義」結歸本宗。讀這一段的訣竅,是隨時問一句『現在說話的是誰』——下文每一節都會標出來。
一、阿羅漢分六種:時解脫與不時解脫
先問:既然都斷盡了煩惱,阿羅漢之間還能有什麼差別? 論答得直接——差別不在斷了什麼,而在根性。「於契經中說阿羅漢由種性異故有六種,一者退法、二者思法、三者護法、四安住法、五堪達法、六不動法」。前五種是從有學位上的『信解』(信增而根鈍)一系生出來的,總名時愛心解脫;第六種是從『見至』(慧增而根利)一系生出來的,名不動心解脫。
時解脫這個名字要當心。 它不是說『暫時的解脫』,而是『待時而解脫』——「亦說名為時解脫者,以要待時及解脫故。略初言故,如言酥瓶」。論怕人誤讀,特地補一個省略的例子:盛酥的瓶簡稱酥瓶,省去了前一字。所待之時是什麼?「謂待資具無病處等勝緣合時方入定故」——資具、身體、處所這些條件會合,定才入得成。四家於此喻的訓詁全合:光記「如言蘇瓶,具足應言盛蘇瓶,略初盛字但言蘇瓶」,泰疏則作「如世具言此成蘇瓶,略初此成言故但言蘇瓶」。
易誤處:把六種當作六個等級的『功力高低』。它們高低確有,但論所繫的判準是根與加行,不是斷惑的多寡——六種阿羅漢所斷的煩惱是一樣的。落地上:讀到後面『退』的一大段時,要記得所退的從來不是漏盡,而是定與種性——這一條先立住,那一場諍論才看得懂。
二、種性是原先就有,還是後來練成的
先問:這六種種性,是生來注定,還是修出來的? 論答「不定」,並以一頌判之——「有是先種性,有後練根得」。細分則是:退法必是先有,思法以下五種也可以是後得。所以有人本來就是思法性,也有人本來是退法性,後來練根轉成思法,乃至轉成不動。
六個名字都是形象語,不是編號。 論逐一給了訓詞:退法是「謂遇少緣便退所得,非思法等」;思法是「謂懼退失恒思自害」;護法是「謂於所得喜自防護」;安住法是「離勝退緣雖不自防亦能不退,離勝加行亦不增進」;堪達法是「彼性堪能好修練根速達不動」;不動法是「彼必無退」。頌疏把六者的訓詞逐一列全,於四家中最便初學——「一者退法,謂遇少緣便退所得。二者思法,謂懼退失,恒思自害。三者護法,謂於前所得法自防護」。
這六種在有學位就已成形。 論給了一張配置表:第一第二二種都缺恆時加行與尊重加行,只因根有利鈍而分二;第三只有恆時加行,第四只有尊重加行,第五二者具足而仍是鈍根,第六是利根而二者具足。易誤處:以為名字即命運。論明白遮止——「退法種性非必定退,乃至堪達非必能達,但約容有建立此名」。落地上:這幾個名字是就『可能性』立的,不是就必然性立的;下文那一句「故六阿羅漢通三界皆有」,正是靠這一條才說得通。
三、四從種性退、五從果退——而所退都不是原先那一分
先問:六種之中誰退?退的是種性還是果? 頌答「四從種性退,五從果非先」。不動必定不退;前五種都可能退。其中後四種可從種性退,唯獨退法沒有種性可退——因為已在最下一級。從果退則五種都有。
關鍵在『非先』二字。 論分三層說明:無學位的人,其先前有學位上所住的種性不會退,因為那是學道無學道二重所成;有學位的人,其先前凡位上所住的種性也不會退,因為那是世出世道二重所成;唯有後來練根新得的思法等四種,才有退的可能。由此推出一條硬結論——「是故定無退預流果」。
易誤處:把『阿羅漢有退』讀成『可能退回凡夫』。論的算法恰恰相反:退法的無學有三條去路(增進根、退住學、住自位般涅槃),思法四條,其餘依次五、六、七,而且「思法等四退住學位,時還住退非餘」——退也只退到與自己相當的那一位。落地上:這一節其實是在畫一張『退的邊界圖』;邊界一畫清楚,下一節那場大諍論才知道爭的是哪一塊地。
四、為什麼預流決定不退:依無事與依有事
先問:憑什麼說見所斷的煩惱斷了就不再起? 有部給的理由只有一句——「以見所斷依無事故」,光記標明這是誰在說:「說一切有部答。以見所斷,依無事故,必無退理」。所謂依無事,是說身見依著所計的『我』而轉,而一切見惑以此見為根本;「我體既無名依無事,以無事故必無退理」。
論隨即自設一難:那豈不是說這煩惱『緣無』?答:不是——它所緣的仍是四諦,只是緣得不如實。再徵:諸煩惱哪一個不是不如實地緣?答在差別:修所斷的煩惱各有真實之事(可意不可意等),見所斷的卻是在四諦上憑空計我。論再從三個角度重說同一件事,最後給了一個譬喻——「如於繩等率爾謂蛇」:倉猝之間會把繩看成蛇,一經審慮就不會;修惑昧鈍,不待審慮而起,所以聖者仍可能失念退起;見惑是推度性,一審慮就見諦,所以決定不退。
易誤處:把『依無事』當成『所緣是空無』。論已親自遮過這一讀。落地上:這一段給了一條可用的判準——凡建立在虛構對象上的執著,一旦看破就不會回頭;建立在真實事相上的習氣,看破了仍要防護。修行上兩者所需的功夫本來不同。
五、經部之說與論主的表態
先問:這場諍論裡,世親自己站在哪一邊? 論文只有一句——「經部師說:從阿羅漢亦無退義。彼說應理」。「彼說應理」四字看似輕,古德卻一致認為這是論主的明白表態。光記說得最完整:「此下經部明四果退、不退。論主意朋經部,故言彼說應理」;寶疏易其字作「論主評取經部釋也」;泰疏更簡,只四個字——「論主評云:彼說應理」。
經部的論證分兩路走。 光記逐句標了說者:「由教理故者,經部答」、「如何由教者,徵」。教證一路引三段經:聖慧斷惑名為實斷;佛說有學應不放逸而不說阿羅漢;佛告慶喜利養等障阿羅漢而「不說退阿羅漢果,但說退失現法樂住」。理證一路則是一個兩難:若對治道已生,就不該退起煩惱;若道未生,就不該叫作漏盡——「若非漏盡,寧說為應」。
易誤處:以為論主表態就等於論本改宗。並不然——本卷末仍以毘婆沙師之說結歸本宗。落地上:讀本論凡遇「彼說應理」「最善」一類語,要同時記住兩件事:論主的傾向在此,而本宗的結論仍在後頭。二者並存,正是這部書的體例。
六、時愛解脫該怎麼讀:所退者是定不是果
先問:經上既說有『時愛解脫』,豈不是承認阿羅漢會退? 經部的答法不是否認經文,而是問一句『退的是什麼』——「但應觀察彼之所退,為應果性、為靜慮等?」光記標此為經部牒救:「若謂有退至故不名愛者,經部牒救通釋」。答案是:所退的是根本靜慮的等持,那是要待時現前的,所以名時解脫;為了現法樂住而屢屢希求它,所以名『愛』。
論隨即另錄一說:「有說:此定是所愛味,諸阿羅漢果性解脫恒隨逐故不應名時,更不欣求故不名愛。」——把時與愛二字都判給有漏定那一邊。接著經部再反難一句:如果果性可退,何以世尊只說現法樂住可退?光記引其語作「經部反難。若言無漏應果體性,鈍根亦容有退失者,如何世尊但說所證有漏諸定現法樂住,有可退理,不說無漏。由此證知羅漢果性必是不動」。
易誤處:把『退法』『不退法』之名讀成果位有無退。論在這裡自己給了立名的來源——是就「於所得現法樂住有退無退」而立的。落地上:日後凡見『某某退失』之語,先分三層問:退的是果、是定、還是現前受用?三者混為一談,這一整段就讀不動。
七、不退、安住、不動三名之別
先問:不退、安住、不動聽起來都是不會退,差在哪裡? 論以一問一答收之:「不退、安住、不動何別?非練根得名為不退,練根所得名為不動。」光記標此問答之兩造——「不退安住不動何別者,問」、「非練根得至三種差別者,經部答。不退是本性得,非由練根,若練根得名為不動」。
三者的分界線是這樣的:不退是本性所得,不由練根;不動是練根所得。這二種所起的殊勝等至,遇到退緣也不退。安住法則只能在已住之德上不退,「不能更引餘勝德生,設復引生從彼可退」——他的守成有餘而開拓不足。
易誤處:把安住法當成不動法的別名。論已明白分開:安住是『守得住已有的』,不動是『連新得的也不會失』。落地上:三個名字實際上是三種穩定度——本來就穩、練出來的穩、以及只在原地穩。修學上自估屬於哪一種,比記住名字有用。
八、喬底迦一事:退的是定,不是果
先問:喬底迦執刀自害,豈不是阿羅漢退果的鐵證? 論的通釋是:他「昔在學位,於時解脫極噉味故」,又因根鈍而屢屢退失,於是深自厭責、執刀自害;由於對身命毫無戀惜,臨命終時反而得了阿羅漢便般涅槃——所以「喬底迦亦非退失阿羅漢果」。
古德在此標出兩家讀法的分歧。 寶疏記得最清楚:「論主通經。有部謂喬底迦退應果重得。經部宗,喬底迦學位數退,深自厭等,臨命終時得阿羅漢果」。光記亦標此段為「經部又復通經」。也就是說,同一件事,有部讀為退果又重得,經部讀為學位屢退而臨終得果。
易誤處:以為通經就是改經。經部並未改動經文一字,改的是『他退的是哪一分』。落地上:讀傳記式的經證時,先分清『事實』與『對事實的判釋』——這一段是全卷示範得最清楚的一處。
九、增十經三難與有部之詰
先問:怎麼證明時解脫不是應果的體性? 經部引增十經——「一法應起,謂時愛心解脫。一法應證,謂不動心解脫」,隨即發三難:其一,若應果就是時愛心解脫,何以此經中把應果再說一次?其二,從來無處說阿羅漢果叫『應起』,只說『應證』。其三,經說鈍根應果名應起,若為顯他能起,利根更能起;若為顯他應起,利根更應起。結論是「故時解脫非應果性」。光記標其性質為「經部引經證應果體性非是時解脫」。
有部隨即回一難:「若爾何故說時解脫應果者,說一切有部難。若時解脫非應果體,何故說時解脫應果」。經部答:那是就一類根鈍、須待時定方現前的應果而立名,反之名不時解脫;光記標「謂有應果至名不時解脫者,經部答」,寶疏同標「經部答也。據待時不待,得定立名也」。
易誤處:把『應起』與『應證』看成同義的修辭。經部整個第二難就建立在這兩個詞的分工上。落地上:讀經證式的論辯,要留意論者所憑的常常是用語的分工而非義理的宣稱——這是本論最常用的一種論證法。
十、炭喻經與結歸本宗
先問:炭喻經明說聖弟子行住之時失念而生惡不善覺,這不是應果有退嗎? 這一難是有部提的。光記標得明白:「若爾應釋至是阿羅漢者,說一切有部復引經難」,寶疏亦標「有部引經救也」。經部的通經是:那位「於一切順漏已能永吐、已得清涼」的才是阿羅漢,而失念生覺是在他「未善通達」之前的學位事,「前依學位,故說無失」。光記標此為「經部通經」,寶疏作「經部記引後文『於一切順漏已能永吐、已得清涼』,准此後文是阿羅漢」。
至此廣諍既訖,論以一句結歸本宗:「毘婆沙師定作是說:阿羅漢果亦有退義」。光記於此標「廣諍既訖,結歸本宗」。
易誤處:把結歸本宗當成論主自己的最後判斷。前文既已說「彼說應理」,此處又結歸有退,二者並存不悖——這正是本論「立薩婆多義隨有僻處以經部義破之」的體例。落地上:遇到這種兩存的結尾,讀者要做的不是替古人選邊,而是把兩造各自的理由記牢。部派之判屬於義理權衡,不在讀者一時之見。
十一、有學與異生也有六種·但見道不練根
先問:六種種性是阿羅漢的專利嗎? 不是。頌答「學異生亦六,練根非見道」,理由極簡:六種應果既以他們為前身,前身自然也有六種。
要點在後半句。 見道位上決定不能練根,「此位無容起加行故」——見道速疾,來不及起練根的加行。所以練根只能在信解位與異生位修,就像無學位一樣。頌疏補得清楚:「然於見道必無練根,以見道速疾,無容起彼練根加行故」。論隨即引經作證:四種增上心所攝的現法樂住隨一有退,而不動心解脫「我決定說無因緣從此退」。
易誤處:以為練根是隨時可修的功課。它有位次限制——見道不能修。落地上:這一條與前面的『退』連起來看,會發現本論對修行階段的態度是很具體的:什麼位次能做什麼事,不能通說。
十二、退有三種:已得、未得、受用
先問:不動法既然不退,何以又說他退現法樂住? 論的解法是把『退』字先分成三種——「一已得退,謂退已得殊勝功德。二未得退,謂未能得殊勝功德。三受用退,謂諸已得殊勝功德不現在前」。
分完之後,人各有分。 世尊唯有受用退一種,因為功德太多,不可能一時全部現前;不動法有受用退與未得退二種,因為比自己更勝的功德還沒得到;其餘五種可能三種都有。於是「約受用退,說不動法退現法樂,無相違過」——矛盾解消在名詞的細分上。
易誤處:把『佛也有退』讀成佛有所退失。論說得很明白,佛的那一種只是『不現前』。落地上:本論解矛盾的手法在這裡示範得最乾淨——先問這個字有幾義,再問各人佔哪一義。往後遇到看似衝突的兩句經,這一招常常管用。
此處論本另錄無退論者一說:「諸無漏解脫皆名不動」,而以「如前釋通,不應為難」收之,並錄不判。
十三、退了必定再得,而且不會作違果之事
先問:退了之後會不會就這樣一直退到命終? 論答不會——「無從果退中間命終,退已須臾必還得故」。經證是:多聞聖弟子雖退失正念,「速復還能令所退起盡沒滅離」;若非如此,「修梵行果應非安隱可委信處」——梵行之果若可能一退不返,就不成其為可託付之處了。
第二問更細:住果時所不作的事,退時會作嗎?論答不會,理由是慚愧增上——「由慚增故於暫退時亦必不造,譬如壯士雖蹶不仆」。頌疏把兩句合釋得很完整:「一切果退,須臾必得,無有命終而不得者……又住果位所不作業,於果退時慚愧增故,亦必不造,譬如壯士雖蹶不仆」。
易誤處:把壯士之喻讀成『不會跌倒』。喻的重點在跌了也不會整個倒下去——絆一跤與仆地是兩回事。落地上:這一節其實是在給前面那場諍論加一個安全欄——即使承認有退,退的幅度與時限都是被鎖死的。
十四、練根要幾道:九無間九解脫
先問:轉一次種性要花多少工夫? 頌答「練根無學位,九無間解脫,久習故學一」。無學位上每轉一性,要九無間道與九解脫道,如同當初得阿羅漢果一樣多;有學位上只要一無間一解脫,如同當初得初果。理由是「彼鈍根性由久串習,非少功力可能令轉」——鈍根是長劫串習成的,不是一使勁就能翻過來。
其性與所依:這些道「一切唯是無漏性攝」,因為「聖者必無用有漏道而轉根理」。所依之身唯人趣三洲,「餘無退故」;所依之地,無學通九(未至、中間、四靜慮、三無色),有學唯六(除後三),因為「無有學果無色地攝」。
易誤處:以為練根是換一套新功夫。論說它「如得應果」——用的是同一種道,只是重走一遍。落地上:這一節給了一個很實在的提醒——根性可以轉,但代價與當初證果相當。知道代價,才不會把練根想得太輕。
十五、無學位上的九種聖者
先問:無學位總共有幾種人? 頌答「七聲聞二佛,差別由九根」。論釋:退法等五,加上不動分為二(練根所得與本性所得,先後有別),成七種聲聞;獨覺與大覺名二覺者,合為九人。而九人之所以成九,是「由下下等九品根異」。
這裡有一個好例子說明開合。 光記引《正理》以九與六互證:「然餘經說無學有九,謂初退法、後俱解脫。彼不退法,此不動攝,彼二解脫通此六攝,故阿毘達磨唯說有六」——經說九,論說六,不是矛盾,是開合不同。
易誤處:把九人讀成九個高低次第。它們的差別在根,不在斷惑之量。落地上:讀法數時常會遇到同一組事實被開成不同的數目(六、七、九),此處給了判準——先問這一組是依什麼門分的,門一換數就換。
十六、七聖者:四門開七、實事唯六
先問:學無學位一共有幾種聖者,憑什麼分? 論列七名——隨信行、隨法行、信解、見至、身證、慧解脫、俱解脫,而以四個門收之:「依加行異立初二種」「依根不同立次二種」「依得滅定立身證名」「依解脫異立後二種」。
七名而六事。 論隨即說明:見道中有隨信行、隨法行二人,到修道另立信解、見至二名,到無學又立時解脫、不時解脫二名——所以「此名雖七事別唯六」,而頌文以「三道各二故」明其由。這是一個人在三個階段上換了三次名字,不是七個不同的人。
論還順手示範了一次法數的相乘:一個隨信行,就根成三、就種性成五、就道成十五、就離染成七十三、就所依身成九,五者相乘「合成一億四萬七千八百二十五種」。
易誤處:把七聖當成七類彼此無關的人。落地上:這一節連同上一節,是本卷教『名與事之別』最集中的地方——名可以隨門而立,事卻只有那麼多。凡讀阿毘達磨的法數,先問名還是事。
十七、俱解脫與慧解脫
先問:同是阿羅漢,為什麼有俱、慧之分? 判準只有一條——有沒有得滅盡定。「諸阿羅漢得滅定者名俱解脫,由慧定力解脫煩惱解脫障故」;「所餘未得滅盡定者名慧解脫,但由慧力於煩惱障得解脫故」。所謂『俱』,是慧與定俱;所離的障也是二種——煩惱障與解脫障(定障)。
頌疏把這一層說得更透:「六種羅漢得滅定者,名俱解脫,先由慧力解脫惑障,又得滅定解脫定障,故名為俱;餘名慧解脫者……唯由慧力於煩惱障得解脫故,未離定障,不得名俱」。
易誤處:以為慧解脫是『解脫得不徹底』。就煩惱障說二者無異,差別在定障。落地上:這一條解釋了為什麼本論在講功德時屢屢把滅盡定單提出來——它是分判無學內部的一把尺。
十八、什麼叫作『滿』
先問:同在有學位,為什麼有人獨稱為滿? 論答由三因——根、果、定。「學於學位獨得滿名,具由三因,謂根、果、定」。然後論逐一排列五種組合:唯由根(見至未離欲染)、唯由果(信解不還未得滅定)、由根果(見至不還未得滅定)、由果定(信解得滅定)、三因具足(見至得滅定)。並明說有學位中沒有『唯由定』與『唯由根定』而得滿名的。
無學則少一因。 「諸無學者於無學位由根定二獨得滿名」,因為無學位中沒有『不是果』的滿,所以不另立由果得滿。頌疏於此給了最便記的對照:「一、由根滿,謂是利根。二、由果滿,謂得不還。三、由定滿,謂得滅定」。
易誤處:把『滿』讀成圓滿成佛之滿。此處的滿是同位相比之下的具足,不是究竟義。落地上:這一節是全卷第一次把根、果、定三個變項擺在一起做組合——後面四道、四通行、乃至三十七品的分別,用的都是同一種思路。
十九、一切道略說只有四種
先問:修道之路千頭萬緒,能不能收成幾條? 論答四條:「加行道者,謂從此後無間道生。無間道者,謂此能斷所應斷障。解脫道者,謂已解脫所應斷障最初所生。勝進道者,謂三餘道」。這四個名字是就斷障這件事的四個位置立的——斷前、正斷、斷後初起、以及其餘。
論隨即訓『道』之義:「道義云何?謂涅槃路,乘此能往涅槃城故」,又一解「或復道者,謂求所依,依此尋求涅槃果故」。既然道是能斷之義,解脫與勝進何以也叫道?論給三個理由:與道同類而轉上品、前前之力至後後、能趣入無餘依。
易誤處:把四道看成四段時間。它們是就同一次斷惑的功能位置分的,不是四個階段的名稱。落地上:有了這把尺,往後讀任何斷惑之文,都可以問一句『這是哪一道』——本論後文分別有漏無漏、分別諸地時,屢屢要用它。
二十、四通行:樂苦由地、遲速由根
先問:同樣通向涅槃,為什麼有的走得辛苦、有的走得輕鬆? 論說四通行——苦遲、苦速、樂遲、樂速。判準有二:依什麼地與什麼根。「道依根本四靜慮生名樂通行,以攝受支止觀平等任運轉故」;依無色、未至、中間而生的名苦通行,「以不攝支止觀不等艱辛轉故」。其中無色是觀減止增,未至中間是觀增止減——兩頭都不平衡。至於遲速,則「鈍根名遲、利根名速」。
易誤處:把『苦』讀成受苦。此處的苦是行道艱辛,指止觀不平等而須勉力,與苦受無關。落地上:這一節其實給了一個很實用的自查表——止觀是否平衡,決定路走得順不順;根之利鈍,決定走得快不快。二者互不相代。
二十一、三十七菩提分法與『覺』之義
先問:三十七道品為什麼叫菩提分法? 論先列名——四念住、四正斷、四神足、五根、五力、七等覺支、八聖道支;再訓其義:「盡、無生智說名為覺」,而「三十七法順趣菩提,是故皆名菩提分法」。所以『分』是順趣之義,不是部分之義。
覺又隨人而分三。 論說「隨覺者別立三菩提:一聲聞菩提、二獨覺菩提、三無上菩提」,而所以名覺,是因為「無明睡眠皆永斷故,及如實知已作已事不復作故」——一是斷盡,一是自知已辦。這兩句正好對應盡智與無生智。
易誤處:把菩提分法當作大乘專屬之語。此處三菩提明白通於三乘,所指的覺就是盡智與無生智。落地上:記住『覺=盡智無生智』這一條,後面講正智之體時論會再用一次——「正智體者如前覺說」。前後是一把尺。
二十二、名有三十七、實體只有十
先問:三十七法是三十七個不同的東西嗎? 論答不是——「此覺分名雖三十七,實事唯十,即慧勤等」。然後逐項歸併:慧攝八(四念住、慧根、慧力、擇法覺支、正見),勤攝八(四正斷、精進根、精進力、精進覺支、正精進),定攝八(四神足、定根、定力、定覺支、正定),信攝二,念攝四,其餘喜、捨、輕安、戒(正語正業正命)、尋(正思惟)各一。總計就是信等五根五力之上再加喜、捨、輕安、戒、尋。
頌疏把十事逐一標號並列出所攝細目,最便初學:「名雖三十七,論實體唯十:一慧、二勤、三定、四信、五念、六喜、七捨、八輕安、九戒、十尋」。
論隨即並錄一異說:「毘婆沙師說有十一,身業語業不相雜故戒分為二,餘九同前」——把戒開為身業戒與語業戒。二說並錄,不判。
易誤處:把歸併讀成『三十七是虛設的』。名不虛設——同一個慧在不同位次上作用不同,故立不同名。落地上:這是本論最典型的一次『名多事少』示範;讀法數而不問實體,就會被數目牽著走。
二十三、為什麼念住叫慧、正斷叫勤、神足叫定
先問:四念住等三品的體既然遍攝一切加行善,為什麼各自只掛一個名? 頌答「四念住正斷,神足隨增上,說為慧勤定,實諸加行善」。論釋:三品善法「體實遍攝諸加行善,然隨同品增上善根,如次說為慧勤及定」——立名依增上的那一分,不依全體。
三個名字各有訓詁。 念住之名,毘婆沙師說「慧由念力持令住故」,而論主另出正解——「理實由慧令念住境,如實見者能明記故」。光記標明二者之別:「答:慧名念住,從因為名……論主正解:慧名念住,從果為名」。正斷之名,是因為此勤「能斷懈怠」,或名正勝,因為「於正持策身語意中此最勝故」。神足之名,是因為「諸靈妙德所依止故」。
論在神足處親自破了一說。 有餘師說「神即是定,足謂欲等」,論以二難破之:如此則覺分事應有十三(多出欲與心),且違經說——經明言「此中佛說定果名神,欲等所生等持名足」。
易誤處:把這一節讀成名詞考據。它其實在示範一條通則——法數之名多半取增上的一分而立。落地上:往後遇到名實不符的法數,先問『這個名是取哪一分立的』,多半就通了。
二十四、信等為何先根後力·次第為何如此
先問:同樣五法,為什麼先叫根、後叫力? 論答二義:「由此五法依下上品分先後故,又依可屈伏不可屈伏故」。下品時名根,上品時名力;可被屈伏時名根,不可屈伏時名力。
再問:信、進、念、定、慧的次序憑什麼這樣排? 論給了一條因果鏈:「謂於因果先起信心為果修因,次起精進,由精進故念住所緣,由念力持心便得定,心得定故能如實知」——信起而後有行,行久而後念定,念定而後見實。所以這個次序不是列舉的方便,是修行的實際次第。
易誤處:把根力看成兩組不同的法。它們是同五法的兩個強度。落地上:這一條可以當作自查——若信而不進、進而不念,鏈條就斷在那裡;五者的順序本身就是一張修學的檢查表。
二十五、七品覺分依位次遞增
先問:三十七品是一次修齊,還是有先後? 頌答「初業順決擇,及修見道位,念住等七品,應知次第增」。論逐位配之:初業位慧用勝故念住增;煖位勤用勝故正斷增;頂位定用勝故神足增;忍位善根堅固故根增;世第一法位不為惑與世法所屈故力增;修道位近菩提故覺支增;見道位速疾而轉故道支增。
要緊的是論隨後那一句提醒:契經「隨數增說先七後八,非修次第」——經文是按數目遞增排列(七覺支在前、八道支在後),並不是修行的先後。論還順帶辨了兩組名實:八道支中正見既是道也是道支,七覺支中擇法既是覺也是覺支。
論此處並錄一異說:另有一些師不破經文次第而順說之,從念住制心說起,一路說到根、力、覺支、道支,並引二經為證。二說並錄,論以「隨增位說次第既然,理實應言」轉入下文。頌疏於此段的順釋可參——「此初業位能審照了身等四境,慧用勝故,說念住增」。
易誤處:把『增』讀成『只修這一品』。增是作用偏勝,不是其餘不修。落地上:這一節給的是一張修學重心的移動圖——同樣三十七品,在不同階段上該用力的地方不同。
二十六、哪些通有漏、哪些唯無漏
先問:三十七品都是無漏法嗎? 頌答「七覺八道支,一向是無漏;三四五根力,皆通於二種」。論釋其由:七覺支與八聖道支「唯於修道見道位中方建立故」——它們的建立本身就繫在聖位上;至於世間雖也有正見等法,「而彼不得聖道支名」。其餘四念住、四正斷、四神足與五根五力,則通於有漏無漏。
頌疏把頌文的簡語逐一解開:「三四者,一四念住、二四正斷、三四神足也。五根力者,謂五根、五力也」——這是讀頌時容易卡住的地方。
易誤處:以為凡叫菩提分法的都是無漏。恰恰相反,多數通二。落地上:這一條說明了一件事——同一個法,在凡位修是有漏,在聖位起是無漏;名字不變而性質隨位而轉。
二十七、三十七品在諸地的增減
先問:三十七品是不是每一地都齊全? 論答只有初靜慮齊全,其餘各有減法:未至地除喜覺支,因為「近分地中勵力轉故、於下地法猶疑慮故」;第二靜慮除正思惟,「彼靜慮中已無尋故」——這二地各三十六。第三、第四靜慮與中間定,喜與尋雙除,各三十五。前三無色除戒三支並除喜尋,各三十二。欲界與有頂除覺支與道支,各二十二,「無無漏故」。
易誤處:把減法讀成那一地修不成道。減的是那一地沒有的支(如無尋之地自然無正思惟),不是修不成。落地上:讀這一節要隨手核算——三十七減一得三十六、再減一得三十五,三十七減五得三十二,這些數字本身就是驗算之法。頌疏逐地釋數可對讀。
二十八、四證淨
先問:什麼叫證淨? 論先列四種——於佛、於法、於僧、聖戒;再訓其名:「如實覺知四聖諦理故名為證」,而「所信三寶及妙尸羅皆名為淨,離不信垢破戒垢故」。所以證淨是由證而得的淨信,不是一般的信心。
得的次第有講究。 見道位見前三諦時,一一唯得法證淨與戒證淨;到見道諦位才兼得佛僧二淨。所信之法又分總別——總通四諦,別唯三諦全分及菩薩獨覺道。實事則只有二:佛法僧三者以信為體,聖戒以戒為體;四者皆唯無漏,「以有漏法非證淨故」。
論還交代了出觀時的現起次第:先信世尊是正等覺,次信正法毘奈耶是善說,後信聖位是妙行者,最後由心淨而發淨尸羅,故尸羅說為第四。論給了兩個譬喻——三寶如良醫、良藥、看病者;或如導師、道路、商侶、所乘之乘。
易誤處:把四證淨當作四件要培養的信心。它是見諦之後自然成就的四分,順序也是果上的次第。落地上:以四喻自省最為便捷——醫、藥、護三者缺一,病仍不除;戒則是自身可服之藥。
二十九、正解脫與正智:學位為何不立
先問:經說學位成就八支、無學成就十支,何以有學位不立正解脫與正智? 論答:「有學位中尚有餘縛未解脫故無解脫支」——並補一句遮止語:「非離少縛可名脫者,非無解脫體可立解脫智」。無學已脫諸縛,又能起二種了知解脫的智,「由二顯了可立二支」。
解脫之體有二。 「解脫體有二,謂有為、無為。有為解脫謂無學勝解,無為解脫謂一切惑滅」。立支之名須依有為,所以有為解脫名無學支;而支所攝的解脫又即餘經所說的心解脫與慧解脫,也就是解脫蘊。
論此處自設一難並錄異說:既然經說「心從貪離染解脫,及從瞋癡離染解脫」,可見解脫蘊不只是勝解。論答以修的一分(未滿為滿、已滿為攝而修欲勤等);復錄有餘師說——「由真智力遣貪瞋癡,即心離垢名解脫蘊」。至於正智之體,「如前覺說,謂即前說盡、無生智」。
易誤處:把八支十支之差看成功德多寡的量差。差在能不能立支,而立支要看縛是否已盡。落地上:此節與二十一節首尾相扣——覺是盡無生智,正智也是盡無生智;本論的名相網是互相咬合的。
三十、無學心生時正從障解脫
先問:心究竟在哪一世得解脫? 論引本論之說:「初無學心未來生時從障解脫」。所謂障,是煩惱的『得』——「由彼能遮此心生故」。於是有一組對照:金剛喻定正滅之位,彼得正斷,初無學心於正生位正得解脫;金剛喻定已滅之位,彼得已斷,初無學心於已生位名已解脫。
論隨即補三問:未生的無學心與世俗心那時也名解脫,只是此處且說決定要生的那一個,「以於爾時行身世故」。世俗心從何解脫?也是從那個遮心生的障。未解脫位這心豈不也生?答「雖有已生,不似今者」——差別在於彼時「與惑得俱」,此後若生就「無俱惑得」。
易誤處:把『解脫』想成心從什麼地方逃出來。此處所解脫的是煩惱之得這一遮障,是障除而心得生。落地上:這一節示範了本論分析時位的細密——正生、已生、未生三位各有其名,混用一位就全錯。頌疏之釋可對讀。
三十一、道唯在正滅位斷障
先問:道在哪一位上斷障? 頌答「道唯正滅位,能令彼障斷」。論釋其語:「正滅位言顯居現在。正生言顯未來世故」——所以道能斷障只在正滅之時,其餘各位沒有斷障的作用。
論還特地作一對比:這一點不同於解脫。解脫可通於未生者,「以生未生離障同故」;斷障則不然,只在一剎那。寶疏引《正理》補一層:「雖諸學心亦於生位從障解脫,而論但說初無學心生時脫者,據無餘斷證解脫故」。
易誤處:把斷障與解脫看成同一件事的兩個說法。論在此明白分開——斷障限於正滅位,解脫則通於已生未生。落地上:這是全卷分析最細的一節,其價值不在結論而在方法:同一事的不同側面,各有各的時位。
三十二、斷界、離界、滅界
先問:經說三界——斷、離、滅,各以什麼為體? 論答「斷等三界,即分前說無為解脫以為自體」——就是把前面所說的無為解脫分作三分。分法是:「言離界者,謂但離貪。言斷界者,謂斷餘結。言滅界者,謂滅所餘貪等隨眠所隨增事故」。
所以三者不是三種不同的無為,而是同一無為解脫依所對治之別而立三名——離就貪說,斷就其餘諸結說,滅就隨眠所隨增之事說。
易誤處:把三界讀成三個地方或三個階段。它們是無為法的三個分位之名。落地上:這一節與前面『名多事少』一路相承——同一體,隨所對治而立異名。這是本論立名的第三種常法(前二種是隨增上立、隨位次立)。
三十三、厭與離的四句(品末)
先問:能厭是不是就一定能離? 論答不是,並以四句判之。判準有二:厭唯緣苦集——「唯緣苦集所起忍智說名為厭,餘則不然」;離則通緣四諦而以能斷惑為準——「四諦境中所起忍智,能斷惑者皆得離名」。二者一者限所緣、一者限功能,寬窄互有出入,所以成四句。
四句是:緣苦集而不斷惑者,有厭非離;緣滅道而能斷惑者,有離非厭;緣苦集而能斷惑者,亦厭亦離;緣滅道而不斷惑者,非厭非離。
論末補一則實例:先離欲染而後見諦的人,其法忍諸智中凡加行道、解脫道、勝進道所攝的都不令惑斷——「惑已斷故、非斷治故」。
易誤處:把厭與離讀成心情與結果的關係。論所立的是兩個不同的判準(所緣與功能),四句只是兩個判準交錯的窮舉。落地上:四句法是阿毘達磨最常用的工具——遇到兩個概念糾纏不清,先各立判準,再作四句,關係自明。全品以此收束,也正好把讀者交給下一品的智門。
承衍:四疏之鏡
以上是本卷論文自身之義。此下另立一節,收四事:四家之判釋與互異、眾賢之破與覆按、真諦舊譯之異、可對讀之座標。鏡非論,只是換一種讀法看同一段文;並錄不判,各還其位。
一、四家互異之處
本卷是全書第一個四家俱在的單元。 神泰疏是殘本,賢聖品四卷之中只存卷十七,而它恰好整幅覆蓋本卷;其餘三子則泰疏全闕,據實標闕,不以他卷之文充之。泰疏卷首自題「分別賢聖品第六之三」而自標所釋為「論卷二十五」,卷尾又題「俱舍論疏卷第二十五」——首尾卷次三數互異,照錄不判。
科判之式二分。 光記與頌疏的八科幾乎逐字相同;寶疏合前三為一而成六科,科層較寬;泰疏則不立總科表,逐段隨文立問答科(牒前、問、答、徵、舉頌答、釋頌)。四家於『六種姓章八事』的範圍本身並無不同,所異者是分科的粗細。泰疏的體例最古,科判尚未定型為八事並列——這是體例之異,不是缺漏。
泰疏留下一條獨立的頌數證據。 它自標「自下第四有七行半頌明六種種性」——七行半正是一百五十字,恰合正58 至正65前半。這是外於頌本夾注的另一條逐段頌數之證。
論主表態,四家用語三樣而所指一致。 光記作「論主意朋經部,故言彼說應理」,寶疏作「論主評取經部釋也」,泰疏作「論主評云:彼說應理」。三家措辭有詳略而判準全同。泰疏另有一處用語值得一記:它逕引《正理》而稱世親為「經主」,光記寶疏則稱「經部」「論主」——稱謂角度小異,所指是同一人。同樣的情形也見於神足體之破:光記作「論主破餘師」,泰疏作「經主破云」。
頌疏在退果一諍上全不涉部派。 它於此段只釋頌文本身之義理——「不動種姓必無退理;就前五種,唯退法一,姓必不退,謂居下故」,既不標經部有部之名,也不引部派歸屬。與光記逐句標宗、寶疏列三宗總表相比,三家的性格在這一段上分得最清楚。並錄不判。
寶疏獨列一張三宗退果表。 「述有部宗也。依宗輪論,大眾部等,預流果有退、應果不退。經部,預流、應果俱不退。有部,預流不退、應果有退」。光記於同處亦引《宗輪論》而作單線敘述。二疏所繫的三宗歸屬全合,寶疏的列表更見綱要。此屬古德援他論以定部派歸屬,非本論所有,故錄於此節。
一字之異二例。 酥瓶之喻,光記寶疏作所略者為「盛」字,泰疏所略者作『此成』二字——「如世具言此成蘇瓶」。又厭離四句處,泰疏作「說名為狀」而光記頌疏作「厭」。二處皆照錄不判,不臆改。
《婆沙》三說三疏全合。 三十七品出體處,寶疏引「婆沙九十五有三說:一說同此論;一說開戒為二,以十一法為體;一師開為三,謂正語、正業、正命。此論合說,以十法體」,頌疏所引同軌。三家無互異,唯詳略不同。
四證淨與三界處,三疏皆引《正理》補釋。 寶疏引「正理論云於何等法,如何而得法證淨耶?謂唯於苦者,達唯有法無實有情,生決定信」;三界處引「正理七十二云就三界體約假有異,若就實事無有差別」。此屬疏家以他論補本論之未詳,義理無互異,唯錄。
二、眾賢之破與覆按
眾賢兩部論在此品的品名都不作「分別賢聖品」——《順正理論》作「辯賢聖品第六」,《顯宗論》作「辯賢聖品第七」,品號後移一位。以俱舍的品名去搜這兩部論,必得零命中。
退果一諍是本卷唯一三方鼎立之處。 眾賢逐字牒引世親而審之:「今詳經主非善立宗,應審推徵以世俗道得中二果,為實已拔障彼惑種、為不爾耶?若實已拔而許有退,即阿羅漢退義應成」。他又別標兩家:「是故上座立無退失阿羅漢果,理教並無」、「分別論師作如是說:一切聖道皆無有退,故所斷惑畢竟不生」。⇒ 經主、上座、分別論師三家皆主無退,唯有部本宗立有退。三家的理路並不相同(世親評取經部之教理二證,上座逕言理教並無,分別論師則把範圍推到一切聖道),眾賢逐一破之而歸本宗。唯錄不判。
有一處眾賢所破的不是世親。 「依無事」這條理由,眾賢引一段「有餘師言」——把見斷惑無退之理推廣到有頂地繫的修所斷惑亦無退,隨即判「彼說非理,道力異故」。所破者是這個推廣,不是世親的本義。同一訓詞被不同的人引申到不同結論,此為一例。
兩處只是覆按而未另立異見。 增十經一段,眾賢逐字牒引世親原句而未見正面評破語;神足體之破一段亦然。此屬照錄性覆按,誌之。
一處所評的是詮釋角度而非結論。 炭喻經處,眾賢曰「詳經主意,謂此經中先說學位後說無學,今應審察決定可依為世尊言、為經主意」——他質疑的是『先學後無學』這個科判順序究竟出於經文本身還是出於世親的安排。所爭在讀法,不在結論。
解脫蘊之體亦有覆按。 眾賢述世親之意作「非唯勝解得此蘊名。若爾,是何?謂真智力能永除遣貪及瞋癡,即心離垢名解脫蘊」,與寶疏、泰疏所記的同一段相合。
一條誠實的負命題。 《顯宗論》在本卷對應的範圍內,未見任何逐字牒引「經主」之句。但這一零命中所能證明的只有一件事——該論在此範圍未用『經主』這個標名;不能由此推出它於此無異義。《顯宗論》體例本較簡練,逐字牒引經主之句非其所重。
三、真諦舊譯之異
真諦《俱舍釋論》於本卷相應段自成一系,而且是已勘諸卷中場景最工整的一段——六種羅漢、種性先後、從性從果退、學異生六性、退之三種、練根、九種無學、七聖者、滿、四道、三十七品、四證淨、正解脫正智、三界、厭離四句,次第逐段相合。
六姓之名無一全同。 真諦作「一退墮法、二自害法、三守護法、四住不動法、五應通達法、六不壞法」。要當心的是第四姓「住不動法」——它對應的是玄奘的安住法,不是不動法;玄奘的不動法在真諦本作「不壞法」。二本的訓詞可以辨明:真諦第四姓作「若人離最強退墮因緣,雖不恒守,必定應住於所得」,第六姓作「不壞法者,若人必定不如前人有退墮」。望文而以真諦的「住不動法」逕等於玄奘的「不動法」,是這一段最容易踩的一個坑。
一組貫穿全段的訓詞差。 玄奘的「有事/無事」,真諦一律作「有類/無類」——「見惑無類故」,並申之曰「此所依我,必定永無,故說無類」。所指的義理全同,用字全異。
論主表態,真諦本更明白。 玄奘作「彼說應理」,真諦作「此義真實可然」——與光記所標的「意朋經部」正相印證。
三界之名交錯,是本卷最須小心的一處。 玄奘立離界、斷界、滅界;真諦立「滅界、離欲界、永除界」。依訓詞語境比對,其對應是交錯的:玄奘的離界(離貪)對真諦的離欲界(欲滅),玄奘的斷界(斷餘結)對真諦的滅界(餘惑滅),玄奘的滅界(滅彼事)對真諦的永除界(別類滅)。兩本都有一個名字叫『滅界』而所指不同——若以字面逕配,必然錯位。
十物之列名次序二本不同。 玄奘以慧為首,真諦作「信、精進、憶念、三摩提、智慧、喜、捨,及輕安、戒、覺」而以信為首;又玄奘的勤、定、尋,真諦作精進、三摩提、覺。次序之異或反映二本所承誦次不同,此處不強解,誠實記為二本傳承之異。
其餘尚有若干小異可對讀:人名喬底迦真諦作「淨命瞿提柯」;經名增十經真諦作「十增經」;勝進道真諦作增進道;僧寶真諦作「信弟子眾」。體例上玄奘整頌先出而後長行,真諦逐句嵌釋,故玄奘一頌常在真諦本作二偈分述——學異生亦六、學無學滿、厭離四句三處皆然。並錄不判。
四、可對讀之座標
本卷所立的,是一張聖者內部的差別圖。它的骨幹只有兩個變項:根之利鈍,與定之得否。六種種性由此分,九種無學由此分,七聖之四門由此開,學無學之滿由此判,四通行之遲速也由此定。讀完全卷再回頭看,會發現論並沒有把阿羅漢分出高下——所斷的煩惱是同一分,所異的只是走到那裡的資具與速度。
第二條可對讀的線是名與事。三十七個名字只有十個實體,七個聖者只有六個事,三界只是一個無為解脫的三分——本卷三次示範同一種手法:立名依增上的一分、依位次、依所對治。凡讀阿毘達磨的法數而先問『這是名還是事』,多半不會被數目牽走。
第三條線留給下一品。全品收束於厭離四句,而四句所用的忍與智,正是下一品「分別智品」要專門處理的東西。本卷末句說「先離欲染後見諦者」的法忍諸智不令惑斷,已經把讀者的目光引到智門上去了。
Before Reading This Fascicle
The preceding fascicle carried the four approaches and four fruits as far as the arhat; this fascicle, at its very first word, overturns a habitual impression — that having realized arhatship does not mean that everyone is exactly alike. The first sentence of the treatise takes up what precedes very tightly: “as was said above, an arhat of the unshakable lineage, after the first knowledge of exhaustion, gives rise to the knowledge of non-arising. Do arhats, like the stream-enterer and the rest, have differences among them?” This one question opens the gate of the whole fascicle: among arhats there are six kinds of lineage; some must await the season and its conditions before they can enter absorption, others have it present as they wish; some may fall back, others assuredly do not.
The three ancient commentators let the knife of the outline fall in the same place here, and their numbering is word for word the same. Puguang marks: “below, the fifth, explaining the six kinds of lineage. Within it: first, the six arhats; second, whether the six lineages come earlier or later; third, falling back from lineage and from fruit; fourth, the lineages of those in training and of ordinary beings; fifth, the difference of the three fallings back; sixth, the marks of the time of falling back from a fruit; seventh, the differences in the refining of the faculties; eighth, the nine persons beyond training.” Yuanhui has: “from here the fifth, explaining the six kinds of lineage, and within it eight: first the six arhats, second whether the six lineages come earlier or later, third falling back from lineage and from fruit, fourth the lineages of those in training and of ordinary beings, fifth the difference of the three fallings back, sixth the marks of the time of falling back from a fruit, seventh the differences in the refining of the faculties, eighth the nine persons beyond training” — hardly a character apart from Puguang. Fabao, on the other hand, gathers the first three into one and so has six: “below, the fifth of the main text, explaining the six kinds of lineage. First, the six kinds of arhat; second, the six kinds among those in training and ordinary beings; third, the difference of the three kinds of falling back; fourth, the time of the six fallings back from a fruit and the rest; fifth, the differences in the refining of the faculties; sixth, the nine kinds of those beyond training.” The three houses divided their fascicles independently, and yet the boundary agrees wholly with Xuanzang’s — from which it is plain that this cut was not forced upon the text by later hands.
There is one further thing in this fascicle rarely met with in this book: of the seven fascicles of Shentai’s commentary that survive, only Fascicle Seventeen belongs to the Chapter on the Worthy and the Noble, and it happens to cover the content of this fascicle entire — at its head it marks of itself, “from here below, the fourth, seven and a half lines of stanza explaining the six kinds of lineage. Within it the first one and a half lines of stanza explain the arhat,” and at its end, the four alternatives of disgust and dispassion once explained, it closes. This is therefore the first unit in the whole book for which all four houses are present; wherever below the four are set out together, it is expressly marked.
What must be said first is this: the longest stretch of prose in this fascicle is not about numbered dharmas but is one long exchange — whether the fruit of the arhat can in the end be fallen back from. Within this stretch four houses hold different opinions, the Sautrāntikas, the Elder, the Masters of Distinction, and the Sarvāstivāda school itself; the author too plainly declares where he stands, and yet in the end he still concludes by returning to his own school with “the Vibhāṣā masters state it as settled: the fruit of the arhat too admits of falling back.” The knack of reading this stretch is to keep asking, “who is speaking now?” — and every section below marks it out.
I. Arhats Divide into Six Kinds: Liberation Dependent on Circumstance and Liberation Not Dependent on It
First ask: since all alike have cut off the afflictions entire, what difference can there still be among arhats? The treatise answers directly — the difference lies not in what has been cut off but in the faculties one is born with. “In the sūtras it is said that the arhat, because of difference of lineage, is of six kinds: first the dharma of falling back, second the dharma of deliberation, third the dharma of guarding, fourth the dharma of abiding, fifth the dharma of being able to reach, sixth the dharma of the unshakable.” The first five are all produced from the line of “one resolute through faith” (in whom confidence predominates and the faculties are duller) at the stage of training, and are together named the liberation of mind that is cherished and dependent on circumstance; the sixth is produced from the line of “one attained through view” (in whom discernment predominates and the faculties are keener), and is named the unshakable liberation of mind.
The name “liberation dependent on circumstance” calls for care. It does not mean “a temporary liberation” but “liberation upon awaiting the time” — “they are also called liberation dependent on circumstance, because it must await the time and because there is liberation. The first word being elided, one says it as one says ‘a butter jar.’” Fearing a misreading, the treatise adds an instance of elision on purpose: a jar that holds butter is called for short a butter jar, the first word being dropped. And what is the time awaited? “That is, only when the supports, the freedom from illness, the place, and other such excellent conditions come together can he enter absorption” — supports, body, and place must meet before absorption can be entered at all. On this simile the glosses of the four houses agree wholly: Puguang has “as one says ‘a butter jar’: in full one should say ‘a jar holding butter,’ but the initial character ‘holding’ being elided one says merely ‘a butter jar,’” while Shentai has “as the world says in full ‘this is made a butter jar,’ the initial words ‘this is made’ being elided, one says merely a butter jar.”
The easy error: to take the six as six grades of “higher and lower power.” Higher and lower they do indeed have, but the criterion the treatise hangs them upon is the faculties and preparation, not the amount of affliction cut off — the afflictions cut off by all six kinds of arhat are the same. In practice: when you come to the long stretch on “falling back” further on, remember that what is fallen back from is never the exhaustion of outflows but absorption and lineage — establish this point first, and that dispute becomes legible.
II. Is a Lineage Had from the First, or Refined into Afterward?
First ask: are these six lineages fixed at birth, or cultivated into being? The treatise answers, “it is not fixed,” and adjudges it with one stanza — “some are the lineage had from the first, some are got afterward by refining the faculties.” Taken finely: the dharma of falling back must be had from the first; the five from the dharma of deliberation on may also be got afterward. So there are those who are of the nature of the dharma of deliberation from the start, and there are those who were of the nature of the dharma of falling back and afterward refined the faculties and turned into the dharma of deliberation, and so on up to the unshakable.
All six names are figures of speech, not serial numbers. The treatise gives a gloss for each in turn: the dharma of falling back is “that on meeting the slightest condition he falls back from what he has obtained — not so with the dharma of deliberation and the rest”; the dharma of deliberation is “that, fearing to fall back and lose, he constantly deliberates upon slaying himself”; the dharma of guarding is “that he gladly wards and guards what he has obtained”; the dharma of abiding is “that apart from a strong condition of falling back he can avoid falling back even without warding himself, and apart from strong preparation he also makes no further advance”; the dharma of being able to reach is “that his nature is capable, he is apt at refining the faculties, and he swiftly reaches the unshakable”; the dharma of the unshakable is “that he assuredly does not fall back.” Yuanhui lists the glosses of all six in full, and of the four houses is the handiest for a beginner — “first, the dharma of falling back: on meeting the slightest condition he falls back from what he has obtained. Second, the dharma of deliberation: fearing to fall back and lose, he constantly deliberates upon slaying himself. Third, the dharma of guarding: he wards and guards the dharma he has formerly obtained.”
These six take shape already at the stage of training. The treatise gives a table of their arrangement: the first and the second both lack constant preparation and reverent preparation, and are divided into two only because the faculties differ as keen and dull; the third, guarding, has constant preparation only; the fourth, abiding, has reverent preparation only; the fifth has both and yet is still of dull faculty; the sixth is of keen faculty and has both complete. The easy error: to take the name for the destiny. The treatise expressly blocks it — “one of the lineage that is the dharma of falling back does not assuredly fall back, and so on up to one of the dharma of being able to reach who is not assuredly able to reach; these names are established only with regard to there being such a possibility.” In practice: these names are established with regard to “possibility,” not to necessity; and the sentence below, “therefore the six arhats are found in all three realms,” holds good only on the strength of this point.
III. Four Fall Back from Lineage, Five from the Fruit — and What Is Fallen Back From Is Never the Portion Had from the First
First ask: among the six, who falls back? And is it the lineage or the fruit that is fallen back from? The stanza answers, “four fall back from lineage, five from the fruit, and not from what was first.” The unshakable assuredly does not fall back; the first five all admit of it. Of these, the last four may fall back from lineage; the dharma of falling back alone has no lineage to fall back from — because it is already at the lowest grade. From the fruit, all five may fall back.
The pivot lies in the two words “not from what was first.” The treatise explains it in three layers: for one at the stage beyond training, the lineage in which he abode at the former stage of training will not be fallen back from, because it was made doubly, by the path of training and the path beyond training; for one at the stage of training, the lineage in which he abode at the former stage of an ordinary being will not be fallen back from either, because it was made doubly, by the mundane and the supramundane path; only the four lineages beginning with the dharma of deliberation, newly got afterward by refining the faculties, admit of being fallen back from. From this a hard conclusion is drawn — “so it is settled that there is no falling back from the fruit of the stream-enterer.”
The easy error: to read “the arhat may fall back” as “he may fall back into being an ordinary being.” The treatise’s reckoning runs precisely the other way: one beyond training of the dharma of falling back has three roads before him (advancing his faculties, falling back to abide at the stage of training, abiding at his own station and entering final nirvāṇa), the dharma of deliberation four, and the rest in order five, six, and seven; and moreover “if the four beginning with the dharma of deliberation fall back to abide at a stage of training, they return to abide at the corresponding station and at no other” — even his falling back goes only to the station that answers to himself. In practice: this section is really drawing a map of the boundaries of falling back; and once the boundaries are drawn clearly, one knows what ground the great dispute of the next section is fought over.
IV. Why the Stream-Enterer Assuredly Does Not Fall Back: Resting on No Entity and Resting on an Entity
First ask: on what ground is it said that the afflictions abandoned through seeing, once cut off, do not arise again? The reason the Sarvāstivādins give is a single sentence — “because what is abandoned through seeing rests on no entity”; and Puguang marks who is speaking: “the Sarvāstivādins answer. Because what is abandoned through seeing rests on no entity, there is assuredly no principle of falling back.” Resting on no entity means that the view of self turns in dependence upon the imagined “I,” and that all the confusions abandoned through seeing have this view for their root; “since the entity of a self does not exist, it is called resting on no entity, and since there is no entity there is assuredly no principle of falling back.”
The treatise at once raises an objection against itself: does that not amount to saying that this affliction “takes what is not there as its object”? Answer: no — for the object upon which it rests is still the four truths, only that it rests upon them otherwise than as they really are. Pressed again: which of the afflictions does not rest upon the truths otherwise than as they are? The answer lies in a difference: the afflictions abandoned through cultivation each have their real thing (the agreeable, the disagreeable, and the rest), whereas those abandoned through seeing conjure an “I” upon the four truths out of nothing. The treatise states the same matter again from three angles, and gives at last a simile — “just as, upon a rope or the like, one may on the instant take it for a snake”: in haste one may see a rope as a snake, but never once one has examined; the afflictions abandoned through cultivation are benighted and arise without waiting for examination, and so a noble person may still lose mindfulness and fall back into them; the afflictions abandoned through seeing are of the nature of reckoning, and one examination brings the truths in sight, and so they assuredly do not return.
The easy error: to take “resting on no entity” for “the object is a sheer nothing.” The treatise has itself blocked that reading. In practice: this passage gives a usable criterion — an attachment built upon a fictitious object never returns once it is seen through; an inveterate habit built upon a real thing must still be guarded against after it has been seen through. In practice the work each requires is different from the start.
V. The Sautrāntika Account and the Author’s Declaration of Where He Stands
First ask: in this dispute, on which side does Vasubandhu himself stand? The text of the treatise has only one sentence — “the Sautrāntika masters say: from the state of an arhat too there is no falling back. What they say accords with principle.” The four words “what they say accords with principle” look light, and yet the ancient commentators unanimously take them for the author’s open declaration. Puguang says it most fully: “below, the Sautrāntikas explain falling back and not falling back with regard to the four fruits. The author’s intent sides with the Sautrāntikas, and so he says that what they say accords with principle”; Fabao changes the wording to “the author by his appraisal takes up the Sautrāntika explanation”; and Shentai is terser still, in four words — “the author appraises it, saying: what they say accords with principle.”
The Sautrāntika argument runs along two roads. Puguang marks the speaker sentence by sentence: “‘by scripture and by reasoning’: the Sautrāntikas answer”; “‘how is it by scripture’: the pressing.” Along the road of scriptural testimony he cites three passages: that affliction cut off by noble discernment is called really cut off; that the Buddha says one in training ought to be heedful and does not say so of the arhat; and that the Buddha told Ānanda that gain and honor and the rest obstruct even the arhat, yet “does not say that he falls back from the fruit of the arhat, but only that he falls back from and loses the pleasant abiding in the present dharma.” Along the road of reasoning there is a dilemma: if the counteracting path has already arisen, he ought not to fall back into affliction; if the path has not arisen, he ought not to be called one whose outflows are exhausted — “and if his outflows are not exhausted, on what ground is he called worthy?”
The easy error: to suppose that the author’s declaration amounts to the treatise’s changing its school. It does not — at the end of this fascicle it still concludes by returning to its own school with the account of the Vibhāṣā masters. In practice: whenever in reading this treatise you meet with words like “what they say accords with principle” or “this is best,” hold two things in mind at once: here is where the author’s inclination lies, and the conclusion of his own school is still to come. That the two stand together is precisely the form of this book.
VI. How to Read the Liberation Cherished and Dependent on Circumstance: What Is Fallen Back From Is Absorption, Not the Fruit
First ask: since the sūtra does speak of a “liberation cherished and dependent on circumstance,” is that not an admission that the arhat falls back? The Sautrāntika answer is not to deny the text but to ask one question, “what is it that he falls back from?” — “but one ought to examine what it is that he falls back from: is it the fruit-nature of worthiness, or the meditative absorptions and the rest?” Puguang marks this as the Sautrāntikas citing and explaining through an objection: “‘if it be said that there is falling back, and so it is not called cherished’: the Sautrāntikas cite the objection and explain it through.” The answer is: what is fallen back from is the concentration of the fundamental meditative absorptions, which becomes present only upon awaiting the season, and so is named liberation dependent on circumstance; and because he longs for it again and again for the sake of the pleasant abiding in the present dharma, it is named “cherished.”
The treatise at once records another account besides: “some say: this absorption is a place of savoring that is cherished; whereas the fruit-nature liberation of the arhats accompanies them constantly, and so should not be called ‘dependent on circumstance’; and since he no longer longs for it, neither is it called ‘cherished.’” — which assigns both words, “circumstance” and “cherished,” to the side of absorption with outflows. Then the Sautrāntikas object once more: if the fruit-nature could be fallen back from, why does the World-Honored One speak only of the pleasant abiding in the present dharma as able to be fallen back from? Puguang quotes their words as: “the Sautrāntikas object in return. If it be said that the fruit-nature of worthiness, which is without outflows, admits of being fallen back from and lost even by one of dull faculties, then why does the World-Honored One speak only of the pleasant abiding in the present dharma, the absorptions with outflows that have been realized, as admitting in principle of being fallen back from, and not of what is without outflows? By this it is proved that the fruit-nature of the arhat must be unshakable.”
The easy error: to read the names “the dharma of falling back” and “the dharma of not falling back” as bearing on whether the fruit-station can be fallen back from. The treatise here gives the source of the naming itself — it is established with regard to “there being or not being falling back with regard to the pleasant abiding in the present dharma obtained.” In practice: hereafter, whenever you meet the words “so-and-so fell back and lost,” first ask in three layers: was it the fruit, the absorption, or the present enjoyment that was fallen back from? Confound the three and this whole stretch becomes unreadable.
VII. The Difference among the Three Names: Not Falling Back, Abiding, and Unshakable
First ask: not falling back, abiding, unshakable — they all sound like not falling back; where is the difference? The treatise closes the matter with one question and answer: “what is the difference among not falling back, abiding, and unshakable? What is not got by refining the faculties is called not falling back; what is got by refining the faculties is called unshakable.” Puguang marks both parties to this exchange — “‘what is the difference among not falling back, abiding, and unshakable’: the question”; “‘what is not got by refining the faculties’ down to ‘the difference among the three’: the Sautrāntikas answer. Not falling back is got by one’s own nature and not through refining the faculties; what is got by refining the faculties is called unshakable.”
The dividing line among the three runs thus: not falling back is got by one’s own nature and not through refining the faculties; unshakable is got through refining the faculties. The excellent attainments raised by these two do not fall back even on meeting a condition of falling back. The dharma of abiding, however, can only avoid falling back from the merits in which he already abides, and “cannot draw forth any further excellent merits; and if he should draw them forth, from that portion he may still fall back” — he has enough to hold what he has and not enough to open new ground.
The easy error: to take the dharma of abiding for another name of the dharma of the unshakable. The treatise has already parted them expressly: abiding is “holding fast what one already has,” unshakable is “not losing even what is newly got.” In practice: the three names are in fact three degrees of stability — stable from the first, stable by cultivation, and stable only where one stands. To judge for oneself which of the three one belongs to is more useful than remembering the names.
VIII. The Affair of Godhika: What Was Fallen Back From Was Absorption, Not the Fruit
First ask: Godhika took a knife and slew himself — is that not iron proof that an arhat falls back from the fruit? The treatise explains it through thus: he “formerly at the stage of training savored the liberation dependent on circumstance to excess,” and being besides of dull faculties fell back and lost it again and again, whereupon he deeply reproached himself in disgust and took a knife and slew himself; and because he had no clinging whatever to body and life, at the time of his death he on the contrary obtained arhatship and forthwith entered final nirvāṇa — so “Godhika too did not fall back from and lose the fruit of the arhat.”
The ancient commentators here mark a divergence between two readings. Fabao records it most clearly: “the author explains the sūtra through. The Sarvāstivādins hold that Godhika fell back from the fruit of worthiness and obtained it again. On the Sautrāntika position, Godhika fell back repeatedly at the stage of training and deeply reproached himself and the rest, and at the time of his death obtained the fruit of the arhat.” Puguang likewise marks this passage as “the Sautrāntikas again explain a sūtra through.” That is to say, of one and the same affair the Sarvāstivādins read a falling back from the fruit and a regaining of it, while the Sautrāntikas read repeated falling back at the stage of training and the obtaining of the fruit at death.
The easy error: to suppose that explaining a sūtra through means altering it. The Sautrāntikas altered not one character of the text; what they altered was “which portion it was that he fell back from.” In practice: in reading biographical scriptural testimony, first part “the fact” from “the adjudication of the fact” — and this passage is the clearest demonstration of it in the whole fascicle.
IX. The Three Objections from the Sūtra of the Increase by Ten and the Sarvāstivādins’ Challenge
First ask: how is it proved that liberation dependent on circumstance is not the entity of the fruit of worthiness? The Sautrāntikas adduce the Sūtra of the Increase by Ten — “one dharma is to be aroused, namely the liberation of mind that is cherished and dependent on circumstance; one dharma is to be realized, namely the unshakable liberation of mind” — and at once raise three objections: first, if the fruit of worthiness were itself the liberation of mind cherished and dependent on circumstance, why should the fruit of worthiness be spoken of twice over in this sūtra? Second, nowhere at all is the fruit of the arhat called “to be aroused”; it is called only “to be realized.” Third, the sūtra says that the fruit of worthiness comprised under dull faculties is called “to be aroused”: if this is to show that he is able to arouse it, then one of keen faculties is the more able; if it is to show that he ought to arouse it, then one of keen faculties the more ought to. The conclusion is that “liberation dependent on circumstance is not the fruit-nature of worthiness.” Puguang marks its character as “the Sautrāntikas adduce a sūtra to prove that the fruit-nature of worthiness is not liberation dependent on circumstance.”
The Sarvāstivādins at once return an objection: “‘if that is so, then why is liberation dependent on circumstance said to be the fruit of worthiness’: the Sarvāstivādins object. If liberation dependent on circumstance is not the entity of the fruit of worthiness, why is liberation dependent on circumstance said to be the fruit of worthiness?” The Sautrāntikas answer: that name is established with regard to a class of the fruit of worthiness whose faculties are dull and who must await the season before absorption becomes present, and the contrary of it is called liberation not dependent on circumstance; Puguang marks, “‘that is, there is a fruit of worthiness’ down to ‘is called liberation not dependent on circumstance’: the Sautrāntikas answer,” and Fabao marks the same, “the Sautrāntikas answer. The name is established on the ground of awaiting or not awaiting the circumstance for obtaining absorption.”
The easy error: to take “to be aroused” and “to be realized” for synonymous turns of phrase. The whole of the Sautrāntikas’ second objection is built upon the division of labor between these two words. In practice: in reading argument that rests on scriptural testimony, note that what the arguer rests upon is very often a division of labor among terms rather than a doctrinal assertion — this is one of the forms of argument most used in this treatise.
X. The Sūtra of the Simile of the Charcoal and the Return to His Own School
First ask: the Sūtra of the Simile of the Charcoal says expressly that a noble disciple, while walking or standing, may through the losing of mindfulness give rise to evil and unwholesome thoughts — is that not falling back from the fruit of worthiness? This objection is raised by the Sarvāstivādins. Puguang marks it plainly: “‘if that is so, then you must explain’ down to ‘is the arhat’: the Sarvāstivādins again adduce a sūtra in objection,” and Fabao likewise marks, “the Sarvāstivādins adduce a sūtra in defense.” The Sautrāntikas’ explaining through is: the one who “has already forever vomited forth all the dharmas conformable to outflows and has obtained coolness” is the arhat, whereas the losing of mindfulness and the arising of thoughts belong to the stage of training, before he “had penetrated it well” — “the former passage is spoken with regard to the stage of training, and so there is no fault in it.” Puguang marks this as “the Sautrāntikas explain the sūtra through,” and Fabao has, “the Sautrāntikas note that the later text cites ‘he has already forever vomited forth all the dharmas conformable to outflows and has obtained coolness’; by this later text he is the arhat.”
The wide dispute being thus finished, the treatise concludes by returning to its own school in a single sentence: “the Vibhāṣā masters state it as settled: the fruit of the arhat too admits of falling back.” Puguang marks here, “the wide dispute being finished, he concludes by returning to his own school.”
The easy error: to take the return to his own school for the author’s own final judgment. Having said above that “what they say accords with principle,” and here concluding that there is falling back, the two stand together without contradiction — and this is precisely the form of the treatise, “he sets up the Sarvāstivāda sense, and wherever there is a one-sided place refutes it with the Sautrāntika sense.” In practice: meeting an ending of this two-sided kind, what a reader has to do is not to take a side for the ancients but to hold fast the grounds of each of the two parties. The adjudication of the schools belongs to a weighing of doctrine, and is not for a reader’s momentary opinion.
XI. Those in Training and Ordinary Beings Also Have Six · but the Faculties Are Not Refined on the Path of Seeing
First ask: are the six kinds of lineage the arhat’s alone? They are not. The stanza answers, “those in training and ordinary beings likewise have six; refining the faculties is not on the path of seeing,” and the reason is of the simplest: since the six kinds of the fruit of worthiness have these for their antecedents, the antecedents naturally have six kinds too.
The point lies in the second half of the line. At the stage of the path of seeing the faculties assuredly cannot be refined, “because at this stage there is no room to raise the preparation” — the path of seeing is swift, and there is no time to raise the preparation for refining the faculties. So the faculties can be refined only at the stage of one resolute through faith and at the stage of an ordinary being, just as at the stage beyond training. Yuanhui fills it out clearly: “but on the path of seeing there is assuredly no refining of the faculties, because the path of seeing is swift and there is no room to raise the preparation for refining the faculties.” The treatise then adduces a sūtra in evidence: of the pleasant abidings in the present dharma comprised under the four kinds of higher mind, any one whatever admits of falling back, whereas of the unshakable liberation of mind “I say it as settled that there is no cause or condition by which one could fall back from this.”
The easy error: to suppose that refining the faculties is an exercise that may be taken up at any time. It has a limit of station — it cannot be cultivated on the path of seeing. In practice: reading this together with the earlier passage on falling back, one finds that the treatise’s attitude toward the stages of practice is very concrete: what can be done at what station cannot be stated in general terms.
XII. Falling Back Is of Three Kinds: From What Is Obtained, from What Is Not Obtained, from Enjoyment
First ask: since the dharma of the unshakable does not fall back, how is it said that he falls back from the pleasant abiding in the present dharma? The treatise’s solution is first to divide the word “falling back” into three — “first, falling back from what is obtained, that is, falling back from the excellent merits already obtained; second, falling back from what is not obtained, that is, being unable to obtain excellent merits; third, falling back from enjoyment, that is, the excellent merits already obtained not being present.”
The division made, each has his own portion. The World-Honored One has only the falling back from enjoyment, because his merits are so many that they cannot all be present at once; the dharma of the unshakable has two, from enjoyment and from what is not obtained, because there are merits more excellent than his own not yet obtained; the remaining five may have all three. Whereupon “taken in the sense of falling back from enjoyment, to say that one of the dharma of the unshakable falls back from the pleasant abiding in the present dharma involves no fault of contradiction” — the contradiction dissolves in a fine division of the term.
The easy error: to read “the Buddha too falls back” as the Buddha’s losing something. The treatise says it very plainly: his kind is only “not being present.” In practice: the treatise’s way of dissolving contradictions is demonstrated here at its cleanest — first ask how many senses the word has, then ask which sense each person occupies. Hereafter, when two sentences of scripture seem to conflict, this move will often serve.
Here the treatise records besides an account of those who hold that there is no falling back: “all liberations without outflows are called unshakable,” which it closes with “explain it through as above; it should not be made an objection,” recording it without adjudication.
XIII. One Who Falls Back Assuredly Obtains It Again, and Does Not Do What Is Contrary to the Fruit
First ask: having fallen back, will he go on falling back until death? The treatise answers that he will not — “there is no dying in the interval after falling back from a fruit, because within a moment after falling back he assuredly obtains it again.” The scriptural testimony is: the learned noble disciples, though they fall back and lose right mindfulness, “are very soon able again to make what they have fallen into be exhausted, sunk away, ceased, and departed”; were it otherwise, “the fruit of cultivating the holy life would not be a secure place that may be entrusted with confidence” — a fruit of the holy life that might be lost past return would not amount to a place one could entrust oneself to.
The second question is finer: will he at the time of falling back do the deeds he would not do while abiding in the fruit? The treatise answers that he will not, on the ground that conscience predominates — “since conscience predominates, even at a time of temporary falling back he assuredly does not commit them, just as a strong man, though he stumbles, does not fall prostrate.” Yuanhui explains the two sentences together very fully: “in every falling back from a fruit, within a moment he assuredly obtains it again, and there is none who dies without obtaining it… Moreover the deeds he does not do while abiding in the fruit he assuredly does not commit even at the time of falling back from the fruit, since conscience and shame predominate — just as a strong man, though he stumbles, does not fall prostrate.”
The easy error: to read the simile of the strong man as “he will not stumble.” The point of the simile is that even having stumbled he does not go down altogether — tripping and sprawling are two different things. In practice: this section is really adding a safety rail to the great dispute that precedes it — even granting that there is falling back, both its extent and its duration are locked shut.
XIV. How Many Paths Does Refining the Faculties Take: Nine Uninterrupted and Nine of Liberation
First ask: how much labor does it cost to turn a lineage once? The stanza answers, “at the stage beyond training, refining the faculties takes nine uninterrupted paths and nine paths of liberation, because of long habituation; at the stage of training, one.” At the stage beyond training the turning of each nature takes nine uninterrupted paths and nine paths of liberation, as many as when the fruit of the arhat was first obtained; at the stage of training only one uninterrupted and one of liberation, as when the first fruit was first obtained. The reason is that “that dull-faculty nature comes of long-continued habituation, and a small exertion cannot make it turn” — dullness of faculty was habituated over long aeons and is not to be flipped over at one effort.
Its nature and what it rests upon: these paths are “in every case comprised only under the nature without outflows,” because “a noble person assuredly has no principle of turning his faculties by a path with outflows.” The body it rests upon is only the three continents of the human destiny, “because in the other places there is no falling back”; as for the level it rests upon, the stage beyond training extends to nine (access, the intermediate, the four meditative absorptions, and the three formless), and the stage of training only to six (the last three being taken away), because “there is no fruit of one in training comprised under a formless level.”
The easy error: to suppose that refining the faculties is taking up a new set of exercises. The treatise says it is “as when he obtained the fruit of worthiness” — the same path is used, only walked once again. In practice: this section gives a very solid reminder — the faculties one is born with can be turned, but at a cost equal to the original realizing of the fruit. Knowing the cost, one will not think refining the faculties too light a thing.
XV. The Nine Kinds of Noble Person at the Stage beyond Training
First ask: how many kinds of person are there in all at the stage beyond training? The stanza answers, “seven śrāvakas and two Buddhas; the difference is by the nine faculties.” The treatise explains: the five beginning with the dharma of falling back, with the unshakable divided into two (got by refining the faculties and had from the first, there being an earlier and a later), make seven kinds of śrāvaka; the pratyekabuddha and the great awakened one are called the two awakened ones, making nine persons in all. And the reason the nine are nine is “through the difference of the nine grades of faculty, the lowest of the low and the rest.”
Here is a good instance of gathering and dividing. Puguang adduces Correct Principle to prove the nine and the six against each other: “but another sūtra says that those beyond training are nine, from the first, the dharma of falling back, to the last, liberated in both parts. Their dharma of not falling back is comprised in our dharma of the unshakable; their two liberations are comprised within our six; and so the Abhidharma says there are only six” — the sūtra says nine, the treatise says six, and this is no contradiction but a difference of gathering and dividing.
The easy error: to read the nine persons as nine grades of higher and lower. Their difference lies in the faculties, not in the amount of affliction cut off. In practice: in reading numbered dharmas one often meets the same set of facts opened out into different numbers (six, seven, nine); and this passage gives the criterion — first ask by which gate this set has been divided; change the gate and the number changes.
XVI. The Seven Noble Persons: Four Gates Open Out Seven, the Real Items Being Only Six
First ask: how many kinds of noble person are there in all at the stages of training and beyond training, and on what are they divided? The treatise lists seven names — one who follows through faith, one who follows the dharma, one resolute through faith, one attained through view, one who witnesses with the body, one liberated through discernment, one liberated in both parts — and gathers them under four gates: “by difference of preparation the first two kinds are established”; “by difference of faculty the next two kinds are established”; “by the obtaining of the absorption of cessation the name one who witnesses with the body is established”; “by difference of liberation the last two kinds are established.”
Seven names but six items. The treatise at once explains: on the path of seeing there are the two persons, one who follows through faith and one who follows the dharma; on reaching the path of cultivation two other names are established, one resolute through faith and one attained through view; and on reaching the stage beyond training two names again, liberation dependent on circumstance and liberation not dependent on circumstance — so that “though the names are seven, the separate items are only six,” the stanza showing the reason by “since on each of the three paths there are two.” This is one person changing his name three times at three stages, not seven different persons.
The treatise also demonstrates in passing a multiplying of numbered dharmas: one who follows through faith becomes three as reckoned by faculty, five by lineage, fifteen by path, seventy-three by freedom from defilement, and nine by the body he rests upon; and the five multiplied together “come together to one hundred forty-seven thousand eight hundred twenty-five kinds.”
The easy error: to take the seven noble persons for seven classes of people unrelated to one another. In practice: this section together with the one before it is the place where this fascicle teaches most concentratedly “the difference between a name and an item” — names may be established gate by gate, but of items there are only so many. Whenever one reads the numbered dharmas of Abhidharma, first ask whether it is a name or an item.
XVII. Liberated in Both Parts and Liberated through Discernment
First ask: all being arhats alike, why is there a division into both parts and discernment? The criterion is a single one — whether the absorption of cessation has been obtained. “Those arhats who obtain the absorption of cessation are called liberated in both parts, because by the force of discernment and of absorption they are liberated from the afflictions and from the obstruction to liberation”; “the rest, who have not obtained the absorption of cessation, are called liberated through discernment, because by the force of discernment alone they are liberated from the obstruction of the afflictions.” What is meant by “both” is that discernment and absorption are both there; and the obstructions departed from are two as well — the obstruction of the afflictions and the obstruction to liberation (the obstruction of absorption).
Yuanhui puts this layer more penetratingly: “those among the six kinds of arhat who obtain the absorption of cessation are called liberated in both parts, for first by the force of discernment they are liberated from the obstruction of confusion, and further they obtain the absorption of cessation and are liberated from the obstruction of absorption, and hence are called ‘both’; ‘the rest are called liberated through discernment’… because by the force of discernment alone they are liberated from the obstruction of the afflictions, and not being free of the obstruction of absorption they cannot be called ‘both.’”
The easy error: to suppose that liberated through discernment means “liberated but not thoroughly.” As to the obstruction of the afflictions the two are alike; the difference lies in the obstruction of absorption. In practice: this point explains why the treatise, in speaking of merits, again and again singles out the absorption of cessation — it is the measuring rod by which the inside of the stage beyond training is divided.
XVIII. What Is Meant by “Fullness”
First ask: at the same stage of training, why is one man alone called full? The treatise answers, by three causes — faculty, fruit, and absorption. “One in training alone obtains the name of fullness at the stage of training, and that by three causes complete, namely faculty, fruit, and absorption.” The treatise then ranges five combinations one by one: by faculty only (one attained through view, not yet free of the defilement of desire); by fruit only (one resolute through faith who is a non-returner but has not obtained the absorption of cessation); by faculty and fruit (one attained through view who is a non-returner but has not obtained the absorption of cessation); by fruit and absorption (one resolute through faith who has obtained the absorption of cessation); and by all three complete (one attained through view who has obtained the absorption of cessation). And it says expressly that at the stage of training there is no obtaining the name of fullness “by absorption only” or “by faculty and absorption only.”
Beyond training there is one cause less. “Those beyond training alone obtain the name of fullness at the stage beyond training by the two, faculty and absorption,” because at the stage beyond training there is no fullness that is “not a fruit,” and so no separate item of fullness through fruit is established. Yuanhui here gives the most memorable table of correspondences: “first, fullness through faculty, that is, being of keen faculty; second, fullness through fruit, that is, having attained the non-returner; third, fullness through absorption, that is, having obtained the absorption of cessation.”
The easy error: to read “fullness” as the fullness of perfect Buddhahood. The fullness here is completeness as compared with others at the same station, not an ultimate sense. In practice: this section is the first place in the fascicle where the three variables of faculty, fruit, and absorption are set side by side and combined — and the later analyses of the four paths, the four modes of penetrating progress, and even the thirty-seven limbs all use the same manner of thinking.
XIX. All Paths, Spoken of in Brief, Are Only Four
First ask: the road of cultivation has a thousand threads; can it be gathered into a few? The treatise answers, into four: “the path of preparation is that after which the uninterrupted path arises. The uninterrupted path is that which can cut off the obstruction to be cut off. The path of liberation is that which arises first after the obstruction to be cut off has been liberated from. The path of further advance is the paths other than these three.” These four names are established with regard to four positions in the single business of cutting off obstruction — before the cutting, the cutting itself, the first arising after the cutting, and the rest.
The treatise at once glosses the sense of “path”: “what is the sense of ‘path’? It is the road to nirvāṇa, because riding upon it one can go to the city of nirvāṇa,” and a further explanation, “or else the path is what seeking rests upon, because resting upon it one seeks the fruit that is nirvāṇa.” And since a path means what can cut off, how do liberation and further advance also get the name of path? The treatise gives three reasons: that they are of a class with the path and turn into the higher grade; that the force of each earlier one reaches to each later; and that they can lead one to enter nirvāṇa without remaining support.
The easy error: to see the four paths as four stretches of time. They are divided with regard to functional position within one and the same cutting off of affliction, and are not the names of four stages. In practice: with this rod in hand, one may hereafter ask of any passage on the cutting off of affliction, “which of the paths is this?” — and the later parts of the treatise, in analyzing what is with and without outflows and in analyzing the levels, use it again and again.
XX. The Four Modes of Penetrating Progress: Pleasant and Painful by the Level, Slow and Swift by the Faculties
First ask: bound alike for nirvāṇa, why do some walk with labor and some with ease? The treatise sets out four modes of penetrating progress — painful and slow, painful and swift, pleasant and slow, pleasant and swift. There are two criteria: which level one rests upon and which faculties. “A path arising in dependence upon the four fundamental meditative absorptions is called pleasant penetrating progress, because it gathers in the factors, calm and insight are equal, and it turns spontaneously”; one arising in dependence upon the formless, access, or the intermediate absorption is called painful penetrating progress, “because it does not gather in the factors, calm and insight are unequal, and it must turn with labor.” Among these, in the formless insight is less and calm greater, and in access and the intermediate insight is greater and calm less — unbalanced at both ends. As for slow and swift, “dull faculty is named slow, keen faculty swift.”
The easy error: to read “painful” as undergoing suffering. The painful here is labor in walking the path, meaning that calm and insight are unequal and one must force oneself; it has nothing to do with painful feeling. In practice: this section really gives a very serviceable table for self-examination — whether calm and insight are in balance decides whether the road goes smoothly; whether the faculties are keen or dull decides whether it goes fast. Neither can stand in for the other.
XXI. The Thirty-Seven Factors of Awakening and the Sense of “Awakening”
First ask: why are the thirty-seven limbs of the path called factors of awakening? The treatise first lists the names — the four foundations of mindfulness, the four right abandonings, the four bases of supernormal power, the five faculties, the five powers, the seven limbs of full awakening, the eight limbs of the noble path — and then glosses the sense: “the knowledge of exhaustion and the knowledge of non-arising are called awakening,” and “the thirty-seven dharmas conduce toward awakening, and therefore all are called factors of awakening.” So “factor” has the sense of conducing toward, not the sense of a part.
Awakening is again divided into three according to the person. The treatise says that “according to the one who awakens, three awakenings are separately established: first the awakening of a śrāvaka, second the awakening of a pratyekabuddha, third unsurpassed awakening”; and that they are called awakening “because ignorance and the sleep of ignorance have both been forever cut off, and because he knows as it really is that what was to be done has been done and is not to be done again” — the one being the cutting off entire, the other the knowing for oneself that the work is finished. These two sentences answer exactly to the knowledge of exhaustion and the knowledge of non-arising.
The easy error: to take the factors of awakening for a term belonging to the Mahāyāna alone. Here the three awakenings expressly extend to all three vehicles, and the awakening meant is just the knowledge of exhaustion and the knowledge of non-arising. In practice: hold fast the point that “awakening = the knowledge of exhaustion and the knowledge of non-arising,” and the treatise will use it once more further on when it speaks of the entity of right knowledge — “as for the entity of right knowledge, it is as was said above of awakening.” Before and after, it is one rod.
XXII. Thirty-Seven in Name, but Only Ten in Real Entity
First ask: are the thirty-seven dharmas thirty-seven different things? The treatise answers that they are not — “though the names of these factors of awakening are thirty-seven, the real entities are only ten, namely discernment, diligence, and the rest.” It then subsumes them item by item: discernment comprises eight (the four foundations of mindfulness, the faculty and the power of discernment, the limb of awakening that is the discernment of dharmas, right view); diligence comprises eight (the four right abandonings, the faculty and the power of vigor, the limb of awakening that is vigor, right vigor); absorption comprises eight (the four bases of supernormal power, the faculty and the power of absorption, the limb of awakening that is absorption, right absorption); confidence comprises two; mindfulness comprises four; and the rest — joy, equanimity, pliancy, moral discipline (right speech, right action, right livelihood), and applied thought (right intention) — one each. The total, then, is the five faculties and five powers beginning with confidence, with joy, equanimity, pliancy, moral discipline, and applied thought added on top.
Yuanhui numbers the ten items one by one and lists what each comprises, the handiest of all for a beginner: “though the names are thirty-seven, the real entities discussed are only ten: first discernment, second diligence, third absorption, fourth confidence, fifth mindfulness, sixth joy, seventh equanimity, eighth pliancy, ninth moral discipline, tenth applied thought.”
The treatise at once records a divergent account alongside: “the Vibhāṣā masters say there are eleven, for bodily action and verbal action are not mingled with each other, and so moral discipline is divided into two, the remaining nine being as before” — opening moral discipline into the discipline of bodily action and of verbal action. The two accounts are recorded together, without adjudication.
The easy error: to read the subsuming as meaning that “the thirty-seven are a fiction.” The names are not fictions — one and the same discernment functions differently at different stations, and so different names are established. In practice: this is the most typical demonstration in the treatise of “many names, few items”; read numbered dharmas without asking after the entities and the numbers will lead you by the nose.
XXIII. Why the Foundations of Mindfulness Are Called Discernment, the Right Abandonings Diligence, and the Bases of Supernormal Power Absorption
First ask: since the entities of the three groups beginning with the four foundations of mindfulness comprise all preparatory wholesome dharmas whatever, why does each hang upon a single name? The stanza answers, “the four foundations of mindfulness, the four right abandonings, and the four bases of supernormal power are said to be discernment, diligence, and absorption according to the portion that predominates; in truth they are all the preparatory wholesome dharmas.” The treatise explains: these three groups of wholesome dharmas “as to real entity comprise all preparatory wholesome dharmas whatever; and yet, according to the wholesome root that predominates within their own class, they are said in order to be discernment, diligence, and absorption” — the name is established upon the portion that predominates, not upon the whole.
Each of the three names has its own gloss. For the name “foundation of mindfulness,” the Vibhāṣā masters say “discernment is held by the force of mindfulness and so abides,” while the author gives another correct explanation — “in truth of principle it is by discernment that mindfulness is made to abide upon its object, because only one who sees as things really are can note them clearly.” Puguang marks the difference between the two: “the answer: discernment is named a foundation of mindfulness, the name taken from its cause… the author’s correct explanation: discernment is named a foundation of mindfulness, the name taken from its result.” The name “right abandoning” is given because this diligence “can cut off indolence,” or it is named “right excelling,” because “among the properly holding and spurring on of body, speech, and mind, this is the most excellent.” And the name “base of supernormal power” is given “because the various wondrous merits rest upon it.”
At the bases of supernormal power the treatise refutes one account with its own hand. Certain other masters say that “the supernormal is precisely absorption, and the base is desire and the rest”; the treatise refutes them with two objections: that then the entities of the factors of awakening would be thirteen (desire and mind being added), and that this contradicts what the sūtra says — the sūtra saying expressly that “here the Buddha calls the result of absorption the supernormal, and calls the concentration produced by desire and the rest the base.”
The easy error: to read this section as a study of terms. What it really demonstrates is a general rule — the name of a numbered dharma is for the most part taken from the portion that predominates. In practice: whenever you meet a numbered dharma whose name and item seem not to answer to each other, first ask “from which portion is this name taken?”, and most often it will come clear.
XXIV. Why Confidence and the Rest Are First Faculties and Then Powers · and Why the Sequence Is What It Is
First ask: the same five dharmas — why called faculties first and powers afterward? The treatise answers with two senses: “because these five dharmas are divided as earlier and later according to the low and the high grade, and again according to whether they can or cannot be overborne.” At the low grade they are named faculties, at the high grade powers; while they can be overborne they are named faculties, when they cannot be overborne, powers.
Ask again: on what ground is the sequence confidence, vigor, mindfulness, absorption, discernment ranged just so? The treatise gives a chain of cause and effect: “with regard to cause and effect he first raises a mind of confidence and, for the sake of the fruit, cultivates the cause; next he raises vigor; through vigor mindfulness abides upon its object; through the holding force of mindfulness the mind thereupon obtains absorption; and because the mind has obtained absorption he can know as things really are” — confidence rises and practice follows, practice endures and mindfulness and absorption follow, mindfulness and absorption come and the real is seen. So this sequence is not a convenience of listing but the actual order of practice.
The easy error: to see faculties and powers as two different sets of dharmas. They are two intensities of the same five. In practice: this point may be used as a self-examination — if there is confidence without vigor, or vigor without mindfulness, the chain breaks just there; the order of the five is itself a checklist for the course of training.
XXV. The Seven Groups of Factors of Awakening Predominate in Turn by Station
First ask: are the thirty-seven limbs cultivated all at once, or in order? The stanza answers, “at the stage of initial undertaking, at the stage of the factors conducive to penetration, and at the stages of the path of cultivation and the path of seeing, the seven groups beginning with the foundations of mindfulness should be known to predominate in order.” The treatise assigns them station by station: at the stage of initial undertaking the function of discernment is excellent, and so the foundations of mindfulness predominate; at the stage of warmth the function of diligence is excellent, and so the right abandonings predominate; at the stage of the summit the function of absorption is excellent, and so the bases of supernormal power predominate; at the stage of receptivity the wholesome roots are firm, and so the faculties predominate; at the stage of the highest worldly dharma he is not overborne by afflictions or by worldly dharmas, and so the powers predominate; at the stage of the path of cultivation he is near to awakening, and so the limbs of awakening predominate; at the stage of the path of seeing he turns swiftly, and so the limbs of the path predominate.
What matters is the reminder the treatise adds next: the sūtras “speak according to the increase of number, seven first and eight after; this is not the sequence of cultivation” — the text ranges them by increasing number (the seven limbs of awakening before, the eight limbs of the path after), and this is not the order of practice. The treatise also distinguishes in passing two pairs of name and item: among the eight limbs of the path, right view is both the path and a limb of the path; among the seven limbs of awakening, the discernment of dharmas is both awakening and a limb of awakening.
Here the treatise records a divergent account alongside: certain other masters, not refuting the sequence of the sūtras, state it in accordance with them, beginning from the foundations of mindfulness that subdue the mind and going on through the faculties, the powers, the limbs of awakening, and the limbs of the path, and adducing two sūtras in evidence. The two accounts are recorded together, and the treatise turns to what follows with “such being the sequence stated according to the stages at which each predominates, as for the truth of the principle it should be as stated.” Yuanhui’s plain explanation of this passage may be consulted — “at this stage of initial undertaking he can examine and illumine in detail the four objects beginning with the body, and since the function of discernment is excellent, the foundations of mindfulness are said to predominate.”
The easy error: to read “predominate” as “only this group is cultivated.” Predominating is a function’s standing out, not the others’ being left uncultivated. In practice: this section gives a map of the shifting center of gravity in training — with the same thirty-seven limbs, the place where effort belongs differs at different stages.
XXVI. Which Extend to What Is with Outflows, and Which Are without Outflows Only
First ask: are all thirty-seven limbs dharmas without outflows? The stanza answers, “the seven limbs of awakening and the eight limbs of the path are without outflows throughout; the three fours and the five faculties and powers all extend to both kinds.” The treatise explains the reason: the seven limbs of awakening and the eight limbs of the noble path are “established only at the stages of the path of cultivation and the path of seeing” — their very establishing is bound to the noble stations; and as for right view and the like being found in the world too, “yet those do not obtain the name of limbs of the noble path.” The rest — the four foundations of mindfulness, the four right abandonings, the four bases of supernormal power, and the five faculties and five powers — extend to what is with and what is without outflows.
Yuanhui unfolds the stanza’s abbreviations one by one: “‘three fours’ means first the four foundations of mindfulness, second the four right abandonings, third the four bases of supernormal power; ‘the five faculties and powers’ means the five faculties and the five powers” — just the place where a reader is apt to stick in reading the stanza.
The easy error: to suppose that whatever is called a factor of awakening is without outflows. Quite the contrary: most of them extend to both. In practice: this point makes one thing clear — one and the same dharma is with outflows when cultivated at an ordinary station and without outflows when raised at a noble one; the name does not change while the nature turns with the station.
XXVII. The Increase and Decrease of the Thirty-Seven Limbs at the Several Levels
First ask: are the thirty-seven limbs complete at every level? The treatise answers that only the first meditative absorption has them complete, the rest each having something taken away: at the level of access the limb of awakening that is joy is excepted, because “at a threshold level one turns by exertion, and one still has misgivings about the dharmas of the level below”; in the second meditative absorption right intention is excepted, “because in that meditative absorption there is no longer applied thought” — these two levels have thirty-six each. In the third and fourth meditative absorptions and the intermediate absorption, joy and applied thought are both excepted, and each has thirty-five. At the first three formless levels the three limbs of moral discipline are excepted together with joy and applied thought, and each has thirty-two. The desire realm and the summit of existence except the limbs of awakening and the limbs of the path, and each has twenty-two, “because there is nothing without outflows there.”
The easy error: to read the subtraction as meaning that the path cannot be accomplished at that level. What is subtracted is the limb that level does not have (a level without applied thought naturally has no right intention), not that the path cannot be accomplished. In practice: in reading this section one should reckon as one goes — thirty-seven less one gives thirty-six, less one again thirty-five, thirty-seven less five gives thirty-two; these numbers are themselves the method of verification. Yuanhui’s explanation of the numbers level by level may be read alongside.
XXVIII. The Four Purities of Realization
First ask: what is meant by a purity of realization? The treatise first lists the four — toward the Buddha, toward the dharma, toward the Saṅgha, and the noble moral discipline; and then glosses the name: “because he awakens to and knows the principle of the four noble truths as it really is, it is called realization,” while “the three jewels in which he has confidence and the excellent śīla are both called pure, because they are apart from the stain of unbelief and the stain of breaking moral discipline.” So a purity of realization is a pure confidence got through realization, not confidence of an ordinary sort.
The order of obtaining has its niceties. At the stage of the path of seeing, on seeing each of the first three truths he obtains only the purity of realization toward the dharma and that of moral discipline; only at the stage of seeing the truth of the path does he obtain besides those toward the Buddha and the Saṅgha. The dharma in which he has confidence is again divided as general and particular — the general extends to all four truths, the particular is only the whole of the three truths together with the path of a bodhisattva or a pratyekabuddha. The real items are only two: the three, Buddha, dharma, and Saṅgha, have confidence for their entity, and the noble moral discipline has moral discipline for its entity; and all four are without outflows only, “because a dharma with outflows is not a purity of realization.”
The treatise also states the order in which they arise on emerging from contemplation: first he has confidence that the World-Honored One is perfectly and fully awakened; next that the true dharma and discipline are well spoken; last that the noble stage is of excellent conduct; and finally, because the mind is pure, pure śīla is given rise to, and so śīla is spoken of as fourth. The treatise gives two similes — the three jewels as a good physician, a good medicine, and one who nurses the sick; or as a guide, a road, fellow merchants, and the vehicle one rides.
The easy error: to take the four purities of realization for four kinds of confidence to be cultivated. They are four portions accomplished of themselves after the truths are seen, and the order too is a sequence on the side of the fruit. In practice: to examine oneself by the four similes is the handiest way — with physician, medicine, and nurse, if any one of the three is lacking the illness is not removed; and moral discipline is the medicine one can take oneself.
XXIX. Right Liberation and Right Knowledge: Why They Are Not Established at the Stage of Training
First ask: the sūtra says that one in training accomplishes eight limbs and one beyond training ten; why are right liberation and right knowledge not established at the stage of training? The treatise answers: “at the stage of training there are still bonds remaining that have not been liberated from, and so there is no limb of liberation” — adding a sentence of blocking: “it is not that one may be called liberated by being apart from some small portion of the bonds; nor that a knowledge of liberation may be established where there is no entity of liberation.” One beyond training has escaped the bonds and can besides give rise to two knowledges that know liberation, and “only through the manifestness of these two may these two limbs be established.”
The entity of liberation is twofold. “The entity of liberation is twofold, conditioned and unconditioned. Conditioned liberation is the resolve of one beyond training; unconditioned liberation is the cessation of all confusion.” The name “limb” must be established upon what is conditioned, and so conditioned liberation is named a limb of one beyond training; and the liberation comprised under a limb is again the liberation of mind and the liberation through discernment spoken of in other sūtras, that is, the aggregates of liberation.
Here the treatise raises an objection against itself and records a divergent account: since the sūtra says “the mind is liberated in becoming free of the defilement of greed, and liberated in becoming free of the defilement of hatred and delusion,” it appears that the aggregate of liberation is not resolve alone. The treatise answers with the portion that is cultivation (what is not complete being made complete, what is complete being cultivated with desire and diligence for the sake of holding it fast); and records besides an account of certain other masters — “by the force of true knowledge greed, hatred, and delusion are dispelled, and this very being of the mind apart from stain is called the aggregate of liberation.” As for the entity of right knowledge, “it is as was said above of awakening, namely the knowledge of exhaustion and the knowledge of non-arising spoken of above.”
The easy error: to see the difference between eight limbs and ten as a difference in the quantity of merit. The difference is in whether a limb can be established at all, and whether it can depends on whether the bonds are exhausted. In practice: this section and section XXI interlock head and tail — awakening is the knowledge of exhaustion and of non-arising, and right knowledge is the knowledge of exhaustion and of non-arising too; the net of terms in this treatise bites into itself at every point.
XXX. The Mind beyond Training Is Liberated from Obstruction at the Very Time of Its Arising
First ask: in which time exactly is the mind liberated? The treatise adduces the account of this treatise itself: “the first mind beyond training, at the time of its arising in the future, is liberated from obstruction.” And the obstruction meant is the “acquisition” of the afflictions — “because that can block this mind from arising.” Whereupon there is a pair of correspondences: at the stage where the vajra-like concentration is properly ceasing, that acquisition is properly being cut off, and the first mind beyond training, at the stage of properly arising, is properly liberated; at the stage where the vajra-like concentration has already ceased, that acquisition has already been cut off, and the first mind beyond training, at the stage of having already arisen, is named already liberated.
The treatise at once adds three questions: minds beyond training not yet arisen, and mundane minds, are at that time also named liberated, only that here it is the one settled to arise that is spoken of, “because at that time it is properly proceeding in the present time.” From what are mundane minds liberated? From that same obstruction which blocks the mind from arising. At the stage where it is not yet liberated, does this mind then not arise? The answer: “although it does arise then, it is not as it is now” — the difference being that then it was “together with the acquisition of the afflictions,” whereas if it arises hereafter there will be “no acquisition of confusion together with it.”
The easy error: to imagine “liberation” as the mind’s escaping out of somewhere. What is liberated from here is the acquisition of the afflictions, that blocking; the obstruction is removed and the mind is able to arise. In practice: this section demonstrates the fineness of the treatise’s analysis of times and stages — properly arising, already arisen, and not yet arisen each have their name, and to confound one with another is to be wrong throughout. Yuanhui’s explanation may be read alongside.
XXXI. The Path Cuts Off Obstruction Only at the Stage of Properly Ceasing
First ask: at which stage does the path cut off obstruction? The stanza answers, “the path, only at the stage of properly ceasing, makes that obstruction be cut off.” The treatise explains the wording: “to say ‘the stage of properly ceasing’ shows that it stands in the present; to say ‘properly arising’ shows that it is in the future time” — so the path can cut off obstruction only at the time of properly ceasing, and at the other stages there is no function of cutting off obstruction.
The treatise also draws a contrast on purpose: in this it is unlike liberation. Liberation may extend to what has not yet arisen, “because what has arisen and what has not are alike in point of being apart from obstruction”; but the cutting off of obstruction is not so, and lasts a single moment only. Fabao adduces Correct Principle to add a further layer: “although the minds of one in training are also liberated from obstruction at the stage of arising, the treatise speaks only of the first mind beyond training being liberated at the time of its arising, because it goes by the liberation realized in cutting off without remainder.”
The easy error: to see the cutting off of obstruction and liberation as two ways of stating one and the same thing. The treatise here parts them expressly — the cutting off of obstruction is confined to the stage of properly ceasing, whereas liberation extends to what has arisen and what has not. In practice: this is the most finely analyzed section in the fascicle, and its value lies not in its conclusion but in its method: the different sides of one and the same matter each have their own time and stage.
XXXII. The Element of Abandoning, the Element of Dispassion, the Element of Cessation
First ask: the sūtra speaks of three elements — abandoning, dispassion, cessation; what are their entities? The treatise answers, “the three elements beginning with abandoning are the unconditioned liberation spoken of above, divided out to be severally their entities” — that is, the unconditioned liberation spoken of before divided into three portions. The division is: “as for the element of dispassion, it is dispassion toward craving only. As for the element of abandoning, it is the abandoning of the remaining fetters. As for the element of cessation, it is the cessation of the remaining things in which the latent tendencies of craving and the rest increase by attachment.”
So the three are not three different unconditioned things, but one and the same unconditioned liberation with three names established according to what is counteracted — dispassion said with regard to craving, abandoning with regard to the remaining fetters, cessation with regard to the things in which the latent tendencies increase by attachment.
The easy error: to read the three elements as three places or three stages. They are the names of three divisions of one unconditioned dharma. In practice: this section carries on the line of “many names, few items” from before — one entity, with different names established according to what is counteracted. This is the third of the treatise’s standing ways of establishing names (the first two being by what predominates and by the station in the sequence).
XXXIII. The Four Alternatives of Disgust and Dispassion (the End of the Chapter)
First ask: if one can be disgusted, must one be able to become dispassionate? The treatise answers that one need not, and adjudges it by four alternatives. There are two criteria: disgust takes only suffering and origin as its object — “only the receptivities and knowledges arising with suffering and origin as their object are called disgust; the rest are not”; dispassion extends to all four truths and is measured by the ability to cut off confusion — “among the receptivities and knowledges arising with the four truths as their object, all that can cut off confusion obtain the name of dispassion.” The one limits the object and the other limits the function, and their widths and narrownesses cross, and so four alternatives are made.
The four alternatives are: taking suffering and origin as object without cutting off confusion, disgust and not dispassion; taking cessation and the path as object and cutting off confusion, dispassion and not disgust; taking suffering and origin as object and cutting off confusion, both disgust and dispassion; taking cessation and the path as object without cutting off confusion, neither disgust nor dispassion.
At the end the treatise adds an instance: for one who becomes free of the defilement of desire first and sees the truths afterward, among his dharma-receptivities and knowledges all that are comprised in the path of preparation, the path of liberation, and the path of further advance do not cause confusion to be cut off — “because the confusion has already been cut off, and because they are not the counteragent that cuts off.”
The easy error: to read disgust and dispassion as a relation of feeling to result. What the treatise sets up is two different criteria (object and function), and the four alternatives are only the exhaustive crossing of the two. In practice: the fourfold method is the tool most used in Abhidharma — when two concepts are tangled, first establish the criterion of each and then set out four alternatives, and the relation declares itself. That the whole chapter closes with it hands the reader over to the gate of knowledge in the next chapter.
Further Resonances: The Mirror of the Four Commentaries
The above is the sense of the text of this fascicle itself. Below a separate section is set up, gathering four matters: the adjudications of the four houses and where they differ; Saṅghabhadra’s refutations and restatements; the divergences of Paramārtha’s earlier translation; and coordinates for parallel reading. A mirror is not the treatise, but only another way of reading the same passage; both are recorded without adjudication, and each is left in its own place.
1. Where the Four Houses Differ
This unit is the first in the whole book for which all four houses are present. Shentai’s commentary is a fragment: of the four fascicles on the Chapter of the Worthy and the Noble only Fascicle Seventeen survives, and it happens to cover this fascicle entire; for the other three units Shentai is wholly wanting, and the want is marked as it stands and not filled out with text from another fascicle. Shentai’s fascicle heads itself “Chapter Six, Analysis of the Worthy and the Noble, part three” while marking what it explains as “Fascicle Twenty-Five of the treatise,” and at its end bears the title “Commentary on the Abhidharmakośa, Fascicle Twenty-Five” — the fascicle numbers at head and end differ in three ways, and are recorded as they stand without adjudication.
The manner of the outline divides in two. Puguang’s eight subsections and Yuanhui’s are almost word for word the same; Fabao gathers the first three into one and so has six, his layers being the wider; Shentai sets up no general outline table but establishes an outline of question and answer passage by passage (citing what precedes, question, answer, pressing, adducing the stanza in answer, explaining the stanza). On the extent of “the eight matters of the chapter of the six lineages” itself the four houses do not differ at all; what differs is the coarseness or fineness of the outline. Shentai’s form is the oldest, his outline not yet settled into eight matters ranged side by side — this is a difference of form, not an omission.
Shentai leaves an independent piece of evidence for the stanza count. He marks of himself “from here below, the fourth, seven and a half lines of stanza explaining the six kinds of lineage” — seven and a half lines being exactly one hundred fifty characters, answering exactly to Root 58 through the first half of Root 65. This is a further piece of evidence for the stanza count passage by passage, lying outside the interlinear notes of the root-stanza edition.
On the author’s declaration the four houses use three forms of words and mean one thing. Puguang has “the author’s intent sides with the Sautrāntikas, and so he says that what they say accords with principle”; Fabao has “the author by his appraisal takes up the Sautrāntika explanation”; Shentai has “the author appraises it, saying: what they say accords with principle.” The three differ in fullness of wording and agree wholly in the criterion. Shentai has besides one turn of phrase worth noting: he cites Correct Principle directly and calls Vasubandhu “the Sūtra-master,” where Puguang and Fabao say “the Sautrāntikas” and “the author” — a slight difference in the angle of designation, one and the same person being meant. The same happens at the refutation of the entity of the bases of supernormal power: Puguang has “the author refutes the other masters,” Shentai “the Sūtra-master refutes them, saying.”
Yuanhui does not touch the schools at all in the dispute over falling back from a fruit. In this passage he explains only the doctrinal sense of the stanza text itself — “the lineage that is the dharma of the unshakable assuredly has no principle of falling back; and among the five before it, the one lineage of the dharma of falling back alone assuredly does not fall back, since it stands lowest” — neither marking the names of Sautrāntika and Sarvāstivādin nor adducing an assignment of schools. Set against Puguang’s marking of the school sentence by sentence and Fabao’s tabulating of three schools, it is in this passage that the characters of the three houses are most clearly parted. Recorded without adjudication.
Fabao alone sets out a table of three schools on falling back from a fruit. “He sets forth the Sarvāstivāda position. According to the Treatise on the Wheel of Tenets: for the Mahāsāṃghikas and the rest, the fruit of the stream-enterer admits of falling back and the fruit of worthiness does not. For the Sautrāntikas, neither the stream-enterer nor the fruit of worthiness falls back. For the Sarvāstivādins, the stream-enterer does not fall back and the fruit of worthiness does.” Puguang at the same place also adduces the Treatise on the Wheel of Tenets, in a single line of narrative. The assignments of the three schools in the two commentaries agree wholly, and Fabao’s table shows the outline the better. This belongs to the ancient masters’ adducing another treatise to settle an assignment of schools, and is not in this treatise, and so is recorded in this section.
Two instances of a one-character difference. In the simile of the butter jar, Puguang and Fabao make the character elided “holding,” while Shentai makes it two words, “this is made” — “as the world says in full ‘this is made a butter jar.’” And at the four alternatives of disgust and dispassion, Shentai reads “are called ‘condition’” where Puguang and Yuanhui read “disgust.” Both are recorded as they stand without adjudication, and not emended by conjecture.
On the three accounts of the Mahāvibhāṣā the three commentaries agree wholly. At the passage on the entities of the thirty-seven limbs, Fabao adduces: “the Mahāvibhāṣā, Fascicle Ninety-Five, has three accounts: one account agrees with this treatise; one account opens moral discipline into two and takes eleven dharmas as the entities; one master opens it into three, namely right speech, right action, and right livelihood. This treatise states them gathered, taking ten dharmas as the entities,” and what Yuanhui adduces runs the same way. The three houses have no divergence, differing only in fullness.
At the four purities of realization and at the three elements, all three commentaries adduce Correct Principle by way of supplement. Fabao adduces “the Treatise Conforming to Correct Principle says: with regard to what dharmas, and how, does one obtain the purity of realization toward the dharma? With regard to suffering alone: penetrating that there are only dharmas and no real sentient being, one gives rise to settled confidence”; and at the three elements, “Correct Principle, Fascicle Seventy-Two, says: as to the entity of the three elements, taken provisionally they differ, but taken as real things there is no difference at all.” This belongs to the commentators’ supplementing with another treatise what this treatise leaves unstated; there is no divergence of doctrine, and it is recorded only.
2. Saṅghabhadra’s Refutations and Restatements
Neither of Saṅghabhadra’s two treatises gives this chapter the name “Chapter, Analysis of the Worthy and the Noble” — the Treatise Conforming to Correct Principle has “Chapter Six, Adjudication of the Worthy and the Noble,” and the Treatise Revealing the Doctrine “Chapter Seven, Adjudication of the Worthy and the Noble,” the chapter number moved back by one. To search these two treatises by the Kośa’s chapter name must yield a zero.
The dispute over falling back from a fruit is the one place in this unit where three parties stand as a tripod. Saṅghabhadra cites Vasubandhu word for word and examines him: “now, upon examination, the Sūtra-master has not established his position well. One ought to press the inquiry: as to the two middle fruits obtained by a mundane path, has the seed of the confusion that obstructs them really been uprooted, or not? If it really has been uprooted and yet falling back is admitted, then falling back from the state of an arhat is established.” He separately marks two further houses: “therefore the Elder maintains that there is no falling back from and losing the fruit of the arhat, though he has neither reasoning nor scripture for it”; “the Masters of Distinction say this: on no noble path whatever is there falling back, and so the confusion cut off never arises again.” ⇒ The Sūtra-master, the Elder, and the Masters of Distinction all three maintain that there is no falling back, and only the Sarvāstivāda school itself maintains that there is. The lines of reasoning of the three are not the same (Vasubandhu appraising and taking up the Sautrāntikas’ two proofs from scripture and reason, the Elder saying flatly that there is neither reasoning nor scripture, and the Masters of Distinction pushing the range to every noble path), and Saṅghabhadra refutes them one by one and so returns to his own school. Recorded only, without adjudication.
In one place what Saṅghabhadra refutes is not Vasubandhu. On the reason “resting on no entity,” Saṅghabhadra adduces a passage of “certain other masters” who extend the reason of there being no falling back from the confusion abandoned through seeing to the confusion abandoned through cultivation and bound to the summit of existence, and then adjudges, “what they say is contrary to principle, since the force of the paths differs.” What is refuted is that extension and not Vasubandhu’s own sense. That one and the same gloss should be extended by different persons to different conclusions is here an instance.
In two places he only restates without setting up a divergent view. In the passage of the Sūtra of the Increase by Ten, Saṅghabhadra cites Vasubandhu’s own sentences word for word with no word of direct refutation to be found; and so likewise in the passage refuting the entity of the bases of supernormal power. This belongs to restatement of the recording kind, and is noted.
In one place what he appraises is the angle of interpretation and not the conclusion. At the Sūtra of the Simile of the Charcoal, Saṅghabhadra says, “examining the Sūtra-master’s intent, he takes it that in this sūtra the stage of training is spoken of first and the stage beyond training afterward; now one ought to examine carefully whether this may be relied on as settled — whether it is the word of the World-Honored One or the Sūtra-master’s own intent.” What he questions is whether the outline order “training first, beyond training afterward” issues from the sense of the sūtra itself or from Vasubandhu’s arrangement. What is contested is the reading, not the conclusion.
The entity of the aggregate of liberation is also restated. Saṅghabhadra reports Vasubandhu’s intent as “it is not resolve alone that obtains the name of this aggregate. If so, what is it? By the force of true knowledge greed and hatred and delusion can be forever dispelled, and the mind’s being apart from stain is called the aggregate of liberation,” agreeing with the same passage as recorded by Fabao and by Shentai.
One honest negative proposition. Within the range corresponding to this unit, the Treatise Revealing the Doctrine shows no sentence citing “the Sūtra-master” word for word. But all that this zero can prove is one thing — that within this range that treatise does not use the designation “the Sūtra-master”; it cannot be inferred from it that the treatise has no divergent view here. The Treatise Revealing the Doctrine is by form the terser, and word-for-word citation of the Sūtra-master is not what it cares for.
3. The Divergences of Paramārtha’s Earlier Translation
Paramārtha’s Expository Treatise on the Treasury forms a system of its own over the passage answering to this fascicle, and is besides the most evenly matched stretch of scene among all the fascicles yet collated — the six kinds of arhat, the earlier and later of the lineages, falling back from lineage and from fruit, the six lineages of those in training and of ordinary beings, the three kinds of falling back, the refining of the faculties, the nine kinds of those beyond training, the seven noble persons, fullness, the four paths, the thirty-seven limbs, the four purities of realization, right liberation and right knowledge, the three elements, and the four alternatives of disgust and dispassion — passage by passage the order answers.
Not one of the six lineage-names agrees wholly. Paramārtha has “first the dharma of falling and sinking, second the dharma of self-slaying, third the dharma of watching and guarding, fourth the dharma of abiding unshaken, fifth the dharma of being fit to penetrate, sixth the dharma of the indestructible.” What calls for care is the fourth, “the dharma of abiding unshaken” — what it answers to is Xuanzang’s dharma of abiding, not the dharma of the unshakable; Xuanzang’s dharma of the unshakable appears in Paramārtha as “the dharma of the indestructible.” The glosses of the two texts make it clear: Paramārtha’s fourth reads, “if a person is apart from the strongest cause and condition of falling and sinking, then although he does not constantly watch, he will assuredly abide in what he has obtained”; his sixth reads, “as for the dharma of the indestructible, such a person assuredly does not fall and sink as the former do.” To go by the look of the words and equate Paramārtha’s “dharma of abiding unshaken” with Xuanzang’s “dharma of the unshakable” is the pitfall most easily stepped into in this stretch.
One difference of glossing that runs through the whole passage. Xuanzang’s “possessed of an entity / resting on no entity” is throughout Paramārtha’s “possessed of kind / without kind” — “because the confusion abandoned through seeing is without kind,” expanded as “this self upon which they rest is assuredly nowhere at all, and so it is said to be without kind.” The doctrinal content indicated is wholly the same, the characters used wholly different.
The author’s declaration is plainer in Paramārtha. Xuanzang has “what they say accords with principle”; Paramārtha has “this sense is truly admissible” — which corroborates exactly Puguang’s marking, “his intent sides with the Sautrāntikas.”
The crossing of the names of the three elements is the one place in this fascicle that most calls for care. Xuanzang establishes the element of dispassion, the element of abandoning, and the element of cessation; Paramārtha establishes “the element of cessation, the element of freedom from desire, and the element of utter removal.” Compared by the context of the glosses, the correspondence is crossed: Xuanzang’s element of dispassion (dispassion toward craving) answers to Paramārtha’s element of freedom from desire (the cessation of desire); Xuanzang’s element of abandoning (abandoning the remaining fetters) answers to Paramārtha’s element of cessation (the cessation of the remaining confusions); Xuanzang’s element of cessation (the cessation of those things) answers to Paramārtha’s element of utter removal (the cessation of the other kind). Both texts have a name reading “the element of cessation,” and the two indicate different things — pair them by the look of the words and they must be mismatched.
The order of the list of ten things differs in the two texts. Xuanzang begins with discernment, Paramārtha with “confidence, vigor, mindfulness, concentration, discernment, joy, equanimity, and pliancy, moral discipline, and awakening,” beginning with confidence; and again Xuanzang’s diligence, absorption, and applied thought appear in Paramārtha as vigor, concentration, and awakening. The difference in order may reflect a difference in the recitational transmission upon which the two texts rested; this is not forced to an explanation here, but honestly recorded as a difference of transmission between the two.
There are besides several smaller divergences that may be read alongside: the personal name Godhika appears in Paramārtha as “the pure-lived Qutijia”; the sūtra title Sūtra of the Increase by Ten as Sūtra of the Ten Increases; the path of further advance as the path of further increase; the jewel of the Saṅgha as “the assembly of disciples in whom one has confidence.” In form, Xuanzang gives the whole stanza first and the prose after, while Paramārtha embeds his explanation sentence by sentence, so that one stanza of Xuanzang’s often appears in Paramārtha as two verses stated separately — as at all three of “those in training and ordinary beings likewise have six,” “the fullness of the one in training and the one beyond training,” and “the four alternatives of disgust and dispassion.” Both are recorded without adjudication.
4. Coordinates for Parallel Reading
What this fascicle establishes is a map of the differences within the noble persons. Its frame has only two variables: the keenness or dullness of the faculties, and whether absorption has been obtained. By these the six kinds of lineage are divided, the nine kinds of those beyond training are divided, the four gates of the seven noble persons are opened out, the fullness of the one in training and the one beyond training is adjudged, and the slowness or swiftness of the four modes of penetrating progress is settled. Having read the fascicle through and looking back, one finds that the treatise has not ranked arhats high and low at all — the afflictions cut off are one and the same portion, and what differs is only the supports and the speed with which one arrived there.
The second line for parallel reading is name and item. Thirty-seven names have only ten entities; seven noble persons have only six items; the three elements are only three portions of one unconditioned liberation — three times over this fascicle demonstrates one and the same technique: establishing a name by the portion that predominates, by the station in the sequence, and by what is counteracted. Whoever reads the numbered dharmas of Abhidharma asking first “is this a name or an item?” will most often not be led by the nose by the numbers.
The third line is left for the next chapter. The whole chapter closes with the four alternatives of disgust and dispassion, and the receptivities and knowledges those four alternatives employ are exactly what the next chapter, “Analysis of Knowledge,” will take up as its own subject. The last sentence of this fascicle says of “one who becomes free of the defilement of desire first and sees the truths afterward” that his dharma-receptivities and knowledges do not cause confusion to be cut off — and by that it has already drawn the reader’s eye away to the gate of knowledge.